Giuseppina Abis

Sally Davies

TEACHER’S BOOK
GET ON BOARD
2nd Edition
Fully revised and updated
Realizzazione editoriale:
ART Servizi Editoriali S.r.l. – Bologna

Progetto editoriale: Massimo Manzoni

Coordinamento editoriale: Cinzia Bisognin
Redazione: Silvia Magi
Impaginazione: Pietro Genna

Incisione lastre mediante CTP:

Fotoincisa Effegi, Savigliano (CN)
Stampa: Edizioni Il Capitello, Torino

PROPRIETÀ LETTERARIA RISERVATA

L’Editore, nell’ambito delle leggi internazionali

sul copyright, è a disposizione degli aventi diritto
non potuti rintracciare.

I diritti di traduzione, di riproduzione

e di adattamento, totale o parziale, con qualsiasi
mezzo, compresi microfilm e copie fotostatiche,
sono riservati per tutti i paesi.

1ª edizione: settembre 2013

Ristampa:
5 4 3 2 1
2018 2017 2016 2015 2014

L’Editore e gli Autori hanno rispettato

le indicazioni di Progetto Polite,
“Pari opportunità e libri di testo”.

© Edizioni il Capitello
Via Sansovino, 243/22/R
10151 Torino
tel. 011-4513611

2
 TEACHER’S BOOK

Struttura del corso

Questo testo di inglese tecnico è rivolto agli studenti degli istituti tecnici dell’indirizzo “Trasporti
e Logistica”. L’obiettivo principale è quello di far acquisire agli studenti conoscenze e competenze
nell’uso della lingua inglese mirate al loro specifico ambito professionale: struttura, contenuti ed
esercizi proposti sono quindi funzionali alla consultazione e comprensione di testi specialistici,
come manuali e istruzioni d’uso di macchinari, così come alla ricezione e trasmissione di messaggi
radio, e all’introduzione alle problematiche della logistica dei trasporti.
Nell’organizzazione e nello sviluppo delle unità si è cercato di rispondere alle seguenti esigenze
didattiche:

significatività dei contenuti: gli argomenti delle unità didattiche sono stati scelti mantenendo
come linee guida i temi che gli studenti affrontano nelle discipline d’indirizzo del corso di studi;
utilità delle attività proposte: l’elaborazione didattica dei testi e l’insieme degli esercizi
proposti per sviluppare le quattro abilità sono strettamente finalizzati al raggiungimento
dell’obiettivo legato alla microlingua;
flessibilità didattica: le singole unità didattiche sono autonome tra loro e consentono
all’insegnante la massima libertà di scelta nel tracciare un eventuale percorso modulare adatto
alle esigenze delle proprie classi; questa organizzazione permette altresì di trovare, all’interno
dell’ampia offerta di argomenti sviluppati nelle diverse unità didattiche, agevoli spunti per
percorsi interdisciplinari.

Si è cercato di rendere le attività proposte in ciascuna unità didattica il più possibile varie e
motivanti. Esse includono tipologie diverse di esercizi, finalizzate sia all’acquisizione delle quattro
abilità, sia all’acquisizione di abilità di studio come la capacità di riassumere e sintetizzare.
All’interno delle unità didattiche si trovano quindi:

esercizi rivolti a facilitare la comprensione del testo – come answer the questions;
esercizi rivolti a facilitare l’acquisizione del lessico – come gli esercizi di matching tra termini
italiani e inglesi che hanno lo stesso significato;
esercizi di listening per completare un paragrafo, intesi sia a motivare l’attività di ascolto, sia
a esercitare la comprensione e il riconoscimento di singoli termini chiave;
esercizi di guided summary intesi a facilitare la sintesi dei contenuti.

Non mancano attività di speaking – realizzate spesso come pair-work – e momenti di riflessione
grammaticale su strutture tipiche della lingua tecnica, per esempio l’uso delle forme passive.
Oltre agli esercizi di ascolto finalizzati al completamento di un breve testo, sono stati selezionati
diversi paragrafi per un’attività di listen and read.

Ciascuna unità didattica si conclude con un project work. Questi consistono in attività varie di
ricerca guidata su Internet, per le quali vengono indicate le pagine specifiche e i relativi link. Tali
attività potranno offrire l’occasione per lavorare nel laboratorio informatico e approfondire,
attraverso il web, i contenuti appresi.

3
TEACHER’S BOOK

In appendice al testo si trovano la sezione di grammatica e il glossario.

La sezione di grammatica (Grammar notes) è costituita da spiegazioni ed esercizi, utili a superare
le principali difficoltà concrete che gli studenti incontrano nello studio della lingua tecnica; questa
sezione è completata da una tavola dei verbi irregolari inglesi. Il glossario (Glossary) riporta la
traduzione dei termini tecnici più frequenti nei brani proposti.

Il testo è corredato da un CD audio che contiene la registrazione di tutti i brani finalizzati

all’ascolto. I brani contraddistinti dal simbolo sono invece disponibili nel sito dell’editore.

Guida per l’insegnante

Nella guida, l’insegnante trova i seguenti supporti didattici:
keys: la soluzione di tutti gli esercizi proposti nelle unità didattiche e nella sezione di
grammatica;
tapescripts: la trascrizione di tutti i brani d’ascolto che lo studente deve completare;
32 tests: i test per la verifica scritta alla conclusione di ciascuna unità didattica, con le relative
soluzioni per agevolare la correzione.

I test sono impostati su varie tipologie di esercizi, sia di produzione sia di riconoscimento.
All’interno dei test è assegnato un punteggio per ogni risposta corretta nei vari esercizi; la somma
dei punteggi di ciascun test è di 30 punti. L’insegnante potrà ricavare il voto in decimi dividendo
per 3 il punteggio totale ottenuto da ciascuno studente.

4

Key to unit exercises
UNIT 1
The main parts of a ship
Ex 1 Listen to the names that refer to the
main parts of the hull and repeat them
after the recording.
amidships, bottom, bow, upper works,
starboard amidships, main deck, port,
sides, starboard, stern, port bow, waterline
Ex 2 Listen to the recording and complete
the text with the missing words, as in the
example 4 .
1 The main body of a ship is the hull.
This is the area between the 1 main deck,
the 2 sides and the 3 bottom. The main
deck is the upper deck, which completely
covers the hull.
2 The hull is divided into three parts:
the 4 bow, the 5 stern and the 6 amidships.
The bow is the fore end of the ship, the
stern is the after end. The amidships is the
part in the middle.
3 The sides of the hull are divided by the 7
waterline, which is a line parallel to the
surface of the water.
The part above the surface of the water is
called the upper works, the part under the
water is called the 8 bottom.
4 An imaginary vertical plane called the
central line divides the hull into two halves:
the right side of the hull is called the 9
starboard side, the left side is called the 10
port side.
5 We can distinguish three areas on each
side of the hull and divide it into six
sections.
On the starboard side there is the starboard
bow, the 11 starboard amidships and the
starboard quarter.
On the port side there is the 12 port bow,
the port amidships, and the port quarter.
6 When you go towards the bow you go
forward, when you go towards the stern
you go aft.
From side to side across the ship is known as
abeam or athwartships.
Ex 3 Use a bilingual dictionary and
complete the table with the Italian
meanings.
Above = al di sopra
Below = al di sotto
02_KeysExercises.indd 5
key to unit exercises
Under = sotto
Towards = verso, in direzione di
Fore end = estremità anteriore
After end = estremità posteriore
Upper deck = ponte superiore
Rearmost part = parte posteriore
Foremost part = parte anteriore
Ex 5 Match the terms you have learned so
far with their definitions.
1d, 2h, 3j, 4g, 5l, 6i, 7e, 8f, 9b, 10c, 11a, 12k
Ex 6 Study the picture and choose the
correct option.
1 amidships
2 after end
3 forward
4 aft
5 abeam
Ex 7 Study the diagram and use the terms
to complete the text, then listen to the
recording and check.
Decks and bulkheads divide the hull into a
number of watertight compartments.
Decks divide the hull horizontally.
1 Bulkheads are vertical steel walls going
across and along the ship. The hull contains
the Engine Room, cargo space, and a
number of tanks.
In dry cargo ships the cargo space is
divided into 2 holds; in liquid cargo ships it
is divided into tanks. In the multi-deck
vessel, a particular type of dry-cargo ship,
the holds are divided up by 3 ’tween decks.
At the fore end of the hull are the fore
4 peak tanks, at the after end are the
5 after peak tanks. They are used for
freshwater and water ballast.
The space between the holds and the
bottom of the hull contains double
6 bottom tanks. These are used for ballast
water and fuel.
Ex 8 See what you can remember and
answer the questions.
1 It is the permanent housing above the
main deck.
2 It consists of three parts: the forecastle,
the bridge and the poop.
3 The forecastle is situated forward, above
the bow.
4 The poop is located aft, above the stern.
25-03-2013 14:49:16
 Teacher’s book
5 It contains the Engine Room, cargo space
and a number of tanks.
6 It is divided into a number of watertight
compartments.
7 The hull is divided by decks and
bulkheads.
8 In a dry-cargo ship, the cargo space is
divided into holds.
9 In a liquid cargo ship the cargo space is
divided into tanks.
10 ’Tween decks are horizontal divisions of
the holds.
11 Fore and after peak tanks are used for
fresh water and water ballast.
12 Double bottom tanks are used for water
ballast or fuel.
Ex 9 Listen to the recording and complete
the first passage. Then read and complete
the second passage.
Passage 1
The diagram shows the layout of a modern
dry cargo ship. The hull is divided up
into a number of watertight 1
compartments by decks and steel 2
bulkheads. At the fore and after ends
of the hull are the 3 fore peak tanks
and the 4 after peak tanks.
The 5 Engine Room is situated at the after
end of the ship to leave more room for
cargo. The cargo space is divided up into
6 watertight compartments. These also have
7 ’tween decks. Above the main deck is the
8 superstructure. At the fore end is the
9 forecastle. At the after end the bridge
superstructure and the 10 poop are
combined.
Passage 2
The diagram 1 shows the layout of an oil
tanker. The hull is 2 divided into a number
of 3 watertight compartments by decks and
bulkheads. At the fore and after ends of
the hull are the forepeak tanks and the
afterpeak tanks.
The Engine Room is 4 situated at the after
end of the ship, to leave more 5 room for
cargo. Between the forepeak tank and the
cargo space is a coffer dam (CD). The
6 cargo space is divided up into a 7 number
of tanks. Above the 8 main deck is the
superstructure. At the 9 fore end is the
forecastle. At the after end, the bridge
superstructure and the poop are 10
combined.
02_KeysExercises.indd 6
Ex 10 Match each English term with its
Italian equivalent and copy the pairs into
your exercise book.
1k, 2m, 3e, 4g, 5h, 6n, 7b, 8d, 9i, 10a, 11l,
12c, 13f, 14j, 15o
UNIT 2
Ships’ measurements and specifications
Ex 4 Match each measurement with its
definition.
1e, 2d, 3g, 4c, 5f, 6b, 7a
Ex 5 Complete the description of “Lucky 3”
with the missing information from the
chart.
Lucky 3 was built by 1 Landers & Sons.
She has an overall length of 2 203.92 m
and a 3 breadth of 37.3 m. Her draft is
4 16.34 m and she has a 5 deadweight of
21,441 t. Her gross tonnage is 6 30,457.
She has a diesel engine which develops a
power of 7 21,000 kW. She can sail at a
8 service speed of 25 knots.
Project Work
AMERIGO VESPUCCI – SPECIFICATIONS
Name AMERIGO VESPUCCI
Building shipyard Castellammare di Stabia (Naples)
Type of ship Sailing vessel (with auxiliary
engine propulsion)
Launched 22nd February 1931
Number of masts 3
Number of sails 26
Length overall 101 m
LBP (length between perpendiculars) 82.38 m
Extreme breadth 15.50 m
Draft 7m
Total height 54.0 m
Full load displacement 4,150 t
Gross tonnage 3,410.36
Net tonnage 1,202.57
Number and type of engines Two 4-stroke FIAT diesel engines
Main engine output 1471 KW (1972.64 Horse Power)
Service speed (sails and engines) Sails 10 knots, engines 12 knots
Crew 240
UNIT 3
Ship classification
Ex 1 Answer the questions.
1 Boats are small open vessels, while ships
can be of a considerable size.
2 Boats can sail for distances of not more
than six nautical miles from the coast.
3 Boats are used for coastal fishing, water
sports and as lifeboats on board ship.
4 No, they don’t. For example, rowing boats
and canoes do not have engines but oars.
25-03-2013 14:49:16
 key to unit exercises

5 Ships are moved or propelled by an 7 Container ships.

engine. 8 Refrigerated ships.
6 Ships can carry goods, vehicles or
Ex 6 On which kind of ship would the
passengers on the open sea.
following people or goods travel? Insert
7 Ships can sail variable distances from the
them into the table.
coast, depending on the kind of navigation
Ferries the Jones’ family and
for which they are authorized.
their car on their way
Ex 2 Choose the correct option. to France / you and
1a, 2b, 3a, 4a, 5c your scooter
Ex 3 Complete with the missing words. LNG carriers methane gas
The authority which classifies and registers Refrigerated ships meat from Argentina /
ships in Italy: the RINA. kiwis from New
The authority which classifies and registers Zealand
ships in Great Britain: the Lloyd’s Register of
Shipping (LR). Chemical carriers paint from Singapore
Classification notations: Dry bulk carriers grain / sugar
class symbol Oil tankers petroleum from the
construction mark Middle East / petrol
type class notation from the SARAS
navigation notation refinery
Unrestricted navigation indicates that the
Container ships antique furniture from
ship can sail on the high seas and in any
China / tinned food
period of the year.
Fishing boats are used for commercial Ex 7 Complete the diagram about the
fishing. different types of merchant ships.
If we need to drag the sea bottom, we use
Merchant ships
a dredger.
Pupils can learn about sailing on board a Passenger ships Cargo ships
schoolship.
Canoeing, rowing and other water sports Cruise ships Dry cargo ships Liquid cargo ships
are done with pleasure crafts.
Ferries Dry bulk carriers Crude oil tankers
Ex 4 Study the above certificate and
answer the questions. Refrigerated ships Chemical tankers
1 This certificate was issued by the RINA.
2 It is a certificate of class. Container ships LNG carriers
3 The ship has been classified as an oil
tanker. Liquid and Dry cargo
4 She has been assigned to unrestricted
OBO carriers
navigation.
5 She will carry crude oil or chemical
products in bulk. Project Work
6 ESP means Enhanced Survey Programme. For the Certificate of Registry,
7 The ship has a double hull which extends Bahamas
for the entire length of the cargo area. SUN
8 The Load Line Certificate, which indicates For the International Tonnage Certificate,
the ship’s safe. Length 74.57 m
Ex 5 Which types of ship are these? Breadth 11.30 m
1 Cruise ships. Depth 6.40 m
2 Ferries. Gross tonnage 1527
3 Dry bulk carriers. Net tonnage 840
4 Oil tankers. For the International Loadline
5 Chemical tankers. Certificate,
6 LNG carriers. SUNNY LADY

02_KeysExercises.indd 7 25-03-2013 14:49:16

 Teacher’s book
NASSAU
1265
In the Document of Safe Manning,
PRINS FILIP
50
For the International Oil Pollution
Prevention Certificate,
LADY
30th April 1999
UNIT 4
Shipbuilding
Ex 1 Answer the questions.
1 Ships are built in shipyards.
2 The USA, Japan and some European
countries like Great Britain, France and
Italy build most of the world’s merchant
ships.
3 To allow vessels to be launched from the
building ways.
4 They are built in slipways or in dry
docks.
5 When they are two-thirds completed.
6 The rest of the work is finished at the
outfitting pier.
Ex 2 Ask questions using the question
word who.
1 Who designs ships?
2 Who approves the basic designs?
3 Who draws up the working plans?
4 Who registers ships?
Ex 3 Complete the table by writing the
past participle of the verbs.
to install (r) / installed
to erect (r) / erected
to build (ir) / built
to lay out (ir) / laid out
Ex 4 Write sentences using the passive
form of the present simple.
1 The keel is built first.
2 Then the bottom with its plating is laid
out.
3 Next, the side framing and bulkheads are
erected.
4 Finally, the superstructure or deckhouse
is installed.
Ex 5 Now ask questions for the given
answers using the passive.
1 Where are ships built?
2 What is built first?
3 What is laid out next?
02_KeysExercises.indd 8
4 When are the side framing and
bulkheads erected?
5 What is installed last?
Ex 6 Reorder the following statements.
The first one has been done to help you.
1d, 2l, 3a, 4e, 5h, 6f, 7j, 8b, 9i, 10c, 11k, 12g
Ex 7 Now rewrite the sentences in the
passive form and make up a paragraph.
Begin like this:
After the classification society has
approved the working plans, the shipyard
starts to build the ship.
First the keel is built, next the bottom with
its plating is laid out. Then the side framing
and bulkheads are erected. Spaces like double
bottom tanks are tested for tightness. Finally
the superstructure is installed.
Shortly before launching, the propeller shafting
and propulsion machinery are installed. As the
ship is launched, she is christened by breaking
a bottle of champagne on her hull. Then the
ship is towed to the outfitting pier, where the
outfitting work is carried out.
Next the ship is taken for a trial trip, then she
is finally delivered to the owner.
Ex 8 Match each term with its definition.
1e, 2g, 3f, 4d, 5a, 6c, 7b
Ex 9 Study the picture that shows in detail
the framework of the hull. Read the text
that describes the picture and insert the
missing words.
The hull framing
The main centreline structural part of the
hull is the 1 keel, which runs from the
stem at the bow to the stern post at the
stern. The keel is the backbone of the ship.
To the keel are fastened the 2 frames,
which run athwartship. These are the ribs
of the ship and give shape and strength to
the hull. Deck 3 beams and bulkheads
support the decks and they give added
strength to resist the pressure of the water
on the sides of the hull.
The plating
The skin, or shell plating, provides water-
tightness. The 4 plates, the principal
strength members of a ship, have various
thicknesses. The heaviest plates are put on
amidships. Using plates of various thickness
reduces the weight of the metal used and
gives the vessel additional 5 strength at its
25-03-2013 14:49:16

broadest part. The plates, put on in rows
from bow to stern, are called 6 strakes.
They are lettered consecutively, beginning
at the keel and going upward.
Strake names
The bottom row of strakes on either side
of the keel is called 7 garboard strakes. The
strakes at the turn of the hull, running in
the bilge, are 8 bilge strakes. The strakes
running between the garboard and bilge
strakes are called bottom strakes and the
topmost strakes of the hull are 9 sheer
strakes. The upper edge of the sheer strake
is the gunwale.
Ex 10 Listen and complete the text with the
missing words given in scrambled order.
How not to build a ship
The construction of the Titanic began in
March 1909 in Belfast in the Harland and
Wolff 1 shipyard. Her owners, the White
Star Line, designed the Titanic to be the
largest ship to ever take to the seas and
spared no expense in her 2 construction. It
took more than 3,000 men, 3 years to build
the Titanic at a cost of $7.5 million.
The marketing materials published before
her 3 maiden voyage claimed that the ship
was “designed to be 4 unsinkable”. The
construction included sixteen 5
compartments that were reported to be 6
watertight.
The builders of the Titanic had included 7
steel doors that could be closed in 25
seconds or less, enclosing any water that
might have seeped in to threaten the
safety of the ship and her occupants.
Of course, we now know that many of the
nearly 3 million rivets used to hold the
ship’s 8 hull plates together popped loose
when the 9 vessel struck a massive iceberg.
Without the rivets to hold the 10 plating
together, water seeped into the ship.
New theories have also suggested that the
11 iron used in the Titanic construction
although standard for the first part of the
20th century contained high degrees of
sulphur, which made the 12 hull plates
particularly susceptible to the icy cold
waters of the Atlantic Ocean.
We will probably never know the exact
cause of the Titanic’s destruction, but her
history and the fate of her passengers will
always remain.
02_KeysExercises.indd 9
key to unit exercises
Project Work
Fill in the tables.
Student A Dock 2
Length 252 m
Width 53 m
Clear width between walls 44 m
Max. ship’s draft at 0 tide 9m
Lifting capacity 33,000 tons
Student B Dock 3
Length 227 m
Width 49 m
Clear width between walls 40 m
Max. ship’s draft at 0 tide 8,7 m
Lifting capacity 30,000 tons
UNIT 5
Visual & sound signals
and communication codes
Ex 1 Answer the questions.
1 They need to be able to communicate
easily and safely.
2 It became particularly relevant at the
beginning of the 19th century, when
there was a huge increase in maritime
transport.
3 It was published in 1857.
4 An International Committee.
5 It was published in seven different
languages.
6 It allows seamen to communicate with
other people who do not speak the same
language.
7 IMO is the International Maritime
Organization.
8 It gives information on different ways of
signalling and it also has tables with the
Morse Code, flags and phonetic tables.
Ex 2 Answer the following questions
about paragraphs 2 and 3.
1 The ship’s siren, a whistle or a bell.
2 Each letter or number is indicated by the
number of blasts of the siren.
3 They are rarely used nowadays, but they
could still be useful in emergency
situations, for example to transmit distress
signals if the radio fails to work.
4 The Morse Code.
5 It is made up of a series of dots and
dashes representing each letter and
number.
6 It was radiotelegraphy.
25-03-2013 14:49:16
 Teacher’s book
7 There are three different types of flags:
letter flags, number flags, and triangular-
shaped flags.
8 A substitute flag.
Ex 3 Try to decipher the message in Morse
Code using the table with the Morse
symbols.
The message reads: “If you can read this you
have understood how Morse works”.
Ex 4 Match each picture with its
description.
5, 4, 6, 1, 2, 3, 8, 7
Ex 5 Look at the flag table and complete
the following descriptions of the
alphabetic flags.
1 The “I” flag has a blue circle on a yellow
background.
2 The “X” flag is a blue cross on a white
background.
3 The “F” flag has a red diamond on a
white background.
4 The “E” flag has two red and blue bands.
5 The “C” flag has narrow red, white and
blue horizontal stripes.
6 The “Q” flag is yellow.
7 The “P” flag has a small white rectangle
on a blue background.
8 The “V” flag has a red diagonal cross on
a white background.
Ex 6 Which alphabet flag is being
described? If you guess correctly, the
letters will spell a sentence!
The sentence is: “Now you try”.
Ex 7 If you understood the message, you
now have to describe the flags in a similar
way. Let’s try to describe the following
national flags.
1 The Italian flag has three green, white
and red vertical bands.
2 The Union Jack is red, white and blue. It
has two red crosses and a white diagonal
cross on a blue background.
3 The Stars and Stripes has a small blue
rectangle in the top left-hand corner with
a lot of white stars. Then it has a lot of red
and white narrow horizontal stripes.
4 The French flag has three blue, white
and red vertical bands.
Ex 8 Answer the questions.
1 VHF radio has replaced radiotelegraphy
nowadays.
10
02_KeysExercises.indd 10
2 They mostly use English.
3 When they transmit messages.
4 When there is a need for extreme clarity
and in cases of language difficulties.
Ex 11 Match each unit of measurement
with its symbol.
1d, 2h, 3g, 4i, 5a, 6c, 7j, 8b, 9f, 10e
Ex 13 Now try to complete the missing
figures in the following parts of the radio
messages.
1 Calling on Channel 1 16.
2 My draught is 2 8.35 metres.
3 Position; bearing 3 zero-nine-five degrees
west, distance 4 two-two miles from
Charter Point.
4 ETA (Estimated Time of Arrival) at
Eurobuoy 5 18.00 GMT, December
6 15.
5 Speed: 7 one five decimal three knots.
6 My cargo is crude oil, 8 three two three
five six five metric tonnes.
Project Work
Find out which flag is used to signal:
1 C (Charlie)
2 N (November)
3 H (Hotel)
4 W (Whiskey)
5 Z (Zulu)
6 P (Papa) signals that all persons should
report on board (sailors should get on
board quickly because the ship is going to
sail and leave port).
UNIT 6
The IALA Buoyage System & ship
navigation lights
Ex 1 Answer the questions.
1 Buoys are floating aids to navigation and
they are found near the coast.
2 They are anchored to the bottom.
3 To ensure the safety of ships navigating
near the coast.
4 Sandbanks, rocks and wrecks.
5 The IALA.
6 International Association of Lighthouse
Authorities.
7 To allow them to be easily identified
from a distance.
8 In 1976.
25-03-2013 14:49:17

Ex 2 Use the table and label the photos
with the shape and colour pattern of each
buoy.
1 This buoy is pillar-shaped. It has red and
white vertical stripes.
2 This buoy is spar-shaped. It has red and
black horizontal bands.
3 This buoy is conical. It is green.
4 This buoy is cylindrical. It has a red colour.
5 This buoy is spherical. It has a yellow
colour.
Ex 3 Try to describe lateral buoys to your
partner, using the notes in the diagrams.
Use sentences like these.
Port-hand buoys can be shaped like a can,
a pillar or a spar. They are coloured in red.
Their topmark is a red can. At night they
have a red light.
Starboard-hand buoys can be shaped like a
cone, a pillar or a spar. They have a green
colour. Their topmark is a green cone. At
night they have a green light.
Ex 4 Look at the world map and answer
the questions.
1 System Region A.
2 System Region B.
3 Australia uses System Region A and
Japan uses System Region B.
Ex 5 What does each Cardinal Mark look
like? Listen and colour the spars. Get your
black and yellow pencils ready!
Number 1 is black over yellow.
Number 2 has two black bands with a
yellow band in the middle.
Number 3 is yellow over black.
Number 4 has two yellow bands with a
black band in the middle.
Ex 6 Now listen and write the name of
each Cardinal Mark.
A North cardinal mark is black over yellow.
The East cardinal mark has two black
bands with a yellow band in the middle.
A South cardinal mark is yellow over black.
The West cardinal mark has two yellow
bands with a black band in the middle.
1 North 2 East 3 South 4 West
Ex 7 Now listen to how each topmark
is described; then continue listening
and write the name of each cardinal buoy.
1 Two black cones pointing upwards.
2 Two black cones pointing downwards.
02_KeysExercises.indd 11
key to unit exercises
3 Two black cones with their bases together.
4 Two black cones with their points together.
The North cardinal buoy has two black
cones pointing upwards as its topmark.
The topmark of the East cardinal buoy is
two black cones with their bases together.
The South cardinal buoy has two black
cones pointing downwards as its topmark.
The topmark of the West cardinal buoy is
two black cones with their points together.
1 North 2 East 3 South 4 West
Students should now draw the topmark
belonging to each cardinal mark in ex 5
pictures.
This is the result:
N E S W
Black Yellow
Ex 8 Complete the description of cardinal
marks.
A North cardinal buoy is 1 black over
2 yellow; its topmark is two black cones
pointing 3 upwards.
An East cardinal buoy has two 4 black
bands with a 5 yellow band in the middle;
as a topmark it has two black cones with
their 6 bases together.
A South cardinal buoy is 7 yellow over
8 black; its topmark is two black cones
pointing 9 downwards.
A West cardinal buoy has two 10 yellow
bands with a 11 black band in the middle;
as a topmark it has two black cones with
their 12 points together.
At night they flash a 13 white light. Their
light consists of a sequence of quick or very
quick white flashes (Q. or V.Q. Flashes)
whose 14 number gives the clock-face
position of the cardinal mark.
So the East mark has 15 three white flashes
every 10 seconds, the South mark has
16 six and the West mark has 17 nine.
The North mark has a 18 continuous quick
white flash.
11
25-03-2013 14:49:17
 Teacher’s book
Ex 9 Look at the diagrams of the isolated
danger marks and try to complete the text
with the missing words.
They are either 1 pillar or spar-shaped.
They are 2 black in colour with one or
more horizontal 3 red bands. Their
topmark is two 4 black spheres. At night
they flash a white 5 light, in groups of
two flashes (Gp Fl 2) with intervals of 5
seconds.
Ex 10 Write the meaning of these
abbreviations and indicate the type of
buoy flashing this light.
1 Q (3) – Three quick flashes – East mark
2 VQ (9) – Nine very quick flashes – West
mark
UNIT 7
Geographical coordinates
3 Gp Fl 2 5s – Groups of 2 flashes every 5
seconds – Danger
4 LFl 10s – A long flash every ten seconds –
Safe water
Ex 11 Do you remember the purpose of
each mark? Write the name of each mark.
1 Isolated danger marks.
2 Special marks.
3 Safe water marks.
4 Cardinal marks.
5 Lateral marks.
Ex 12 Mark the following statements as
True or False and correct the false ones.
1T–2F–3T–4F–5T–6T–7F–8T
2 They have a cone as their topmark.
4 North and South America are in the IALA
System Region B.
7 They are red and white.
Ex 13 Mark the following statements as
True or False and correct the false ones.
1T–2T–3F–4T–5F–6F–7F–8F
3 They are white.
5 They are coloured lights.
6 They must be visible for at least three
miles.
7 The starboard light is green while the
portside light is red.
8 Only ships of over 50 metres in length
must show two masthead lights.
Ex 14 Complete the text with the missing
colours and names of lights.
Vessels which navigate at night must show
1 navigation lights, so that other vessels
can see if there is a danger of collision and
take action to avoid it. All vessels show a
12
02_KeysExercises.indd 12
2 green light at starboard and a 3 red
light at their portside.
They must show a 4 white stern light
(behind or astern).
The red and green lights mentioned are
called 5 sidelights.
Ships must also show at least one
masthead light on the high mast.
Ships which are more than 50 metres long
must have two 6 masthead lights.
All lights have well defined angles through
which they must be visible. Outside of
these angles, the lights cannot be seen.
Ex 1 Answer the questions.
1 A year is the time taken for a planet to
go around the Sun.
2 An imaginary line passing through the
centre of the Earth.
3 The poles are the ends of the Earth’s axis.
4 The Equator divides the Earth into two
hemispheres.
5 They are called the Northern and
Southern Hemispheres.
6 The Earth is 42 kilometres longer across
the Equator than across the poles.
Ex 2 Answer the questions.
1 Parallels are imaginary lines of latitude
running from east to west.
2 Meridians are imaginary lines of
longitude running from north to south.
3 The Prime Meridian is the Greenwich
meridian.
4 The Equator is the Prime Parallel.
5 Parallels have different length: they
become smaller as they get nearer to the
poles.
6 Meridians are all the same length. All of
them run from the North to the South Pole.
Ex 3 Revise what you know about the
Equator by trying to complete the
sentences.
1 The Equator is an imaginary circle around
the Earth.
2 The Equator is located halfway between
the poles.
3 The Equator represents the maximum
circumference of the Earth.
4 The Equator divides the Earth into two
hemispheres.
25-03-2013 14:49:17

5 Places north of the Equator are in the
Northern Hemisphere.
6 Places south of the Equator are in the
Southern Hemisphere.
7 Europe is in the Northern Hemisphere.
8 The Equator is the reference or Prime
Parallel.
Ex 4 Choose the correct option.
1c, 2a, 3b, 4b, 5a, 6c
Ex 5 Complete the text with the missing
words.
To calculate geographical coordinates we
consider the Earth as a 1 sphere.
When we draw latitude and longitude we
start from the 2 centre of the Earth, which
is the Earth’s axis.
Latitude and longitude are indicated in
3 degrees because they are 4 angles
formed at the centre of the Earth.
Latitude is the angle formed at the centre
of the Earth by the arc of the 5 meridian
that joins a point A to the Equator.
Longitude is the angle formed at the
centre of the Earth by the arc of the
6 Equator that links a point A to
Greenwich meridian.
Ex 6 Match each item on the right with an
item on the left.
1f, 2e, 3h, 4j, 5i, 6a, 7b, 8g, 9c, 10d
Ex 7 Answer the questions.
1 There are 24 time zones.
2 There are 15 degrees of longitude in
each of them.
3 Dividing 360 by 24. The degrees of the
Earth considered as a perfect sphere are
360, while 24 is the number of hours the
Earth takes to rotate on its own axis.
4 They are numbered starting from
Greenwich and going to the east.
5 You set your watch one hour back,
because Italy is west of Greenwich.
6 It is the time of each time zone. For
example, all countries in central Europe
(Norway, Denmark, Germany, France and
Italy) have the same standard time because
they are in the same time zone, +1 hour
from Greenwich.
Ex 8 Answer the questions.
1 It is 1,853 metres long.
2 It is equal to the length of 1’ of the
maximum circumference of the Earth.
02_KeysExercises.indd 13
key to unit exercises
3 No, it becomes longer as we move from
the Equator to the poles.
4 It changes as the curvature of the
meridians varies on the Earth’s surface.
5 It is 1,843 metres.
6 It is 1,862 metres.
7 The speed of a ship is measured in
knots.
8 A knot is equal to a speed of 1 nautical
mile per hour.
9 The speed of a ship can be measured by
using a log.
10 At a speed of 14 knots we will cover 28
nautical miles in 2 hours.
Project Work
b. Now, let’s travel around the world and
find the coordinates of cities.
b1. Greenwich latitude is: Lat 52°N
b2. The geographical coordinates of Rome
are: Lat 41°N Long 12°E. Can you find the
coordinates of the following towns?
Latitude Longitude
Paris 48°N 2°E
Oslo 59°N 10°E
Tokyo 35°N 139°E
New York 40°N 73°W
Buenos Aires 34°S 58°W
Sydney 34°S 151°E
b3. Which of these six cities is nearest to
the Anti-meridian? It is: Sydney, of course.
Unit 8
Navigational aids and instruments
Ex 1 Match the two parts of each
definition.
1h, 2f, 3e, 4c, 5g, 6b, 7a, 8d
Ex 2 Now your teacher will give you a
photocopy; use it to dictate the deviations
in your table to your partner.
STUDENT A
Magnetic Compass Table
Ship: Caribbean – Bermuda
Compass – PLATH 3521 in Pilot House
Compass bearing Deviations
O° –1°1
30° + 0°.4
60° +1°.7
90° +2°.0
120° +1°.0
150° +0°.6
13
25-03-2013 14:49:17
 Teacher’s book
STUDENT B
Magnetic Compass Table
Ship: Caribbean – Bermuda
Compass – PLATH 3521 in Pilot House
Compass bearing Deviations
180° +0°.5
210° + 0°.9
240° +1°.0
270° +0°.2
300° –1°.0
330° –1°.7
Ex 3 Complete the text with the missing
words.
A gyroscopic compass has two main
advantages over a magnetic compass.
Firstly, the gyrocompass is not subject to
magnetic 1 variation like a magnetic
compass because it does not point to the
2 magnetic north, but to Earth’s 3 true
north. In fact, the gyrocompass’ spinning
axis is aligned with the Earth’s rotational
axis. Then, once the gyroscope is set
spinning, it continues to point in the same
direction – the true north – regardless of
the ship’s heaving motion or direction.
Secondly, the magnetic field of the 4 iron
body of the ship itself affects the reading
on the magnetic compass. This
phenomenon, called magnetic 5 deviation
(see paragraph 2), does not affect the
gyrocompass which always remains aligned
with the Earth’s 6 axis.
Ex 4 Match each term with its definition.
1d, 2c, 3f, 4h, 5b, 6g, 7a, 8e
Ex 5 Answer the questions.
1 Radar was first used by the allied troops
during the Second World War.
2 Radar stands for RAdio Detection And
Ranging.
3 The system emits radio microwaves.
4 Radio waves travel at the speed of light –
300,000 kilometres per second.
5 They are reflected by the solid surface;
they “bounce back”.
6 By calculating the time elapsed between
the emission and the return of the pulse
signal.
7 The operator sees the tracked objects on
the radar screen called a PPI.
8 COLREG requires that ships maintain a
constant radar watch on board to prevent
any danger of collision with other ships.
Ex 6 Mark the following statements as
True or False and correct the false ones.
14
02_KeysExercises.indd 14
1F–2F–3T–4T–5F–6T
1 They emit sound waves.
2 They travel in the water at a speed of
1,500 metres per second.
5 The echo sounder indicates the presence
of shoals of fish.
Ex 7 Insert the correct number for each
statement.
1 Satellites needed to fix your ship’s
position: 3
2 Time taken to orbit the Earth: 12 hours
3 Current number of satellites: 31
4 Speed of light: 300,000 km/sec
5 Orbiting height: about 20,000 kilometres
above the Earth
6 Position error margin: 20 metres
Ex 8 Find the best navigational aid for
each situation.
1 radar, 2 compass, 3 echo sounder, 4 log,
5 sextant, 6 sonar
Project Work
1. Today we are surfing the internet to
watch a video. Watch & listen, then fill in
the missing words.
We see everything because of reflected
light. 1 Radar is a beam not of visible light
but of a related form of energy:
2 microwave radiation. When an invisible
3 beam of microwaves is directed
outwards and if something crosses its path,
a little of the microwave energy is
4 bounced back to its source. The time it
takes a 5 pulse of microwave energy to
travel out and be reflected back gives a
6 distance away from the object being
tracked.
The 7 angle of the returning energy
coming back to the radar gives the
8 altitude of the object.
Watson Watt’s invention became the first
working radar system able to detect a
plane in flight.
A chain whole network could detect
approaching aircraft at a distance of up to
9 seventy miles and up to an altitude of
10 twenty thousand feet.
Was this enough warning to scramble
Britain’s fighters? This question would soon
be answered.
2. Do you know why the nautical speed
unit is called knot, or why we measure the
25-03-2013 14:49:17

ship’s speed with a log? Read and find out
the following information, then write a
short summary.
Dutch sailors probably invented the
“Chip Log” in 1500-1600s.
A half-minute sand glass was the device
used to measure time.
The nautical speed unit got its name by
the method of counting the number of
rope knots that went overboard in a given
time interval.
Sample summary
The “Chip Log” method to measure ship
speed was probably invented by Dutch
sailors in 1500-1600s. (Read: in fifteen or
sixteen hundred). The Chip Log consisted
of a small wood panel attached to a reel of
rope. To measure time they used a half-
minute sand glass. The rope had knots tied
at equal distances along the reel. Sailors
would throw the wood panel into the sea,
behind the ship, and the rope would start
unwinding from the reel. The faster the
ship was moving forward the faster the
rope would unwind. By counting the
number of knots that went overboard in a
given time interval, measured by the sand
glass, they could tell the ship’s speed. In
fact, that is the origin of the nautical speed
unit: the knot.
Unit 9
The Deck Department
Ex 1 Answer the questions.
1 The ship’s crew is organized in
departments.
2 The Deck and Engine Departments.
3 The Deck Department deals with
navigation, loading and unloading cargo
and communications.
4 The First Officer.
5 Able and Ordinary Seamen.
6 The Captain is responsible for the ship,
her cargo and crew.
Ex 2 Listen to paragraph 2 and fill in the
gaps with the missing words.
The Master is the person chosen by the
shipowner to 1 command the ship. He is
the maximum authority 2 on board, and
he represents the shipowner in all
circumstances. His job includes both
02_KeysExercises.indd 15
key to unit exercises
3 technical and administrative functions.
His technical functions concern the safe
navigation of the ship from 4 port to port,
and the safety of the ship’s 5 crew and
cargo.
Before leaving port, he must make sure
that the ship is seaworthy, that it is
properly 6 equipped and that the cargo is
7 stowed safely and securely. He is also
responsible for manoeuvring the ship in
and out of port.
As regards his administrative
responsibilities, he must make 8 sure that
the ship carries all the necessary
documentation before leaving port. A ship
must carry the following 9 papers:
the Certificate of Registry, which is the
ship’s 10 identity document and indicates
the ship’s name, call sign and flag state. It
also gives thorough information about the
ship, such as dimensions, tonnage and type
of service;
the Bill of Entry or the Bill of Export. The
former is a 11 list of the carried goods, the
latter lists the goods which are to be
12 loaded on board;
the International Tonnage Certificate,
which indicates the cargo-carrying
13 capacity of the ship, and which is used
to calculate port and canal dues;
the International Load Line Certificate,
which indicates the maximum draft to
which a ship can be loaded, to ensure that
she always has sufficient 14 freeboard to
stay afloat;
the Intact Stability Booklet, which gives
the Master accurate guidance in
maintaining the ship’s 15 stability under
varying conditions of loading;
the Crew List, which gives details on the
16 members of the crew, their
qualifications and their pay.
Ex 3 Match each term with its definition.
1f, 2e, 3d, 4a, 5b, 6c
Ex 4 Which Officer does this? Chose
between: Captain, First Mate, Second or
Third Mate.
1 The Captain
2 The Second Mate
3 The First Mate
4 First, Second and Third Mates
5 The Captain
6 The First Mate
15
25-03-2013 14:49:17
 Teacher’s book
7 The Second Mate
8 The Third Mate
9 The Captain
10 The First Mate
Ex 5 Complete the sentences and re-write
the Officers’ responsibilities taken from Ex.
4 by using the gerund.
1 Commanding the ship is the responsibility
of the Captain.
2 The Captain is responsible for
commanding the ship.
3 The First Mate is responsible for directing
the loading and unloading of cargo.
4 Maintaining the vessel’s navigational
instruments and equipment is the
responsibility of the Second Mate.
5 The Third Officer is responsible for
checking that lifeboats and life-saving
equipment are in good working order.
6 Planning a safe navigational passage is
the responsibility of the Captain.
7 The First Mate is responsible for
supervising/coordinating the activities of
deck crews.
8 Deck Officers are responsible for standing
watch on the bridge.
Ex 6 Match the two parts of the
definitions.
1d, 2e, 3g, 4f, 5a, 6b, 7c
Ex 7 Listen to the list of words, then insert
them in the correct place while listening to
the passage: anchor windlass – hawser –
quay – pier – winch – ropes – bollard –
cables – mooring lines – capstan
A 1 winch is a mechanical device that is
used to pull in (wind up) or let out (wind
out) a rope. Ships use either synthetic
ropes, which are strong, elastic and resistant
to the action of water, or wire 2 ropes
which are made of steel, which is usually
galvanized to stop it from rusting. Wire
ropes are also called 3 cables or wire cables.
A ship’s 4 capstan is a drum shaped device
used for winding the ship’s anchor cable. In
the days of wooden ships, capstans were
made of wood and were manually
operated by means of wooden bars.
Nowadays they are made of iron and steel
but are only used on pleasure crafts. On
large ships, capstans are replaced by the
hydraulically or pneumatically operated
windlass, which makes the anchorage
process smoother and easier.
16
02_KeysExercises.indd 16
The 5 anchor windlass winds the anchor
chain up and out, allowing the anchor to
be raised and lowered.
6 Hawser is a nautical term for a thick
cable or rope used in mooring a ship.
A vessel is said to be moored when it is
tied up to a quay. Mooring is accomplished
using thick ropes called 7 mooring lines or
hawsers. The lines are fixed to deck fittings
on the vessel at one end, and fittings on
the shore, such as bollards, at the other
end.
A 8 bollard is a short vertical post on a
quay, principally used for mooring. A
9 quay is a structure on the shore in a
harbour where ships can dock to load and
unload cargo or passengers. Such a
structure includes berths, which are
mooring locations. When this structure is
built out into the sea it can also be called
a 10 pier.
Ex 8 Match each English term with its
Italian equivalent.
1d, 2c, 3i, 4f, 5g, 6a, 7b, 8j, 9e, 10h
Ex 9 Mark the following statements
as True or False and correct the false
ones.
1F–2T–3F–4F–5T–6F
1 Cargo handling is carried out both by the
ship’s cargo gear and shore cranes.
3 A conveyor belt is used to transfer dry
goods.
4 Tankers usually have their own installed
pumps or cargo hose.
6 RO/RO ships load their cargo over ramps
in the port, stern or port bow.
Ex 10 Label the picture with the names of
mooring lines.
1 Head lines
2 Forward breast line
3 Forward spring
4 Aft spring
5 Aft breast line
6 Stern lines
Ex 11 Try to put the Captain’s orders and
the teams’ replies in a logical sequence.
1 Futura Forward Station, single up
forward to spring!
2 Futura Aft station, single up aft to breast
line.
3 Let go forward! Let go aft! Is the
propeller clear?
25-03-2013 14:49:18

4 Futura Bridge. Futura Aft Station. Yes,
propeller is clear. All clear aft!
5 Futura Bridge. Futura Forward Station.
All clear forward!
6 Futura. Finished with maneuvering
stations!
Ex 12 Match each order with its meaning.
1e, 2d, 3a, 4b, 5c
Project Work
Complete the missing information as you
watch.
A professional mooring operation is a kind
of 1 missing link in the overall nautical
chain.
The video has been produced because
there is little information on or
international regulations for:
2 mooring lines 3 winches 4 bollards.
This is strange because a lot of incidents
happen 5 mooring. Movements of a badly
moored ship can result in 6 expensive
damage to cranes, manifolds or other
7 vessels. A ship breaking loose of its
moorings is a nightmare to all 8 ports.
A professional mooring process cannot
only reduce 9 incidents; it can also save
10 time, 11 money and cut down on
12 emissions. This video focuses on the
main cause of mooring accidents.
95% of the incidents with personal injury is
caused by 13 ropes and 14 wires, being hit
by a rope. Just 5% is due to 15 equipment
failure. 60% of all those rope incidents
happen during 16 mooring operations. So
improving mooring operations reduces
accidents and personal injuries.
Now complete the information about the
MOORING PLAN.
Safe mooring starts at 17 sea with a good
preparation and precise calculation of the
forces on winches, bollards and lines.
All components come together in the
18 mooring plan sometimes made up by the
Terminal, but in all cases the 19 Captain is
responsible for safe mooring. A
professional plan is based on 20 four rules.
First, all the lines should not exceed a
21 vertical angle of 30°. [therefore…]
Second, the 22 spring lines should be
placed as parallel to the vessel as possible.
Third, 23 breast lines are most effective
when connected square to the vessel. [if…]
02_KeysExercises.indd 17
key to unit exercises
The last rule, lines should work 24 together;
to ensure that the forces are spread over
the lines, they should have the same
25 characteristics; so 1 and 2 and 3 and 4 –
same functions, same specs.
The 26 Terminal Operator can file such a
mooring plan as per 27 IMO number for
the next visit of the ship or a sister ship.
In all mooring operations it is very
important that the hook or 28 bollard
ashore isn’t the weakest link, like probably
in this situation.
Unit 10
The Engine Department
Ex 1 Here is the Italian meaning of some
difficult terms from paragraph 1. Try to
match each English term with its Italian
equivalent.
1f, 2g, 3h, 4d, 5c, 6a, 7b, 8e, 9i, 10j
Ex 2 Who is responsible for...? Indicate
which person(s) is/are responsible for the
following duties.
1 The Chief Engineer
2 The Second Engineer
3 Greasers
4 The Third Engineer
5 The Engineer Officers
6 The Chief Engineer
7 Firemen
8 The Chief Engineer
Ex 3 Which is the correct definition of
“auxiliary machinery”?
b Auxiliary machinery includes all
machinery on board except for the main
engines and boilers.
Ex 4 Listen to paragraph 3 and fill in the
gaps with the missing words.
Functions of auxiliary machinery
Every 1 service on board ship has to come
from the Engine Room: electric light, heat,
running 2 water and refrigeration. All
these services are provided by auxiliary
3 machinery.
The 4 functions carried out by auxiliary
machinery on board can be summarised as
follows:
1 Supply the needs of the main 5 engines
and boilers. Air compressors supply
compressed air for starting
6 diesel engines; coolers are used to cool
17
25-03-2013 14:49:18
 Teacher’s book
either oil or water; feed-water heaters,
also called economisers, supply pre-heated
water that 7 goes into the boilers to
increase the boilers’ efficiency.
2 Keep the ship 8 dry. This is done
through the bilge and ballast pumping
systems. The former 9 removes water
which has collected in machinery and
10 cargo spaces; the latter pumps water
in and out of ballast 11 tanks.
3 Supply domestic needs. 12 Fresh water
is supplied by evaporators through
distillation of seawater; sewage plants
provide for sanitation; 13 heating and
ventilation are provided by heaters and air
conditioners.
4 Supply the ship with electrical 14 power
and lighting. These are provided by
electricity generators.
5 Apply the main power of the engines for
15 propulsion and manoeuvring. A line of
engine shafts transmits the engine power
to the 16 propeller; steering gear operates
the rudder for manoeuvring; anti-rolling
tanks and fin stabilisers reduce the ship’s
17 rolling.
6 Provide remote control and automatic
action. Self-regulating apparatus like the
18 automatic pilot, which automatically
control the rudder, and steering
mechanisms supply these functions.
7 Provide safety. Fire detection, fire
19 fighting equipment, lifeboats and their
engines are parts of the auxiliary
machinery which 20 provide safety.
Ex 5 Write the names of the different
equipment under their function.
a They supply the needs of main engines
and boilers.
air-compressors
coolers
economisers
b They provide safety.
life-boats and their engines
fire-detection and fire-fighting
equipment
c They supply the ship with electrical
power and lighting.
electricity generators
d They keep the ship dry.
bilge and ballast pumping systems
e It provides remote control of the
rudder.
automatic pilot
18
02_KeysExercises.indd 18
Ex 6 What items of machinery are these?
a The ballast pumping system.
b A cooler.
c A feed-water heater.
d The bilge pumping system.
e The air-compressor.
f The electricity generator.
g The/An evaporator.
h Steel shafts.
Ex 7 In dictionaries you find the
abbreviations sb/s.o. and sth. What do
they mean?
Sb and s.o. mean someboby and someone.
Sth means something.
Ex 8 Match each verb with its meaning
and check your choice in a monolingual
dictionary.
1c, 2d, 3b, 4a
Ex 9 Use the information in Ex. 6 to ask
questions and answer about the function
of the different equipment.
What is the function of air-compressors?/
What are air-compressors used for?
Air compressors are used to supply
compressed air for starting the engines.
What is the function of feed-water heaters?/
What are feed-water heaters used for?
Feed-water heaters are used to heat the boiler
feed water.
What is the function of coolers?/What are
coolers used for?
Coolers are used to cool either oil or water.
What is the function of electrical
generators?/What are electrical generators
used for?
Electricity generators are used to supply the
ship with electrical power and lighting.
What is the function of an evaporator?/
What is an evaporator used for?
An evaporator supplies fresh water by
distillation of seawater.
What is the function of steel shafts?/What
are steel shafts used for?
Steel shafts transmit engine power to the
propeller.
Ex 10 Answer the questions and see what
you remember.
1 Auxiliary machinery is all machinery on
board apart from the main engines and
boilers.
25-03-2013 14:49:18

2 The Engineer Officers.
3 The main functions are to supply the
needs of the main engines and boilers, to
keep the ship dry, to supply domestic
needs, to apply the main power of the ship
for propulsion and manoeuvring, to
provide remote control and automatic
action and to provide safety.
4 & 5 EXAMPLES: The ballast pumping
system pumps water in and out of the
ballast tanks. Coolers are used to cool
either oil or water. Feed-water heaters are
used to heat the boiler feed-water. The
bilge pumping system removes water
which has gathered in machinery, cargo
rooms and other spaces. The air
compressor supplies compressed air for
starting the engines. Etc.
Ex 11 Mark the following statements as
True or False and correct the false ones.
1F–2T–3F–4T–5F–6F
1 Engineer Officers regularly update the
Engine Room Logbook.
3 The Chief Officer compiles the Engine
Room Logbook.
5 In case of a performance failure, the
engineers note down any corrective
measures taken and their results.
6 The Chief Engineer is responsible for
checking that the logbook is compiled and
he always consults the Captain.
Ex 12 Use the above information to
complete the table about the ECR
equipment.
Generator panel
It shows 1 electrical parameters such as
voltage and 2 load.
Engineers can decide on number of
3 generators to keep in operation.
Electrical switchboard
It controls 4 power supply to machinery.
Engineers can stop machinery in an
5 emergency.
Voltmeter/ammeter
They show 6 voltage and current 7 flow
for major equipment.
They allow engineers to detect any 8 faults.
Alarm panel
It monitors tank levels, 9 temperature and
pressure of machinery.
02_KeysExercises.indd 19
key to unit exercises
It allows Engineers to take action when an
10 alarm sounds.
Main engine controls
They indicate fuel control, 11 speed,
emergency 12 stops, direction, etc.
They are only operated by 13 Senior
Engineers.
Project Work
Use this link to take a look at the Engine
Control Room on the M/S “Emma Jensen”
and use your powers of observation to
answer the following questions about the
photos! http://global-mariner.com/
index111EmmaJebsenEngineRoom.html
1 3 switchboards and 3 generator panels
27
3 Li Chau / Chinese
4 A pair of shoes
5 November 16th / The Engine Room Log
63
7 The auxiliary machinery room
8 To the main Engine Room
9 To the workshop
10 Lubricating oil / A lamp
11 Water / A lathe
12 A red star / 2
13 2 / 2
14 In the back, to the right
15 The air condition compressor / The fresh
water generator
16 Yellow and red / Fire extinguisher
17 6
18 3
19 Working on the cylinder head
Last photo: Starting air bottles
Unit 11
Describing technical diagrams
Ex 1 Study the examples and complete the
texts with words from the diagrams. Then
listen to the recording and check.
1 The diagram shows a lubricating oil pump.
It is a type of gear-wheel pump and
consists of interlocking gear-wheels that
rotate inside a casing. The two gears are
fitted closely inside the casing.
2 The diagram represents a fuel induction
system. This system includes/comprises the
fuel tank and pipe-line, the fuel pump and
19
25-03-2013 14:49:18
 Teacher’s book
the fuel filter. As fuel is explosive, the fuel
tank is placed away from the engine.
3 The hull is divided into a number of
watertight compartments by decks and
bulkheads. The hull contains the Engine
Room, cargo space and a number of tanks.
4 The double-acting piston pump consists
of a piston moving up and down inside a
cylinder casing. The pump is fitted with
non-return suction and discharge valves at
the top.
5 There are three basic parts to an electric
circuit: a source of electricity, an output
device, and a connection between the two.
A torch is an example of a simple electrical
circuit and is illustrated in the picture. A
battery provides the electricity, while a lamp
is the output device.
They are connected by two lengths of
copper wire and a switch is also included to
the circuit.
6 The main part of a turbine engine is the
rotor. It is made up of several rows of
blades mounted on a shaft.
Ex 3 Study the two following diagrams.
They represent the auxiliary services of a
marine diesel engine: a fuel oil system and
a lubricating oil system. What elements do
they have in common?
a Tanks
b Pumps
c Centrifuge
d Heater
e Cooler
f Filters
g Pressure control valve/alarm
Ex 4 Now label the diagrams.
Diagram 1: This is a lubricating oil system.
Diagram 2: This is a fuel oil system.
Ex 5 The passage describes the working
cycle in a lubricating oil system. Look at
diagram 2 and decide what is the correct
sequence of paragraphs.
1b – 2a – 3c
Ex 6 Answer the questions with the verbs
given below in scrambled order.
1 It drains/filters the oil.
2 a) The purifier suction pump draws the
oil from the drain tank.
b) Pumps discharge the oil under pressure
into the cooler.
20
02_KeysExercises.indd 20
3 a) Used oil drains to the crankcase.
b) It passes through the centrifuge to be
purified.
c) It is returned to the drain tank at a
point next to the suction strainer.
Ex 7 Translate these sentences about the
lubricating oil system into English.
1 Lubricating oil drains into the crankcase
and then into the drain tank.
2 A pump draws the oil from the drain
tank and sends it into a heater.
3 The oil then passes through a centrifuge
for purification.
4 After purification, the oil is returned to
the drain tank at a point next to the
suction strainer.
Ex 8 What difference is there between the
past participle of regular and irregular
verbs? Complete the table and find out.
Simple past Past participle Italian meaning
drained drained colare, drenare
returned returned rimandare
drew drawn prelevare
discharged discharged scaricare
sent sent inviare
operated operated azionare
pumped pumped pompare
passed passed passare (attraverso)
stored stored immagazzinare
fitted fitted munire di, collocare
purified purified purificare
cooled cooled raffreddare
heated heated riscaldare
included included includere
Ex 9 Go back to the diagram of the fuel oil
system and try to answer the questions.
1 There are three tanks: one contains
diesel oil and two contain heavy oil.
2 Because the engine may be operated
either by diesel oil or by heavy oil, by
operating the change-over valve.
3 A viscosity regulator controls the oil
temperature to maintain the oil viscosity
within close limits.
Ex 10 Insert the missing participles and
complete the description of the fuel oil
system of a marine diesel engine.
The oil is drawn from the service HO tank
in use by pumps and is 1 discharged at low
pressure to the fuel oil heater, where the
heavy oil is 2 heated. A viscosity regulator
is 3 fitted at the heater discharge, which
25-03-2013 14:49:18

controls the temperature of the fuel oil to
maintain its viscosity within close limits.
Then the oil is 4 sent to the engine fuel
pump suctions through a fine strainer. A
pressure control valve, fitted on the fuel
pump suctions, returns any excess oil either
to the heavy oil service tanks or to a
balancing tank.
A diesel fuel tank is 5 included in the
system with its discharge to the primary
pump suctions through a change-over
valve. By operating this valve the engine
may be 6 operated on diesel oil. The diesel
oil is 7 pumped from the DO storage tanks,
where it is 8 stored, and is sent to a
centrifuge for purification. Then it enters
the diesel oil service tank.
Ex 11 Complete the summary about the fuel
oil system. Insert one word in each gap.
The oil is 1 drawn 2 from the service tanks
by 3 pumps and is discharged into the oil
4 heater. At the heater discharge a
5 viscosity regulator is fitted. This
automatically controls the oil 6 temperature
to maintain its viscosity within close limits.
The oil finally passes through a fine
7 strainer before entering the engine.
A 8 pressure 9 control valve is fitted at the
engine fuel pump suctions and it returns
10 excess oil to the service oil tanks.
Ex 12 Match each valve with its function.
a viscosity regulator
b pressure control valve
c change - over valve
Ex 13 Complete the sentences with the
missing past participle.
1 The oil is stored in the DO tanks.
2 The oil is heated in the heater.
3 The oil is purified in the centrifuge.
4 The oil is cooled in the cooler.
5 The oil is discharged to the engine fuel
pump suctions through a fine strainer.
6 Diesel oil is drawn by pumps from the
storage tanks into the diesel oil service tank.
Ex 14 Four different operations are
described in the last few lines. Can you
put them in order? Use the sequence
words at first, then, finally.
At first, the oil is stored in the DO tanks. Then
it is pumped from the DO tanks and it is sent
into a centrifuge for purification. Finally, the
oil enters the diesel oil service tank.
02_KeysExercises.indd 21
key to unit exercises
Project Work
First of all, complete the table with the
missing information.
Order date April 30th, 1907
Hull laid Spring 1909
Maiden voyage April 10th, 1912
Vessel type Schooner rigged vessel
66,000 tonnes
Weight
Cost $7.5 million
Length 882’ 8”
Breadth 92’ 0”
Draft 59.5 feet
Main engine Parson’s Turbine driving central propeller running
at 165 rpm generating 16,000 horse power
Reciprocating engines 2 triple* expansion reciprocating engines driving
port and starboard propellers running at 75 rpm
generating 30,000 horse power
Boiler 29
Furnaces 159
* Note there is a spelling mistake in the text.
Now use this information to complete the
technical description of Titanic’s Engine
Room. You can also take a look at the
technical diagram.
Titanic’s Engine Room
The diagram shows Titanic’s 1 Engine
Room. The ship was fitted with a 2 Parson’s
LP Turbine engine to drive the 3 central
propeller and 2 triple expansion 4
reciprocating engines. 159 coal 5 furnaces
heated water to generate steam in the 29
6 boilers. The 7 steam was then funneled
to the expansion engines creating the
power to turn the two 8 port and starboard
wing propellers. If the 9 turbine engine was
not being used, for example, when the ship
was entering or leaving 10 port, steam was
condensed in the two main 11 condensers
and then returned to the 12 boilers.
Unit 12
Pumps
Ex 1 Read through paragraph 1 and
answer the questions.
1 Pumps are hydraulic machines, used to
move a liquid or to give it pressure and
kinetic energy.
2 Pumps are driven/powered by an engine.
3 We measure the operation of a pump by
using two hydraulic measures. One is the
pressure head, which indicates the
differential pressure or height that the
21
25-03-2013 14:49:19
 Teacher’s book

pump can give to the liquid. The other is Centrifugal pump

quantity of liquid by litres per second (l/s) Delivery pipe
Impeller
that the pump can move.
4 We consider a number of factors (listed Vanes
below) which concern the type of liquid and
the pressure we want to give to the liquid.
Ex 2 Take notes while reading the texts in
paragraph 2.
We shall consider four factors:
1 the liquid’s quantity and pressure;
2 the liquid’s viscosity;
3 if the liquid is corrosive; Casing
4 if it contains solid particles in suspension. Suction pipe
Reciprocating pumps: Reciprocating pump
small quantity of liquid
high differential pressure
low flow rate Piston
slow speed
high heads
uneven delivery
Gear-wheel pumps: Delivery
viscous liquids tube
low flow of liquid
even delivery Delivery valve
low differential pressures
unsuitable for liquids with solid particles in Cylinder
suspension casing Suction valve
Centrifugal pumps:
large volumes of water
high flow rate
Suction tube
high speed
low and medium heads Ex 4 Read while you listen to the recording
even delivery and complete the texts with items taken
quiet in operation from the diagrams above.
Ex 3 Label the pictures with the main parts Working process of the three types of pump
for each type. There are three main types of pump
currently in use, namely the gear-wheel
Gear-wheel pump
pump, the centrifugal pump and the
Gear-tooth
reciprocating pump.
Gear-wheel pumps consist of interlocking
1 gear-wheels that rotate inside a 2 casing.
The liquid enters the 3 suction tube, it
becomes entrapped between the gear-teeth
Suction Delivery and is made to circulate, before being
discharged through the delivery outlet.
tube outlet
Centrifugal pumps consist of an 4 impeller
which rotates at high speed inside a casing.
The liquid enters the pump through the
central suction pipe and is forced to
Casing circulate by the 5 vanes of the impeller.
Interlocking The centrifugal force of the impeller gives
gear-wheels the liquid a high velocity. Finally, the liquid

22

02_KeysExercises.indd 22 25-03-2013 14:49:20


is expelled through the 6 delivery pipe.
Reciprocating pumps consist of a 7 piston
moving up and down inside a chamber.
When the piston is up, the volume of the
pump chamber is increased and a vacuum is
formed. The liquid is drawn into this vacuum
from the suction tube. Then the piston
moves down and the volume of the pump
chamber decreases. As the piston moves
down, it creates a pressure on the liquid that
is forced out through the 8 delivery tube.
Reciprocating pumps have non-return 9
suction and delivery valves, and they can be
either single-acting or double-acting. The
former are fitted with a single pair of valves
and the liquid is drawn and discharged by
two piston strokes. Double-acting pumps
have a double set of valves, and every piston
stroke causes the liquid to be moved.
Ex 5 Guess! Look at the pictures below.
Which of them shows the double acting
piston pump?
The left one.
Ex 6 Find the English synonym for the
following expressions in paragraph 4, then
note down their Italian meaning.
The up or down movement of the piston: a
piston stroke (corsa del pistone).
To become larger/smaller: to increase/
decrease (aumentare/diminuire).
To move up and down in a straight line: to
reciprocate (muoversi con moto alternativo).
Ex 7 Study the opposites.
suitable for unsuitable for
high speed slow speed
non-return valves return valves
even delivery uneven delivery
high rates of flow low rates of flow
viscous liquid non-viscous liquid
to increase to decrease
quiet noisy
Ex 8 Find the English for the following
verbs and expressions. They have all been
used in the texts of this unit.
Pompare, spostare to pump,
to move
Azionare to drive
Aspirare to draw
Trasportare in circolo to carry round,
force to circulate
è intrappolato it is entrapped
Adatto, indicato per suitable for
Alte/basse prevalenze high/low heads
02_KeysExercises.indd 23
key to unit exercises
Flusso costante/continuo even flow
Mandata costante a steady delivery
Operazioni silenziose quiet operations
Abbastanza, piuttosto rather, quite
Applicazioni applications
Ex 9 The above passage describe four
types of pump, because the screw pump
has been added to the list. Write the
names of each pump.
1 Centrifugal pump
2 Screw pump
3 Reciprocating/piston pump
4 Gear-wheel pump
Ex 10 Now cover the texts and try to
answer the following questions.
1 A centrifugal pump
2 A gear-wheel pump
3 A reciprocating pump
4 A screw pump
Ex 11 Go back to the texts and use all the
information about the different pumps to
complete the table.
Centrifugal pumps
Type of liquid They are suitable for water or low viscous
liquids and for liquids with solid particles
in suspension.
Quantity and pressure High rates of flow; high speeds; low
of liquid or medium heads.
Description They consist of an impeller which rotates
at high speed inside a casing.
Working process The liquid enters through the suction pipes,
it is carried round by the vanes of the impeller,
which give the liquid kinetic energy, then it is
discharged through the delivery outlet.
Advantages/ Small and easy to maintain; quiet in
disadvantages operation; even and fast delivery.
Rotary pumps Piston pumps
They are suitable for viscous They are suitable for water
liquids, such as lubricating and low viscous liquids.
and fuel oils.
Low flow rates; constant delivery; Medium flow rates but high
low heads. heads.
They consist of interlocking gear They consist of a piston moving up
wheels that rotate inside a casing. and down inside a cylinder casing.
The liquid enters the suction tube When the piston goes up,
and it is made to circulate by the a vacuum is formed and the liquid
gear wheels. Then it is discharged is drawn into the pump chamber
through the delivery outlet. from the suction tube. As the
piston moves down, it creates
a pressure on the liquid that
is forced out through the delivery
tube.
Even and constant delivery; not They provide an uneven delivery
suitable for liquids with solid and they can be rather noisy, but
particles in suspension. they also provide high pressures
and high heads.
23
25-03-2013 14:49:20
 Teacher’s book
Project Work
1. On the following web page
http://www.marineinsight.com/tech/
auxiliary-machinery/general-overview-of-
types-of-pumps-on-ship/
the writer has classified pumps using a
different method from the one indicated
in the first paragraph of this unit. Take
notes to complete the table and see
whether using a different classification
method means that the operational
characteristics of the various pump types
are classified differently.
1 Fluids circulate in ship’s machinery for
these purposes: cooling, heating, lubrication,
and as fuels.
2 These liquids are circulated by different
types of pumps.
3 There are two types of pump used on
board: positive displacement pumps and
dynamic pressure pumps.
4 Reciprocating, screw and gear pumps are
positive displacement pumps.
5 Centrifugal pumps are dynamic pressure
pumps.
6 The selection of a type of pump depends
on the characteristics of the fluid to be
pumped and the characteristics of the system
in which this liquid circulates.
7 These (3) characteristics of the fluid are
viscosity, density, compressibility.
8 The (4) characteristics of the system are
required rate of fluid, head to which the fluid
is to be pumped, temperature and pressure of
the fluid in the system.
9 Positive displacement pumps are used
where the discharge rate is small to medium,
and the viscosity of the fluid is high.
10 Positive displacement pumps are used
to produce high pressure in the pumping
system.
11 Dynamic pressure pumps are used for
moderate to high discharge rate.
12 Dynamic pumps are used in a system
where low viscosity fluids are used.
Unit 13
Boilers
Ex 1 Find the four wrong words in
paragraph one; then rewrite the text using
the correct words which are in scrambled
24
02_KeysExercises.indd 24
order. (Here below are the wrong words in
the text and the correct ones)
1 secondary auxiliary
2 growing distilling
3 gallery galley
4 cars machinery
Ex 2 Answer the questions by reading
the text and observing the picture
above.
1 Steam is contained in the steam drum.
2 The steam drum is located at the top of
the boiler.
3 Water is contained in the water drums.
4 The water drums are located lower down
in the boiler.
5 The furnace is placed at the bottom. This
allows hot gases to rise.
6 Downcomer tubes are external to the
boiler.
7 They provide a supply of relatively cool
water.
Ex 3 Complete the sentences to describe a
boiler and its main parts.
a A boiler consists of a fireproof casing
which contains a furnace at the bottom, a
steam drum at the top, and water drums in
the middle part.
b The water drums and the steam drum
are connected by banks of tubes.
c Downcomer tubes are placed outside the
gas system.
d For this reason they feed the water drums
with cool water.
Ex 4 Here is another picture
and text about boilers. Listen and fill
in the gaps.
The picture 1 shows a water tube boiler.
It has a steam-drum at 2 the top and a
water drum below, 3 connected by banks
of generating tubes. Other banks of tubes
welded together form the 4 waterwalls.
The tubes are 5 placed in the main flow
of hot gases from the 6 furnace, so their
heat is transferred to the water in the
tubes.
The steam drum provides the space for
the separation of steam from the water
mixture. The difference in density allows
the dry steam to 7 rise and leave from
the top of the drum. Returning water
enters the water drums through 8
downcomer tubes which are unheated and
placed 9 outside the gas stream. They
25-03-2013 14:49:20

provide a reservoir of relatively 10 cool
water, so that 11 convection currents are
set up which cause the water to 12
circulate round the system. The
economisers heat the feed-water 13 before
it enters the boiler. Superheaters, located
14 between the banks of tubes, reheat the
saturated steam to make it 15 drier and
more efficient.
Ex 5 There is a “logical” mistake
in each of the following sentences.
Find the mistakes and correct them.
(Here below are the wrong words
in the text and the correct ones)
1 The cool hot gases generated in the
furnace tend to rise.
2 The gases from the furnace flow around
the water drums and tubes so that the
water they contain becomes very cold hot.
3 Steam rises along the tubes and to the
top of the steam drum because it is heavier
lighter than water.
4 Downcomer tubes are placed in the
middle of outside the stream of hot gases
so that the water they contain keeps cool.
5 Convection currents are caused by cool
water which moves up goes down and hot
water which goes down moves up.
6 The water is made to circulate round the
system by a constant supply of hot cool/
cold returning water which enters the
system through the downcomer tubes.
7 Economisers heat the feed-water after
before it enters the boiler.
8 Superheaters are used to make steam
cooler drier.
Ex 6 Describe the working process
in a water tube boiler. Follow
the sentences below.
1 When a fuel is burned in the furnace, hot
gases are produced.
2 The hot gases rise from the bottom of
the boiler and transfer their heat to the
water in the drums and tubes.
3 As the water gets very hot, it produces
steam.
4 The steam generated collects at the top
of the boiler in the steam drum.
5 Convection currents make the water
move around the system.
6 These are caused by a constant supply of
cool water which enters the drums through
the downcomer tubes.
02_KeysExercises.indd 25
key to unit exercises
7 Steam finally leaves the boiler through
the steam outlet.
Ex 7 Now cover the texts and check what
you remember by answering the following
questions.
1 Boilers are used for producing steam, either
for driving steam turbines or for driving
auxiliary machinery. Steam is also used for
auxiliary services like the galley and laundry.
2 The furnace is located at the bottom
since the hot gases tend to rise.
3 In a water-tube boiler, water is contained in
the water drums and in the banks of tubes.
4 The hot gases flow around the water
drums and the water-filled tubes.
5 Downcomer tubes are located outside the
main stream of hot gases from the furnace.
6 They supply the system with a constant
flow of cooler water. As this cooler water
continuously enters the drums, it makes
the hot water in the tubes rise. In this way,
convection currents are generated making
the water move around the system.
7 The economiser pre-heats the feed-water
before it enters the boiler.
8 Superheaters are used for making the
steam drier and more efficient.
Ex 8 Match each valve with its function.
1e, 2c, 3f, 4g, 5b, 6h, 7a, 8d
Ex 9 Identify the valves and gauges in the
diagram.
A Safety valves
B Main stop valve
C Auxiliary stop valve
D Donkey feed check valve
E Main feed check valve
F Pressure gauge
G Water-level indicator
H Surface blow-off
I Bottom blow-off
L Salinometer
Ex 11 Which is correct, a or b? Choose the
correct option.
1a, 2b, 3a, 4a, 5b, 6b, 7a, 8b
Ex 12 The table indicates the main working
characteristics of a water tube boiler with a
steam-superheater and pre-heated air. If you
want to dictate the table data yourself, tell
the Ss to use the blank table in each student’s
book. If you want your students to ask each
other questions to complete their tables,
photocopy the tables for Student A & B.
25
25-03-2013 14:49:20
 Teacher’s book
1 Steam generated (kg/h) 34,000
2 Steam temperature 450°C
3 Steam pressure 41 bar
4 Feed-water temperature 115°C
5 Exhaust gas temperature 154°C
Heating surface
6 Waterwalls 3.2%
7 Generating tubes 27%
8 Economiser 38%
9 Superheater 7%
10 Air pre-heater 24.8%
11 Furnace volume 40 m3
12 Radiant surface 46.5 m2
Questions:
Project Work
a How much steam is generated?
b What is the steam temperature?
c What is the steam pressure?
d What is the feed-water temperature?
e What is the exhaust gas temperature?
f What is the percentage of heat provided
by the waterwalls?
g What is the percentage of heat provided
by the generating tubes?
h What percentage of heat is provided by
the economiser?
i What percentage of heat is provided by
the superheater?
j What percentage of heat is provided by
the air pre-heater?
Tables for Ss working in pairs.
STUDENT A
1 Steam generated (kg/h) ...................
2 Steam temperature ...................
3 Steam pressure ...................
4 Feed-water temperature ...................
5 Exhaust gas temperature ...................
Heating surface
6 Waterwalls 3.2%
7 Generating tubes 27%
8 Economiser 38%
9 Superheater 7%
10 Air pre-heater 24.8%
11 Furnace volume 40 m3
12 Radiant surface 46.5 m2
26
02_KeysExercises.indd 26
STUDENT B
1 Steam generated (kg/h) 34,000
2 Steam temperature 450°C
3 Steam pressure 41 bar
4 Feed-water temperature 115°C
5 Exhaust gas temperature 154°C
Heating surface
6 Waterwalls ...................
7 Generating tubes ...................
8 Economiser ...................
9 Superheater ...................
10 Air pre-heater ...................
11 Furnace volume 40 m3
12 Radiant surface 46.5 m2
a. Answer the questions.
1 Audible and visual alarms indicate that
there is a problem.
2 The boiler is in the low water level
condition.
b. See what you should do in case the
boiler blows steam, but no water is shown
in the water gauges.
1 First, you should immediately stop the
burners and isolate the boiler from the steam
supply system.
2 Next, you should switch off the feed pumps.
3 Then, you should turn off the feed water
valve.
4 Next, you should turn off the fuel supply
valve.
5 Then/Now, you should wait for the slow
cool down.
6 When the boiler has cooled down, you
should check if there is any damage to furnace,
internal structure and other parts of the boiler.
7 Check for any eventual malfunctioning
(tripping) of fuel supply valve as it should cut
the supply of fuel oil when water level reaches
low level.
8 After the problem is fixed, boiler could be
put back to service.
c. Translate the passage “How to start up
the boiler?”.
Come avviare la caldaia?
Prima controllare che le valvole di sicurezza,
sfiato aria, tombino, valvola di vapore, pompa
dell’acqua di alimentazione, termometro e
25-03-2013 14:49:21

manometro, indicatore di livello dell’acqua
siano in buone condizioni. Se sono tutti in
ordine, aprire la valvola di sfiato. Poi
controllare il sistema di olio combustibile e far
circolare l’olio combustibile con il riscaldatore
per riscaldarlo alla temperatura e viscosità
richieste. Quindi azionare il soffiatore per
eliminare dall’area di combustione qualsiasi
accumulo di gas esplosivo. Mettere l’uscita di
fiamma in posizione bassa e aprire la valvola
del carburante all’ugello dello spruzzatore.
Quindi premere gli interruttori di accensione.
Se il combustibile non si accende, chiudere la
valvola del carburante e ripetere la procedura.
Per evitare lo stress termico, la temperatura
deve essere sollevata lentamente. Inoltre, in
modo da consentire la fuoriuscita dell’aria dal
sistema, la presa d’aria deve essere tenuta
aperta. Quando la pressione cresce, si
dovrebbe chiudere la presa d’aria e girare
l’uscita di fiamma in posizione alta. Una volta
che la pressione di servizio è raggiunta, la
valvola del vapore deve essere aperta
lentamente. Se necessario, aprire con
attenzione la valvola del vapore al serbatoio
dell’olio, per evitare colpi d’ariete.
Unit 14
Condensers & evaporators
Ex 1 Read the paragraph and label the
condensers parts.
1 Bank of tubes
2 Front tube sheet
3 Rear tube sheet
4 Front water end
5 Rear water end
6 Steam inlet
7 Hot well
8 Air ejector
9 Condensate pump
10 Circulating water inlet
11 Circulating pump
12 Circulating water outlet
Ex 2 Answer the questions.
1 It is made up of closely spaced thin tubes.
2 A tube sheet.
3 The front water end and the rear water end.
4 The steam inlet is located at the top of
the condenser.
5 The hot well is at the bottom of the
condenser.
6 The air ejector removes any air from the
condenser.
02_KeysExercises.indd 27
key to unit exercises
7 The condensate pump removes the
condensate from the hot well and sends it
into the boiler.
8 It is fitted at the water inlet. It draws
water from the sea.
Ex 3 What happens in a condenser?
Complete the description with words
taken from the labelled diagram.
Seawater is drawn into the condenser by a
1 circulating pump and is sent into the front
water end through the 2 circulating water
inlet. The cooling seawater passes through
the 3 bank of tubes and reaches the rear
water end. From the rear water end, the
seawater is directed to the top half of the
front water end. Here the cooling water is
discharged overboard through the 4
circulating water outlet.
Exhaust steam enters the condenser
through the 5 steam inlet and comes into
contact with the surface of the 6 bank of
tubes, where the cooling water is flowing.
Steam condenses and drops down into the
7 hot well. A 8 condensate pump removes
the condensate and sends it into the boiler
as feed-water.
Ex 4 Listen to the recording and complete
the passage.
How condensers operate
Condensers contain thousands of thin
copper-nickel alloy 1 tubes, usually of a
diameter of 3.5 mm. The tubes expand at
both ends into tube 2 sheets, which
guarantee a separation between the two
3 circuits involved in the condensation of
steam, namely the cooling water circuit
and the condensate circuit. Since there is
no 4 contact between the condensate and
the coolant during the 5 condensation
process, the condenser produces pure
6 distilled water, which is perfect for use
as boiler feed-water.
This is how the two circuits operate. In the
cooling water circuit, a circulating pump
sends a steady 7 flow of seawater into the
banks of tubes. Before entering the tubes,
the seawater is 8 filtered by a series of
strainers. The circulating pump is fed by a
sea-chest valve, and a standby pump is
9 fitted in case the main pump breaks
down. A cross-connection valve between
the 10 two pumps allows them to be
operated at the same time.
27
25-03-2013 14:49:21
 Teacher’s book
In the condensate circuit, as the steady
flow of seawater passes through the
11 bank of tubes, the exhaust steam
entering from the steam inlet 12 condenses
on contact with the cool surface of the
tubes. Condensed steam – called “the
13 condensate” – then falls into the hot
well. A condensate pump removes the
condensate from the hot 14 well and sends
it into the boiler as feed-water.
The condenser is constantly kept under
vacuum, since any 15 air entering the
system with the exhaust steam is drawn off
by an air 16 ejector, which is fitted above
the hot well.
Condensers must be regularly inspected for
leakage and are fitted with protective
anodes against corrosion.
Ex 5 Answer the questions.
1 The condenser tubes are made of a
copper-nickel alloy.
2 The cooling water circuit and the
condensate circuit.
3 The two circuits are kept separate.
4 A condenser produces pure distilled water.
5 The seawater flows through the bank of
tubes.
6 Seawater is sent into the condenser by a
circulating pump.
7 Seawater is filtered by strainers before
entering the condenser tubes.
8 There are a main circulating pump and a
stand-by pump, in case the main pump
breaks down.
9 By opening a cross-connection valve.
10 The exhaust steam condenses on
contact with the cool surface of the tubes.
11 The condensate collects in the hot well.
12 The condensate is finally sent into a
boiler as boiler feed-water.
13 Condensers are constantly inspected for
leakage.
14 Protective anodes are used to protect
condensers against corrosion.
Ex 6 How are the components of a
condenser arranged in the two circuits?
Complete the sequence in the table.
Cooling water circuit Condensate circuit
Sea-chest valve Steam inlet
Strainers Tubes surface
Circulating pump Air ejector
Seawater inlet Hot well
Bank of tubes Condensate pump
Seawater outlet
28
02_KeysExercises.indd 28
Ex 7 Looking at the table in Ex. 6, talk
about the condenser components with
your partner and say what they do, or
what happens there. Follow the example:
Ex: What’s the function of a sea-chest
valve?
It controls the entry of seawater into the
condenser.
1 What’s the function of strainers?
Strainers filter the seawater before it
enters the condenser tubes.
2 What’s the function of the circulating
pump? The circulating pump sends a
steady flow of seawater into the tubes.
3 What’s the function of the seawater
inlet? The seawater enters the condenser
through the seawater inlet.
4 What’s the function of the bank of
tubes? The bank of tubes is the cooling
surface of a condenser. The cooling water
flows in the bank of tubes.
5 What’s the function of the seawater
outlet? Seawater is discharged overboard
through the seawater outlet.
6 What’s the function of the steam inlet?
Exhaust steam enters the condenser
through the steam inlet.
7 What’s the function of the air ejector?
The air ejector draws off any air from the
condenser.
8 What’s the function of the hot well?
The condensate collects in the hot well.
9 What’s the function of the condensate
pump? The condensate pump draws the
condensate from the hot well and sends it
into the boiler as boiler feed-water.
Ex 8 Complete the text with the missing
prepositions and relative pronouns.
A condenser converts exhaust steam into
boiler feed-water. The main parts 1 of a
condenser are the following ones. The
bank of tubes, in 2 which the cooling
water flows; the hot well, 3 where the
condensate collects; the circulating pump,
4 which draws the cooling water 5 from
the sea; the condensate pump, 6 which
sends the condensate 7 into the boiler. A
condenser is also fitted 8 with a valve,
which regulates the entry 9 of seawater
10 into the bank of tubes, and 11 with an
air ejector or vacuum pump, which draws
12 off the air and keeps the condenser
13 under a vacuum. There are two
25-03-2013 14:49:21

separate circuits 14 in a condenser: the
cooling water circuit and the condensate
circuit.
Ex 10 Study the condenser form with your
partner and find the following
information.
1 It is a surface-cooling, single flow
condenser.
2 The condenser surface is 3,400 m2.
3 Its working pressure is 45,000 Ps (Pascals).
4 13,600 m3 per hour.
5 Two vacuum pumps are installed.
6 They extract 14.0 kg per hour.
7 The vacuum pumps are driven by an
electric motor.
8 The power of the driving motor is 22 kW.
Ex 11 Now complete the sentences
referring to condensers and evaporators
using used to or is/are used to. One
sentence is in the negative form!
1 Condensers 1 used to be essential parts of
steam turbines.
2 Nowadays, steam turbines 2 are not used
as the main engine on board ship.
3 Until the 1980s, steam turbines 3 were
used to drive the main propeller.
4 Steam turbines 4 are still used to drive oil
cargo pumps on oil tankers.
5 Today, condensers 5 are used to condense
refrigerant gases in air condition systems.
6 A condensers 6 is used to condense
vapour through heat rejection.
7 An evaporator 7 is used to evaporate
liquids through heat extraction.
8 Nowadays, condensers and evaporators
8 are used in freshwater generating
systems.
Ex 12 Mark the following statements as
True or False and correct the false ones.
1T–2F–3F–4T–5T–6F–7F–8T
2 Fresh water is an essential necessity on
board ship.
3 Fresh water is generated by a distillation
process.
6 Water boils at a lower temperature in a
freshwater generator.
7 Air ejectors are used to reduce the
pressure in the evaporation chamber.
Project Work
Complete the table with the missing
information.
02_KeysExercises.indd 29
key to unit exercises
Ship’s full name QUEEN MARY 2
Type of ship Luxury cruise liner
In the winter the QM2 cruises in the Southern Hemisphere.
In the summer the QM2 crosses the Atlantic between
Southampton and New York.
Number of passengers 2,600
Crew size 1,500
Swimming pools 3
With no freshwater system, 6 days
water would be finished in
Number of evaporators 6
Capacity 3,000 litres/hour
Decline in production scale (calcare).
is caused by
Scale reduces heat transfer, causing efficiency and
production to drop.
Unit 15
The steam engine plant
Ex 1 Answer the questions.
1 The engine is an energy converter.
2 They convert other types of energy into
useful work.
3 The electric motor and the heat engine
are the two types of engine we use every
day.
4 Electric motors convert electricity into
work.
5 Heat engines transform heat or thermal
energy into mechanical work.
6 The source of thermal energy absorbed
and converted by heat engines is a
working fluid.
7 The working fluid in a steam engine
plant is steam.
8 In a steam engine plant, steam follows a
closed cycle. This means that steam
changes its physical state (from water into
steam) but its quantity and chemical
characteristics do not change.
Ex 2 In a steam engine plant, steam
operates as the working fluid and follows
the cycle that is described in the
paragraphs below. Read the following
paragraphs and arrange them in the
correct sequence. Then listen to the
recording and check.
The steam cycle in a steam engine plant
In a steam plant system, there are four
basic stages of steam operation:
generation, expansion, condensation and
feed. The steam cycle begins in boilers,
which are steam-generating apparatus.
29
25-03-2013 14:49:21
 Teacher’s book
Boilers contain banks of steel tubes filled
with water, and arranged so that the
heat from the furnaces passes over them.
In the furnaces, fuel oil is sprayed under
high pressure and it burns with intense
heat, changing the water in the tubes
into steam. The generated steam passes
to the turbine through the main steam
pipe, for the second stage of the steam
cycle.
Steam expansion takes place in the
turbine. It is here that the heat energy of
steam is converted into mechanical work.
The main part of a turbine engine is a
revolving rotor mounted with a series of
alternating rows of static and moving
blades. As steam passes through the
blades and expands, each row deflects
the steam flow on to the following one.
These engines have a high pressure (HP)
and low pressure stage (LP). After steam
has passed through both stages, it goes
to the condenser for the next stage.
In the condenser, exhaust steam is
cooled and condensed back into water.
A condensate pump draws the
condensate from the condenser and
sends it into a deaerating tank known
as the hot well.
The final stage of the process is the feed
stage. The condensate that collects in
the hot well is pumped back to the
boiler by a feed pump and is known
as feed-water.
Ex 3 Answer the questions.
1 The basic steps in steam operation are
steam generation, expansion,
condensation and feed.
2 The cycle begins in a boiler, because a
boiler generates steam.
3 After leaving the boiler, steam passes
into the turbine.
4 In the turbine, steam expands as it
passes through the turbine blades.
5 In the condenser, exhaust steam
condenses into water again.
6 The condensate finally goes into the
boiler as boiler feed-water.
Ex 4 Label the blocks that represent the
main components of a marine steam
engine plant.
30
02_KeysExercises.indd 30
Boiler Steam turbine
Condenser
Hot well
Ex 5 Work with your partner and, using
the diagram, describe the sequence of
steam operation in the system using the
sequencers first, then, next, after that,
finally. After that, write your sentences as
a key to the diagram.
Here is an example:
First, steam is generated in a boiler. Then it
goes into the turbine, where it expands
though the turbine blades. Next the
exhaust steam is condensed back into
water in a condenser. It is finally sent back
into the boiler, as boiler feed-water.
Ex 8 Complete the sentences by using a
derived noun or one of the verbs in Ex. 7
in the appropriate form. Note that some of
the sentences need the passive form.
1 The apparatus that increases or decreases
electric voltage is called a transformer.
2 The engine is an energy converter.
3 An internal combustion engine converts
chemical energy into mechanical energy.
4 Liquids become less dense, when they are
heated.
5 Water turns into steam when it reaches
boiling point.
6 The up and down motion of a piston is
transformed into a rotary motion by a
connecting rod.
7 Ice turns back into water when it is
heated.
8 A solar panel converts the energy of the
Sun into electricity.
Ex 9 Select the appropriate verb form to
fill in the gaps.
Transformations of heat energy in the
system
A steam engine plant 1 converts heat into
mechanical work by 2 transforming the
25-03-2013 14:49:22

heat energy of steam, which operates in
the system as the working fluid.
First, water receives heat energy from a
heating source and 3 changes into steam,
then some of the heat energy of the fluid
is 4 converted into useful work in the
turbine. Finally, the remaining heat that
cannot be 5 transformed into work, is
absorbed by a cooling source, and steam
6 is turned into water again. The main
parts of the system are the boiler, the main
engine and the condenser.
Ex 10 So far you have found some unusual
expressions in the texts. Have you
understood their meaning? Complete the
definitions. The first and last one have
been done for you.
The fluid/the working fluid here is steam.
A heating source refers to the boiler (the
heat from the furnace).
The condenser is called a cooling source.
Thermal energy is the same as heat/heat
energy.
Mechanical energy is synonymous with
mechanical work/useful work.
Ex 11 Choose the correct option.
1c, 2b, 3b, 4a, 5c
Ex 12 Study the diagram of a steam engine
plant and identify the following
components.
1 A hot well
2 B economiser
3 C boiler
4 E steam tank
5 V1 main stop valve
6 V3 seawater valve
7 F turbine
8 G condenser
9 P1 main circulating pump
10 P2 condensate pump
11 P3 feed pump
12 V4 donkey stop valve (for auxiliary duties)
Ex 13 Read and complete the description
of the plant, then listen to the recording
and check.
Sequence of operations in a steam engine
plant
A feed pump 1 draws the water from the
hot well and 2 sends it into the
economiser. In the economiser, the feed-
water receives the 3 heat of the exhaust
gases that come from the boiler furnace,
and 4 becomes hotter. The hot water is
02_KeysExercises.indd 31
key to unit exercises
then 5 sent into a steam tank, placed
above the boiler.
In the boiler, the water is converted into
steam. The steam 6 generated in the boiler
is sent into a super-heater, which makes
steam dryer and more efficient.
After that, steam enters the turbine
7 through a main steam-pipe. A number of
valves are 8 fitted on the pipeline. There
are stop valves, which control the
9 passage of steam to the engine or to
auxiliary machinery, and a feed check
valve, which 10 controls the final entry of
steam into the turbine. In the turbine,
steam 11 expands as it pushes the rotor
blades. The blades start rotating and
transmit 12 their rotary motion to the
shaft. From the turbine shaft, the rotary
motion is transmitted to the ship’s
13 propeller by a line of shaft assemblies
and reduction gears.
Then, exhaust steam goes into the
condenser, where it condenses back into
water, 14 because it gives some of its heat
to the cooling water that flows through
the condenser tubes. A condensate pump
draws the 15 condensate from the
condenser and sends it into the hot well.
Here the steam cycle starts 16 again.
Ex 14 Now answer the questions without
looking at the texts.
1 A steam engine plant is used for
producing mechanical energy for driving
auxiliary machinery.
2 The main components of the plant are
boilers, steam turbines and condensers.
3 Steam is the working fluid because its
heat energy is transformed into mechanical
energy by the turbine.
4 The basic stages of steam operation are
steam generation, expansion, condensation
and feed.
5 A boiler generates steam.
6 In a boiler, water is converted into steam
because it receives the heat of the exhaust
gases from the furnace.
7 The main part of a steam turbine engine
is a revolving rotor, which carries many
rows of rotating blades.
8 As it passes through the turbine, steam
expands and makes the rotor blades move.
9 The main component of a condenser is a
cooling surface made up of banks of tubes,
which contain cool seawater.
31
25-03-2013 14:49:22
 Teacher’s book
10 In a condenser, steam condenses back
into water because it gives some of its heat
to the seawater flowing through the
condenser tubes.
11 A stop valve controls the passage of steam
to the engine or to auxiliary machinery.
12 Feed check valves control the final entry
of steam into the engine.
Project Work
Fact The cartoon was made in 1928
by Walt Disney and is considered the debut
of Mickey Mouse.
Unit 16
Nautical charts
Ex 1 Answer the questions.
1 Yes, they did. Babylonian, Egyptian and
Greek mariners probably used nautical
charts
2 Ptolemy was the greatest map-maker of
ancient times.
3 Columbus used the Ptolemaic Chart in
1492.
4 Mercator lived in the 16th century.
5 A navigator uses a working chart to plot
the ship’s course and current position.
Ex 2 Read paragraph 2 and label the
pictures with the following terms.
1 great circle: Equator
2 small circle: parallel
3 great circle
4 small circle
5 great circle: meridian
6 small circle
Ex 3 Complete the description of the
picture in paragraph 3 with the missing
words.
The picture shows the two possible
1 routes between the points A and B
on the Earth’s surface. You can see that
the blue great circle 2 track is an arc of a
3 great circle which passes through the
4 centre of the Earth, while the red
5 rhumb line is represented as the arc
of a 6 spiral.
The 7 easiest route to follow is the rhumb
line, because it keeps a constant 8 angle,
while the 9 shortest route is the great
circle track, because it joins two points
with a 10 minimum distance.
Therefore, 11 rhumb lines are the best
32
02_KeysExercises.indd 32
choice for short crossings, and 12 great
circle tracks are preferred for ocean
crossings.
Ex 4 Insert the correct term corresponding
to each definition.
1 rhumb line
2 great circle track
3 great circle
4 small circle
5 rhumb line
6 rhumb line
7 great circle track
8 great circle track
Ex 5 Now underline the correct alternative.
1 Since geographical maps and nautical
charts are flat representations of the
Earth’s spherical surface, they can only
represent the Earth’s surface with some
distortions.
2 Maps and charts are reduced
representations of more or less extended
areas of the Earth’s surface.
3 The chart scale indicates how many times
the Earth’s surface has been reduced to be
represented on the chart.
4 A scale of 1:800,000 can represent a more
extended area of the Earth’s surface than a
scale of 1:80,000 on the same size chart.
5 Projection is the technique used for
drawing up maps and charts.
Ex 6 Complete the text with the missing
words.
1 Projection is the technique used for
drawing up geographical maps and
nautical charts.
Only two projection methods are widely
used for 2 nautical charts: the Mercator
projection and the 3 gnomonic projection.
Mercator lived in the 16th century and was
a pioneer in the world of map-making,
since he made use of mathematical
4 calculations to draw up his charts.
He imagined the Earth as being inside
a 5 cylinder and projected the surface of
the Earth onto it. Parallels and meridians
are represented as 6 straight lines which
form constant 7 right angles where they
intersect. Meridians are equally spaced
out, while 8 parallels move farther apart
as we move away from the 9 Equator
to the poles.
A mathematical 10 constant is used to work
out this ever-increasing distance.
25-03-2013 14:49:22

The viewpoint of a gnomonic chart is the
11 centre of the Earth. On this chart,
parallels and meridians are projected
outwards onto a plane 12 tangent to a
point on the Earth’s surface.
Nautical charts also indicate particular
features of the coast and 13 sea and they
are an essential 14 aid to navigation.
Ex 7 Answer the questions.
1 No, no single projection method
preserves all the wanted properties.
2 Rhumb lines are plotted as straight lines;
angles are presented correctly; for small
areas, the true shape of features is
maintained.
3 A chart is “conformal” when angles are
presented correctly.
4 When using a Mercator chart, you can
easily work out position, distance and
direction.
5 Rhumb lines can be plotted as a straight
line.
6 On a gnomonic chart, a straight line
represents the best circle route.
7 A gnomonic chart is useful to the
navigator for plotting the best circle
route.
8 The best working chart for the routine
plotting of navigational data is the
Mercator chart.
Ex 8 Compare the two types of nautical
charts by completing the table.
Mercator chart
Projection from the centre of the Earth
onto a cylinder.
Great circle tracks result as curved lines.
Rhumb lines result as straight lines.
Mostly used for plotting the track during
navigation.
Gnomonic chart
Projection from the centre of the Earth on a
tangent plane.
Great circle tracks result as straight lines.
Rhumb lines result as curved lines.
Used for identifying the best great circle
track between two points.
Ex 9 Mark the following statements as
True or False and correct the false ones.
1F–2T–3F–4T–5F–6F
1 Nautical charts also include information
about the coastline, prominent features,
buoys and traffic separation schemes.
02_KeysExercises.indd 33
key to unit exercises
3 The NOAA produces the charts in the
USA.
5 Channel features are represented on
large-scale charts.
6 Small-scale charts are used to represent
large areas like ocean basins.
Ex 10 Match each term with its
definition.
1d, 2f, 3h, 4g, 5b, 6e, 7c, 8a
Project Work
2. Now go to the glossary page on the
same site and find the requested
information.
1 Lights, buoys, day marks, and fog
signals.
2 They mark channels and warn mariners
of dangers such as rocks, wrecks, and
obstructions.
3 The U.S. Coast Guard takes care of the
aids to navigation along the coasts of the
United States.
4 A nautical chart shows where the aids to
navigation (lights, buoys, day marks) are,
and where the dangers (rocks, shallow
spots, wrecks, reefs) are.
5 It is a weekly publication by the U.S.
Coast Guard which tells mariners about
important changes to their nautical
charts.
6 The ship star is also known as the “Pole
Star.” The sailor’s name for Polaris, the
North Star. This star is important for ocean
navigation.
7 A shoal is a place where the water is
shallow enough to be dangerous to
ships.
8 Sailors stand the watch on the
ship’s deck to watch for danger
(rocky shoals, enemy ships, storms
or shipwrecks).
9 It is the rise and fall of sea level due to
the pull of the moon on the water.
10 In some places in the United States,
tides may be as high as 20 feet.
3. Now go to this site which shows how
to read markers – or buoys – on a chart.
Complete the following table, but
remember that in North and South
America they use the IALA System B for
lateral marks, and this is why the red and
green colours are inverted. The shapes of
33
25-03-2013 14:49:22
 Teacher’s book
the topmarks are inverted, too
(nun=cone).
Letters and numbers on buoy
1 RW “G”
2 G “1” Fl G 4 secs
3 RN “2”
4 GC “3”
5 RGN “C”
Description
1 Red and White striped marker with letter
“G”
2 Green marker with number 1 and
flashing a green light every 4 seconds
3 Red Nun buoy with number “2”
4 Green Can buoy with number “3”
5 Red and Green Nun buoy with letter
“C”
Type of buoy
1 Safe water marker
2 Light marker
3 Starboard marker
IALA System B
4 Port marker
IALA System B
5 Junction marker
Unit 17
Piloting & plotting
Ex 1 Answer the questions.
1 Coastal navigation is also known as
piloting.
2 Landmarks are easily recognizable
objects along the coastline such as a
lighthouse, a church or a tower.
3 Landmarks are always indicated – often
with a specific symbol – on nautical
charts.
4 It means line of position.
Ex 2 Fill in the gaps; one has already been
done to help you.
When we navigate near the coast, we
make use of 1 landmarks along the
shoreline to work out our 2 position. For
example, we use 3 lighthouses, 4 churches
or towers to take a 5 bearing. A bearing
will tell us our ship’s 6 position relative to
the landmark. We draw a 7 line of
position on the 8 chart for each bearing.
Ex 3 Answer the questions.
1 When we are taking a bearing we are
actually measuring the angle between
34
02_KeysExercises.indd 34
North and our landmark, as this angle is
seen from our ship.
2 We call it a compass bearing.
3 We need to apply corrections for both
variation and deviation.
4 The magnetic variation is indicated on
the nautical chart of the area and can be
either east or west.
5 If the variation is to the East, it has a
positive algebraic sign (+) and we add it to
our compass reading; if the variation is to
the West, it has a negative algebraic sign
(–) and we subtract it from the compass
reading.
6 Ships are mostly made of metals which
interfere with the ship’s compass. These
metals cause a deviation of the compass
magnetic needle. The magnetic deviation is
specific for each ship and needs to be
corrected by expert technicians, who
report the corrections on a ship’s own
compass deviation tables. (See Unit 8,
paragraph 2)
Ex 4 Study the picture in paragraph 2 and
decide whether the magnetic variation has
a positive or negative sign. Then apply the
correction rule using the correction values
in the table below and work out the ship’s
true courses.
Compass courses
Compass bearing of oil rig: 44° E
Compass heading course: 324°
Magnetic variation: +/– 3°
324° N
44°
True courses
LOP: 50° (44° cc + 3° var + 3° dev = 50° tc)
True course: 330° (224° cc + 3° var + 3° dev
= 330° tc)
Magnetic deviation: +3
25-03-2013 14:49:22

330° N
50°
Ex 5 Answer the questions.
1 We choose a high landmark, such as a
lighthouse or church tower.
2 The height of these landmarks is
indicated on the nautical chart.
3 We use the following formula: d = (2h) :
a, where d is the distance in nautical miles,
h is the height in metres of the landmark
and a is the angle found by the sextant in
minutes of an arc.
4 We can draw a circular LOP on the
nautical chart.
5 Next we can take a compass bearing and
get a line of position that will cross the
circular LOP at some point, giving our exact
position or fix.
6 This method is called by bearing and
distance.
Ex 6 Imagine you are piloting along the
island of Asinara, in the north-west of
Sardinia, and you are now close to Punta
Scorno Lighthouse, which you know is 80
metres above sea-level. If your sextant
reading is 2°.15’, what is your distance
from the lighthouse? Apply the formula in
paragraph 3 and find out.
For sextant reading 2°.15’ (two degrees
point fifteen minutes) the distance should
be 1.1 nautical miles. Explain Ss that they
divide the result by 1,852 to convert the
distance from metres to nautical miles.
Ex 7 Fill in the gaps.
When we have two or three 1 bearings
from two or three landmarks we can
determine our position 2 fix. Our ship is at
the point where two 3 LOPs cross or
inside the 4 triangle formed by three LOPs.
If two landmarks are on the same line, we
say that they give a 5 range (bearing). This
02_KeysExercises.indd 35
key to unit exercises
is the most accurate and easiest bearing to
6 take. The ship is on the line which
7 joins the two objects.
Ex 8 Answer the questions.
1 It means to mark the position of something
on a diagram by connecting points.
2 On the horizontal edges of a Mercator
chart.
3 The vertical edges of the chart show the
latitude scale.
4 We measure the distance in miles on the
latitude scale, where each minute of
latitude corresponds to one nautical mile.
5 A compass rose is used to measure
directions using true or magnetic
bearings.
6 Magnetic bearings are referred to the
inner circle of the compass rose.
7 It is printed with annual change in the
centre of the compass rose.
8 To plot on a Mercator chart we need a
pencil, rubber or eraser, a pair of dividers
and nautical triangles or a parallel ruler.
Ex 9 These are the steps followed in
paragraph 7a. Try to put them in the right
order.
1a, 2g, 3e, 4d, 5h, 6c, 7f, 8b
Ex 10 Complete the summary for
paragraph 7b with the missing words.
We need 1 another LOP to fix our position,
so we take a bearing on a 2 second buoy.
Our compass reading is 3 45°. So we find
45° 4 magnetic on the compass rose and,
using the parallel ruler, 5 draw another
line starting at the 6 second buoy until it
crosses our 7 first LOP. The point where
the two lines 8 cross is our fix. We label
the fix with a 9 circle and write the time.
We use 10 24 hours time on the chart to
avoid confusion between am and pm.
Ex 11 Answer questions 1-5 about
paragraphs 7c, and questions 6-10 about
paragraph 7d.
1 It starts at our fix and ends at the
channel buoys.
2 The course is plotted as a straight line
that runs from our fix to the buoys.
3 At the centre of the compass rose.
4 Here a parallel ruler is used. An edge of
the parallel ruler is placed on the course
line, the other edge or arm is made to
walk over to the centre of the compass
35
25-03-2013 14:49:23
 Teacher’s book
rose, so that the magnetic heading of the
course line can be read.
5 The capital M above the course line
indicates that it is degrees magnetic.
6 To take the length of the course line we
use the dividers.
7 To the latitude scale of the chart, to find
the length in nautical miles.
8 Because on the latitude scale each
minute of latitude corresponds to one
nautical mile.
9 It is 1.9 nautical miles long.
10 Under the course line.
Ex 12 Try to sequence the steps for
obtaining and plotting a running fix.
1g, 2d, 3f, 4a, 5h, 6b, 7e, 8c
Ex 13 Make up the correct sequence of
actions performed to measure the course
angle with a couple of nautical triangles.
Notice that here you have to measure the
angle on the meridian and not on the
compass rose.
1d, 2b, 3a, 4e, 5c
Project Work
1. Watch & listen to the video at least
three times, until you find all the
requested information.
1 Course 080°. Speed 8.0 knots per hour.
2 Alpha Rock.
3 At 0900 (zero nine hundred).
4 The first compass bearing is 045°.
5 At 0930.
6 The second bearing is 015°.
7 First you need to convert the compass
bearings into true bearings.
8 D = S x T /60 (D is equal to S times T
divided by sixty).
9 You already know the ship’s speed – 8
miles per hour – and the time interval
between the two bearings – 30 minutes.
10 The vessel has sailed 4 nautical miles in
30 minutes.
11 We measure the distance on the
latitude scale, on the nearest vertical edge
of the chart. We use the dividers to do
that.
12 Next we use the dividers to transfer the
length of 4 nautical miles on the chart,
placing one leg of the dividers on the 0900
LOP and the other leg on the course line.
13 Our running fix position is where the
“advanced” 0900 LOP crosses the course line.
36
02_KeysExercises.indd 36
14 A running fix is labeled RF(ix) with the
time alongside.
2. Now follow the script while you listen
to the video again, for another three times
at least, until you can easily understand
what the speaker says.
This is how we plot a running fix position.
Assuming the course is 080° (zero eighty
degrees) and the speed is 8.0 (eight knots)
so eight nautical miles per hour, we take a
bearing of 045°on Alpha Rock at 0900
(zero nine hundred). Now convert the
compass bearings to true bearings and we
plot it on the chart.
After 30 minutes, we take a new bearing
on the same rock that reads 015° (zero
fifteen degrees). Now convert the compass
bearings to true bearings and plot it on
the chart along with the new time, 0930
(zero nine-thirty). Knowing the speed, the
next step is to determine the distance that
the vessel sailed from 0900 to 0930. For
that we use the formula D = S x T /60 (D is
equal to S times T divided by sixty), where
D is the distance in nautical miles, S is the
boat speed, and T is the time in minutes.
In our case 8 knots x (times) 30 minutes
divided by sixty equals 4 nautical miles.
(8 knots x 30 min /60 = 4 NM).
Using the dividers, we span* a distance of 4
miles on the latitude scale which is closest
to the course line and which runs along the
sides of the chart. We apply this span* on
our course, placing one leg of the dividers
on the 0900 LOP intercepting the course
and the other leg on the course line.
(We mark the point of interception with a
blue pencil). Using the parallel ruler, we
transfer the 0900 LOP to the blue mark. As
we notice, the two LOPs intercept at the
point RF. This is our running fix position.
*to span or to spread, span or spread (the nouns)
3. Ask your navigation teacher to give you
a suitable nautical chart on which you can
take two or three bearings to fix your
ship’s position and plan the first leg of
your course to a given destination. You
should plot the chart with LOPs, fix
position and course. Then write the
description – in English – of your
procedure. You can work in pairs, if you
prefer.
25-03-2013 14:49:23

Unit 18
Business logistics
Ex 1 Find the English expressions for the
following terms in the passage.
1 Beni di consumo goods/commodities
2 Consumare to consume
3 Produrre to produce
4 Immagazzinamento storage
5 Acquisire to acquire
6 Efficienza di produzione production efficiency
7 Tenore di vita standard of living
8 Fonti di produzione sources of production
Ex 2 Complete the following diagram with
the missing words.
Early peoples
and small african villages
produce and acquire
goods close to home
consume in the
same area
move
goods
to store
perishable goods limited range of goods
consume in a short time consume later
Ex 3 There are 10 mistakes in the following
text. Listen and underline the mistakes.
Number the mistakes from 1 to 10, then
listen again and write the correct words.
Logistics is an essential part of trade. Since
different areas are more suitable for
producing different goods, logistic systems
allow excess goods to be exported while
goods not found locally could be imported.
This process is known as the principle of
comparative advantage and ensures a
higher economic standard of living for
everyone in the world. Logistics is a bridge
between production and market areas which
can often be a long way away from each
other. Any company operating in the
world market today needs to have effective
logistic management.
Ex 4 Answer the questions.
1 Business logistics.
2 Finance, marketing and production.
02_KeysExercises.indd 37
key to unit exercises
3 Separately.
4 Coordinated management.
5 Because products are made available
exactly when and where they are needed.
6 1961.
7 Council of Logistics Management.
8 Point of origin and point of
consumption.
9 No, it also deals with services.
10 Because it includes all the activities in
transportation and supply.
Ex 5 What is the aim of SCM/integrated
logistics management? Put the following
phrases in the correct order to complete
the definition.
SCM aims to get the right goods or services to
the right place, at the right time, and in the
desired condition, while making the greatest
contribution to the firm.
Ex 6 Refer to the diagram and the text and
reorder the steps in the Customer Service
Loop.
Inventory maintenance – Order processing –
Transportation – Customer receives goods
Ex 7 Find out why transportation and
inventories are essential logistic activities.
Listen and complete the text.
Transportation is essential because no
modern 1 firm can operate without
providing for the movement of its 2 raw
3 materials or its finished 4 products.
Inventories are also essential to logistics
management because it is usually not
5 possible or 6 practical to provide
7 instant production. Inventory
8 maintenance of goods serves as buffers
between supply and 9 demand, so that
needed product availability may be
maintained for 10 customers.
Experience has shown that each will
represent 11 one-half to two-thirds of total
logistics 12 costs.
Ex 8 Look at the diagram, fill in the past
participle of each verb and complete the
steps in the supply chain.
Raw materials are 1 sent by ship to
overseas ports from the sources production.
They are 2 transported from the port to a
warehouse location.
They are then transported to a factory,
where they are 3 transformed into
4 finished products.
37
25-03-2013 14:49:23
 Teacher’s book
Then these products are 5 stored in a
warehouse before being 6 delivered to the
final customers.
Ex 9 Match the following items.
1d, 2c, 3e, 4a, 5b
Ex 10 Mark the following statements as
True or False and correct the false ones.
1F–2T–3F–4F–5T–6T
1 Reverse logistics systems handle the flow
of goods from the client back to the source.
3 Products can sometimes be returned if
they are damaged.
4 Packaging materials are sometimes
returned to the shipper.
Ex 11 Answer the questions.
1 Customers, suppliers and stakeholders.
2 In terms of time and place.
3 Because it is the wrong time of year.
4 Because it is the wrong place.
5 When customers pay more for a product
than what it costs to put it in their hands.
6 It adds value.
Ex 12 Choose the correct option.
1c, 2b, 3b, 4a, 5a, 6c
Unit 19
The moving air
Ex 1 Answer the questions.
1 An “air mass” is a part of the atmosphere
where temperature, humidity and pressure
are homogeneous.
2 Air masses form when the air remains for
a long time over an extensive area with
stable environmental conditions.
3 Cold and dry air masses usually form over
the continental regions.
4 Warm and humid air masses form over
tropical areas.
5 No, air masses do not remain in their
areas of origin.
6 As they move all around the Earth, air
masses redistribute the Sun’s heat from the
regions which receive too much to those
which receive too little.
Ex 2 Answer the questions.
1 The physical phenomenon which makes
the air move over the Earth’s surface is
convection.
2 Cold air is heavier than warm air.
3 Convection currents happen when the
38
02_KeysExercises.indd 38
light warm air rises while cold air descends
and takes the place of the warm air.
4 There are air masses with different
temperatures all around the Earth because
the temperature varies from place to place.
5 The air over the land is warmer than the
air over the sea in summer because the
ground rapidly heats up and reflects this
heat.
Ex 3 Answer the questions.
1 Air pressure varies with temperature
because cold air is heavier than warm air
and has a higher pressure.
2 It varies with humidity because the more
water vapour there is in the air, the lighter
it is.
3 Warm and humid low pressure air masses
typically form over the equatorial regions
because these regions receive a lot of sun
and are rich with vegetation.
4 The factors determining the movements
of air masses are temperature differences,
humidity and pressure and their reciprocal
effects.
5 Isobars are points with the same
atmospheric pressure. They are shown as
rings around the high and low pressure
centres.
6 High pressure areas are marked with H,
low pressure areas with L.
7 Winds tend to flow around the pressure
centre following the isobar.
8 The blue arrows indicate the wind
direction around the low pressure area.
Ex 4 Mark the following statements as
True or False and correct the false ones.
1F–2F–3T–4T–5F–6T–7T–8F
1 Cyclone areas contain low pressure air.
2 High pressure air is attracted to the
neighbouring low pressure zones.
5 In the northern hemisphere the winds
turn towards the right and in the Southern
Hemisphere they turn towards the left.
8 Winds blow in the direction where the
pressure is lower.
Ex 5 Work with your partner and complete
the questions in the exercise below, then
ask and answer the questions with your
partner.
1 What are the main winds?
2 When do the main winds blow?
3 Where are the main high pressure areas
on our globe?
25-03-2013 14:49:24

4 Where are the main low pressure areas
situated?
5 Why do the main winds blow in opposite
directions in the two hemispheres?
6 How far can the main winds move air
masses?
Ex 6 Match each phrase on the left with its
second part on the right.
1e, 2l, 3k, 4j, 5h, 6a, 7i, 8f, 9d, 10g, 11c,
12b
Ex 7 Answer the questions.
1 A weather front is the area of transition
between two different air masses.
2 A cold weather front is when cold air
approaches and replaces warm air.
3 The cold air in a cold front moves under
the warm air, making it rise.
4 A warm weather front is when warm air
replaces cold air.
5 The warm air slides over the cold air and
rises, cooling down as it does so.
6 When a warm front passes, it often
brings rain and snow.
7 A warm front is represented as a red line
with red semicircles pointing in the
direction the front is travelling.
8 A cold front is indicated by a blue line
with blue triangles pointing in the
direction the front is travelling.
Ex 8 Form questions using the given
question words.
1 Where does the satellite image come from?
2 When was it taken?
3 What time was it taken?
4 What kind of image is it?
5 Who elaborated the data?
6 How is the data represented on the
weather map?
7 Why was the sea rough?
8 Where was the front going?
Project Work
Use this link http://www.
theweatherchannelkids.com/cool-clips/
hurricaneminute/, then answer the
following questions.
Clip 1: Peakseason
1 September 10.
2 August-October.
3 The sea surface is warmest and the winds
are weak making the best atmospheric
conditions for hurricanes.
02_KeysExercises.indd 39
key to unit exercises
Clip 2: Odds of a strike
1 Once every 2 years.
2 South Florida.
3 Every three to five years.
Clip 3: Grab’n’go
1 Money, medicine and documents.
2 Your pets.
Clip 4: Eyeopeners
1 Microwave imagery.
2 A very large eye is more damaging to
the coast.
A contracting eye can lead to the
strengthening of the hurricane.
Clip 5: The Deadliest
Complete the table with the missing
facts:
Where /name When How many victims?
Hurricane Mitch 1998 11,000
Antilles 1780 22,000
Galveston 1990 8,000 – 12,000
Bay of Bengal (Bangladesh) 1970 ¼ to ½ million people
Clip 6: All in a name
1 The Caribbean name for the God of evil
winds.
2 From the name of the Greek gods.
3 Tropical cyclone.
4 In the Indian Ocean and Australia.
HURRICANE MINUTE (Complete video
script)
Peak season
Just like no two hurricanes are alike, no
two hurricane seasons are alike as well, so
the most active months can change each
year, but there are averages with
September 10th considered the peak of
the season. September’s the hot month
when the majority of hurricanes form,
followed by August and October and the
reason for that is the sea surface
temperatures are the warmest during that
time and the atmospheric environment
for hurricane and tropical storms to form
is the best; in other words, the winds in
the atmosphere are fairly weak, so weak
winds in the atmosphere and warm water
means the chances for hurricanes to form
is greater. While the odds are higher
hurricanes do and can happen outside
those peak months and can also be very
intense.
39
25-03-2013 14:49:24
 Teacher’s book
Odds of a strike
I wouldn’t bet on it but odds are the
United States will see a landfalling
hurricane on average once every 2 or 3
years based on what we’ve seen over
time; that said, the probabilities depend
on location. The number 1 spot for a
landfalling hurricane in the US is South
Florida, particularly Miami or the Florida
Keys, and then the number 2 is probably,
the Outer Banks of North Carolina has a
very high chance of getting struck,
followed by the mouth of the Mississippi.
Then the Florida Panhandle and the
Upper Texas Coast are also high incidence
areas but not nearly as high as South
Florida which is the number 1.
But if you look at the probability of each
individual location, the odds of getting hit
actually go down. For example, you could
expect a hurricane to hit the number 1
area, South Florida, on average every 3 to
5 years but remember we could get one,
more or less frequently, it all depends on
the weather pattern.
Grab’n’go
Ideally you won’t have to grab and go if
hurricane is headed your way! If you do,
there’s a chance you’ll forget something
important when it’s time to evacuate.
“A mandatory evacuation has been
ordered…”
You want to make sure you have money,
make sure you have medicine and make
sure you have any documents with you
that are easy to carry that you cannot
replace and that may include your
favourite photographs as well. Also don’t
leave your pets behind! There are now
some shelters that will allow pets or try to
make arrangements beforehand for a
kennel, a friend or a relative that can care
for them and remember to take their
food, medicine, favourite toy or blanket
and perhaps a carrier too.
Eyeopeners
A hurricane can have an eye even if you
can’t see it on satellite. That’s because
there can be just a veil of cirrus that
covers the top of the eye of the hurricane
so you can’t see underneath it. We can see
that now very easily with microwave
imagery so it can’t fool us anymore.
40
02_KeysExercises.indd 40
Also the size of the eye doesn’t necessarily
correspond to the strength of the winds
around it. The thing we can say is that a
very large eye of the hurricane is more
damaging to the coast because more of
the coast feels the strongest winds of the
hurricane.
The other interesting thing is that if you
have an eye that is contracting, getting
smaller with time, sometimes that’s
related to the strengthening of the
hurricane, as it tends to wind up much
like an ice-skater with their arms out,
when they pull their arms in, they spin
faster. This is called an “eye-wall
replacement hurricane.”
The Deadliest
When you consider what the deadliest
hurricane is, it depends on time and
place. The deadliest hurricane in recent
memory in the Atlantic Basin is Hurricane
Mitch in 1998. Mitch is estimated to
have killed more than 11,000 people
in Central America, but the record in
the Atlantic Basin is the 1780 hurricane
that actually went through the Antilles
and more than 22,000 people lost their
lives in that.
How about the deadliest hurricane to
landfall in the United States?
That distinction goes to the Galveston
hurricane of 1900, an estimated 8,000 to
as high as 12,000 people died. Looking at
hurricanes outside the Atlantic Basin,
there’s no competition. It’s a 1970 tropical
cyclone that was in the Bay of Bengal. It
hit Bangladesh, where at least a quarter
of a million to half a million people were
killed. In one time alone, it’s believed 45%
of the 167,000 residents were lost.
All in a name
Is a hurricane different than a typhoon?
Actually the only thing that’s different is
the name. We have the name hurricane in
the Atlantic Basin and that basically comes
from the God of Evil Winds, from the
Caribbean terminology, Huracan, and we
use the same name in the Eastern Pacific
as well.
The Western Pacific, the typhoon is the
same phenomenon and that name has
actually been traced back to Greek
times.
25-03-2013 14:49:24

The term tropical cyclone, on the other
hand, encompasses both hurricanes and
typhoons. Meteorologists, they came up
with the idea, well, let’s make a generic
term that any low pressure system that
spins around a low pressure centre that
originates in the Tropics or Sub Tropics,
we’ll call a tropical cyclone and in the
area of Australia and the Indian
Ocean only the name tropical cyclone
is used.
Unit 20
Logistic services
Ex 1 See if you can remember Pfohl’s
definition of “logistics” by reordering the
following parts given in scrambled order;
try not to look!
“Logistics must ensure that a recipient is
supplied from a point of origin in accordance
with his requirements with the correct
product (in quantity and variety), in the
right condition, at the right time and in the
right place at minimum cost.”
Ex 2 Mark the following statements as
True or False and correct the false ones.
1F–2T–3F–4T–5T–6F–7F–8F
1 Logistic service providers manage the
transport/movement of goods.
3 Global providers transport good all over
the world.
6 Goods are moved from one point to
another and sometimes they are stored.
7 Providers use transport-logistical
networks to deliver their goods on time.
8 The three core processes of logistics are
transport, transhipping and storage.
Ex 3 Listen and fill in the gaps.
Transport is the coverage of distance or
the 1 change of location for goods using
a means of transport. Every transport
system consists of 2 cargo, means of
transport and the transport process.
Means of transport involves the 3 type of
transport in which goods are moved. The
choice of the means of transport – either
ground, air or 4 water transport – is closely
tied to economic and 5 time factors.
The transport process concerns the
6 planning and management of the
transport chain by which goods are
7 moved from a source – the sender – to a
02_KeysExercises.indd 41
key to unit exercises
8 destination – the recipient. It implies the
management of the organizational
procedures, supported by technically
advanced solutions, by which the goods
9 flow is constantly under control and
accompanied by the corresponding
10 documents.
Ex 4 Answer the questions about
paragraphs 3, 4, 5.
1 The coverage of distance or change of
location of goods using a means of
transport.
2 Economic and time factors.
3 The way goods are moved from the
source to the recipient.
4 Using different means of transport for
the same goods.
5 A warehouse.
6 Goods are loaded onto vehicles and sent
to a receiving point.
7 A bridge between dispatch and receipt
of goods.
8 Construction and operation of the
transhipment warehouse.
Ex 5 Revise the comparative and
superlative forms of these adjectives.
cheap cheaper the cheapest
expensive more expensive the most expensive
slow slower the slowest
fast faster the fastest
Ex 6 Decide on the best main transport
method for the following products;
consider whether you are transporting a
large/small quantity and if time is
important.
Goods/place of manufacture Recipient
A Giorgio Armani dress manufactured Boutique on Fifth Avenue,
in Thailand New York
10,000 Manchester United ballpoint
pens manufactured in China needed
Manchester United Supporters’
Club Shop
before season begins
Jeans manufactured in India Camden Street Market
1,000 fresh eggs produced in Northern Distribution warehouse
England (London) of a supermarket
chain
Small/large quantity/ Transport
time-critical (air/sea/road & rail)
small air
large/time-critical road & rail
large sea
large/time-critical road & rail
41
25-03-2013 14:49:24
 Teacher’s book

Ex 7 Complete the definitions by matching Break-bulk

each phrase on the left with its second 1 Used for non-bulk cargo not in
part on the right. containers.
1c, 2e, 3g, 4b, 5f, 6a, 7d 2 Goods are loaded directly into the
Ex 8 What does each ship carry? Write the hold;
type of cargo next to the ship. – on pallets;
1 Bulk carriers sugar, rice, grain – in crates;
2 OBO carriers mineral ore, coal – in drums or sacks.
3 Oil tankers crude oil 3 Typical cargo: specialised cargoes (fresh
4 Cruise liners rich holiday-makers fruit).
5 Refrigerated ships dairy produce, fruit, 4 Often used in small ports with no
meat infrastructures.
6 Ferries cars and passengers 5 Goods are easily damaged so sturdy
packaging is necessary.
Ex 9 Put the strengths and weaknesses of
containerized ship transport in the correct Bulk
part of the table. 1 Large shipments of particular
commodities.
Strengths Weaknesses 2 Types of cargo:
– coal;
economical high capital costs – oil;
environmentally friendly slow – ore;
large transport volume tied to the water network
– wheat.
independent of weather dependency of large container ships
on specially equipped ports
5 Goods are not packaged, they are simply
carried in the hold.
Ex 10 Look at the bill of lading and answer
the questions.
1 Tinned tomatoes.
Unit 21
2 4. Moving waters
3 800. Ex 1 Choose the correct option for each
4 20,000. sentence.
5 Naples. 1 Most of the earth is covered by water.
6 San Francisco. 2 Only a quarter of the Earth’s surface is
7 Caetano Overseas Shipping. land.
8 331 Great Valley Avenue, San Francisco 3 The greatest quantity of water is in the
23457 USA. Southern Hemisphere.
9 Seamar, s.r.l. 4 There is less water in the Northern
10 Highlander. Hemisphere.
11 Kolf-Heinz AG. 5 The large extensions of water between
12 22nd March 2011. continents are called oceans.
6 Lands enclose parts of oceans forming
Project Work smaller basins called seas.
Complete the table. 7 Seas are connected to oceans.
Containers Ex 2 Complete with the missing
1 Used for cargo already in containers. definitions.
2 Number of kinds of containers: 20. 1 It indicates the quantity of salt in the
3 Different sizes: 2. water.
4 Large ships hold: 9,000 containers 2 It decreases with depth.
5 Advantages: 3 It decreases with latitude from the
– direct transfer ship/road-rail; Equator to the Poles.
–d  oor-to-door service; 4 It is typical of warm seas because of
– fast and efficient loading/unloading; constant evaporation.
– security. 5 It is heavier than less salty water.

42

02_KeysExercises.indd 42 25-03-2013 14:49:24


6 It is typical of seas which receive a
constant flow of fresh water from rivers
and rain.
1 Salinity
2 The sea temperature
3 The sea temperature
4 High salinity
5 Very salty water
6 Low salinity
Ex 3 Compare the following oceans and
seas using comparatives and superlatives.
Follow the examples.
Ex: The Pacific Ocean is the largest ocean
in the world.
The Pacific Ocean is larger than the
Atlantic Ocean.
Other examples: The Persian Sea is the
warmest sea in the world.
The Persian Sea is warmer than the Baltic
Sea.
Ex 4 Listen and fill in the gaps.
We have seen that the 1 waters of the
sea are not the same everywhere.
Their 2 temperature varies: it is different
on the surface and underwater, at the
poles and at the 3 Equator. Their
salinity varies, as it depends on 4
evaporation and on the supply of fresh
water from rivers and rain. These
variations give rise to water masses,
which are quite 5 different from each
other and which also have great
difficulty in mixing with each other.
These 6 water masses slide alongside
each other, side by side or over and
under each other and they can often
flow for 7 thousands of miles retaining
their own particular characteristics,
before they finally and gradually merge
with the nearby waters. The constant
motion of these water masses form the
main ocean 8 currents which have a
great influence on climates. These large
currents form a system called the global
conveyor belt.
They slowly transport 9 warm waters
over long distances towards the colder
zones of the globe and cold waters
towards the hot zones. In this way they
help to redistribute the different
amount of 10 Sun’s heat that the
Earth’s surface receives at the Equator
02_KeysExercises.indd 43
key to unit exercises
and at the poles, reducing the difference
in temperature between the extreme
11 regions of the Earth. Together with
the equatorial masses of warm air that
move towards the poles and the 12 cold
masses of polar air that move towards
the Equator, the great ocean currents
make the temperature bearable for
human life all over the Earth.
One well-known example is the Gulf
Stream, which originates from the North
Equatorial Current and transports
13 warm water from the Gulf of Mexico
to the North Atlantic along the American
coast. Then it turns north-east and carries
the heat of the tropical seas to the North
of Europe, making life bearable even in
Spitzbergen in the Arctic Ocean. Cold
ocean currents, like the Labrador Current,
tend to move in the 14 opposite direction
towards the Equator.
Ex 5 Now answer the questions.
1 No, seawater is not the same
everywhere.
2 There are differences in, for example,
surface and underwater temperature,
salinity, density etc.
3 These differences give origin to water
masses, which are quite different to one
another.
4 When water masses meet, they have
difficulty in merging and often slide
alongside each other for great distances
until eventually they mix.
5 These great movements of water masses
are called the main currents.
6 No, all parts of the Earth do not receive
equal amounts of heat from the Sun. The
poles receive very little, the temperate
regions receive more, and the equatorial
regions receive the most.
7 Warm currents go towards the poles.
8 They carry warm water to the cold zones,
and together with the warm air masses
make life bearable in extremely cold
regions.
9 The Gulf Stream originates from the
North Equatorial Current and eventually
arrives to the North of Europe flowing into
the Arctic Ocean.
10 The Gulf Stream is a warm ocean
current, while the Labrador Current is a
cold ocean current.
43
25-03-2013 14:49:24
 Teacher’s book
Ex 7 Fill in the gaps in the following table
about tides.
Type of tides Interested areas
High tides Hemisphere tilted towards Moon.
Opposite hemisphere.
Low tides Neighbouring areas to high tide zones.
Spring tides Hemisphere tilted towards the Moon &
hemisphere tilted towards the Sun.
Neap tides Both hemispheres.
Cause Effect
The attraction of the Moon. Ocean surface swells/rises.
The centrifugal force. Ocean surface rises as
of the Earth water masses gather from
neighbouring zones.
Water taken away and moved Water drops/decreases.
to high tide zones.
Sun and Full Moon are aligned. Sun and Moon’s forces of
gravity pull in the same line.
Sun and Moon are Sun and Moon’s forces of
perpendicular. gravity work against each other.
Ex 8 Mark the following statements as
True or False and correct the false ones.
1F–2F–3T–4F–5F–6T–7F–8F
1 Tides are caused by the action of the
Moon (and the Sun).
2 The tide cycle is repeated twice a day.
4 Spring tides occur when the Sun and the
Moon are aligned/in line.
5 When the Sun and Moon are
perpendicular there are neap tides.
7 Spring tides occur when the Moon is
full.
8 Neap tides occur when the Moon is in
the first or last quarter.
Ex 9 Match each term with its definition.
1d, 2a, 3b, 4c
Ex 10 Compare the Atlantic Ocean and the
Mediterranean Sea and choose the correct
option for each sentence.
1 The waters of the Atlantic Ocean and the
Mediterranean Sea meet at the Gibraltar
Strait. Here the Mediterranean is about
30 cm lower than the Atlantic.
2 On the surface the lighter waters of the
Atlantic flow towards the Mediterranean.
3 However, deep down the heavier waters
of the Mediterranean flow in the opposite
direction. The seawater in the
Mediterranean is denser because it is
saltier.
44
02_KeysExercises.indd 44
Project Work
First of all, check what you know about
ocean currents by choosing the correct
option in the following sentences.
The cold water in the polar regions forms
sea ice making the water become saltier;
consequently, its density increases and it
starts to sink; surface water moves in to
replace the sinking water, and in turn, it
becomes saltier and colder starting the cycle
of moving currents known as the global
conveyor belt.
This system is driven by thermohaline
circulation, which starts in the cold waters
near the North Pole; the cooled surface
water sinks and a current is formed as
surface water moves in to replace it. The
deep water moves south past the Equator
and then around the edge of Antarctica,
where it cools and sinks again – in other
words, it is “recharged”.
The main current divides into two sections
which are eventually warmed and rise as
they travel back towards the North
Atlantic, where the cycle begins again. The
cycle is very slow – scientists estimate that
it takes about 1,000 years for any cubic
metre of water to complete the cycle.
Unfortunately, research has shown that
climate change has an effect on the
conveyor belt.
Global warming causing increased rainfall
and the melting of glaciers means that
more warm fresh water enters the system
and it could stop the cold, salty water from
sinking. If this happens, the global
conveyor belt could stop working causing
terrible effects for the Earth’s temperature.
Unit 22
The dead reckoning plot
Ex 1 Answer the questions.
1 From the Latin navis together with agere,
navigation means to “to move and direct”
the ship from a starting point to her
destination.
2 The navigator plans the course before
starting the journey, to be sure to follow the
shortest and safest route to his destination.
3 He uses nautical charts, radio bulletins,
weather maps referring to the areas where
the ship will be sailing.
25-03-2013 14:49:25

4 The track is the ship’s planned course.
5 The planned track line divided into
segments because there are points where
the ship has to change direction.
6 These segments are called the legs of the
track.
7 Junction points are the points where the
ship changes her course direction. They are
the points where the track legs meet.
8 The track looks like a broken line on the
chart.
Ex 2 Study the meaning of the English
terms, then find and write the Italian
equivalent for each of them.
1 Ship’s heading = prora bussola
2 Course = rotta
3 True course or track = rotta vera
4 Drift = velocità della corrente e deriva
5 Leeway = scarroccio
6 Track line or course line = spezzata
lossodromica
7 Leg of the track (or leg of the course) =
tratto della spezzata
8 Junction points = punto estremo di
ciascun tratto della spezzata
Ex 3 Mark the following statements as
True or False and correct the false ones.
1T–2F–3F–4T–5T
2 In the past, deduced reckoning involved
making a lot of calculations.
3 Nowadays, dead reckoning means
applying vectors to the last fix to work out
the ship’s approximate position.
Ex 4 Match each term with its definition.
1c, 2e, 3j, 4f, 5d, 6g, 7k, 8l, 9a, 10b, 11h, 12i
Ex 5 Put the sentences in the correct
sequence.
e, f, b, c, a, d
Ex 6 Find and correct eight mistakes in the
summary.
While plotting his course, the navigator
notes down his ordered speed and works
out the distance the ship has to cover using
this formula: D = S x T.
This means that he can work out how long it
will take the ship to reach the next junction
point. However, several factors cause errors
in calculations; one major problem is the
effect of sea currents. For this reason the
Project Work
navigator has to make a fix as often as
possible to check his position and make
necessary adjustments to his ship’s course.
02_KeysExercises.indd 45
key to unit exercises
Ex 7 Now cover the text and answer the
questions about the plot on the chart.
1 The ship’s course line was in the direction
of 090°, at a 15-knots speed.
2 The ship changed speed, so the navigator
plotted a DR position for this time, 7.5
miles further of the 0900 position.
3 He changed the direction of the course
line.
4 The new course was to 145°, at a
20-knots speed.
5 The course line ended at 1106, when a
new fix was obtained.
6 A new DR course line starts at this point,
from the new fix.
Ex 8 Listen and complete the following text.
How to apply the DR rules
Clearing the harbour at 1 1000, the
navigator obtains a last visual 2 fix. This is
called taking departure, and the position
determined is called the departure.
At the 1000 departure, the Conning
Officer* orders a course of 060° and a
speed of 10 3 knots. Therefore the
navigator lays out the course line from the
1000 fix in a direction of 4 060°.
He calculates that in one hour at 10 knots
he will travel 10 5 nautical miles. He
measures 10 nautical miles from the 1000
fix position and marks the course line with
a 6 semicircle. At 1100, the Conning
Officer orders a course change to 7 090°.
The navigator plots an 1100 DR due to the
8 course change and to the “every hour”
rule. At 1200, the Conning Officer
9 changes course to 180° and speed of 5
knots. The navigator plots the 1200 DR.
At 1300, the navigator 10 obtains a fix. He
noticed that the fix position is offset to the
11 east from the DR position. So he
determines set and drift from this offset
and applies this 12 set and drift to any DR
13 position from 1300 until the next fix. He
also resets the DR to the fix; that is, he
draws the 180°course line from the
14 1300 fix.
*The Conning Officer is the Deck Officer in charge
of navigation, having responsibility for the ship as
the direct representative of the Captain.
1. First we visit a web page that will teach
you how to solve problems involving
45
25-03-2013 14:49:25
 Teacher’s book
speed, time and distance. Find the
following information.
http://www.schoolofsailing.net/
speedtimedistance.html
1 To use it simply put your finger D miles, therefore the speed of the 13 current
over the letter you are solving for. S•T
2 One knot is equal to one nautical mile
per hour.
3 Twelve nautical miles.
4 The “tricky thing” is when you have to
calculate not only full hours but also
minutes.
5 To convert minutes to hours divide by 60.
6 Twenty-three minutes divided by sixty
equals 0.38 hours (23 minutes/60 minutes
per hour = 0.38 hours).
7 Just make sure a couple of calculators are
a regular part of your boat’s equipment!
2. Now we’ll watch this video http://www.
youtube.com/watch?v=80Ad8Y4bZJM,
which shows how to calculate your Set
and Drift. Watch and listen to the video at
least three times, until you find all
requested information for each exercise.
2a. Complete the table by inserting each
of the following items in the correct
position:
Ship’s heading 085°M (magnetic)
Ship’s sailing 4 knots
speed Petroleum
Sailing time passed 2.30 hours
before fix 1 Hydrocarbons are mainly composed of
Set and drift vector 130°M
angle 2 It was formed from the remains of
Length of vector 6 NM
Speed of sea 2.4 knots
current 4 At the bottom of salty marshes or at the
2b. Now listen and complete the video
script.
Calculating your set and drift
We are sailing along and 1 obtain a fix.
Our heading is 2 085° magnetic and speed
is 3 four knots. At 4 two and a half hours
later we figure our dead reckoning
position. At that time we also obtain
another fix. The two positions are
different. What is the set and drift?
Draw a 5 line from the original fix to the
new fix: that was our 6 track over the last
two and a half hours. 7 Draw a line from
the 8 DR to our new fix: that is the set-
drift 9 vector over the last two and a half
46
02_KeysExercises.indd 46
hours. Using a course protractor or the
10 compass rose measure the vector
11 angle, we find that is 130° M. We find
our vector 12 length to be six nautical
is six nautical 14 miles divided by two
point five 15 hours: that’s two point four
16 knots.
3. Imagine you are the Conning Officer
instructing a Deck Cadet. Your ship’s DR plot
is the one shown in paragraph 5. Give the
cadet the instructions to determine the set
and drift (the direction and speed of the
current) which offset the ship from the
expected DR position.
To find the real track that the ship has
sailed over the last 2.06 hours 1 draw a
line from the original fix to 2 the new fix.
To find the set and drift vector that offset
the ship over the last two hours draw
3 a line from the DR position to the new fix.
To determine the direction of the current
4 measure the vector angle.
To calculate the speed of the current
5 find the vector length and divide this
length by 6 2.06 hours, which is the time
that has passed since the previous fix.
Unit 23
Ex 1 Answer the questions.
hydrogen and carbon.
unicellular plants and animals.
3 It took from five to a hundred million years.
mouth of a river.
5 The organic remains deposited at the
bottom of salty marshes and lagoons,
where their molecules were slowly broken
down by anaerobic bacteria, until only
carbon and hydrogen remained. This
carbon and hydrogen formed the crude oil
molecules.
6 A petroleum trap is formed by
impermeable rocks which “trap” a
petroleum deposit.
7 They are called oilfields.
8 It contains oxygen, nitrogen, sulphur and
traces of mineral salts, sediments and
water.
25-03-2013 14:49:25

Ex 3 Answer the questions.
1 It is carried out in the fractionating
tower of an oil refinery.
2 The temperature is higher at the bottom,
which is the point nearest to the furnace.
3 The heavier hydrocarbons.
4 Heavier hydrocarbons have a higher
number of carbon atoms in their
molecules.
5 The lightest hydrocarbon is natural gas
or methane.
6 It only has one carbon atom in its
molecule.
7 From 16 to 20 carbon atoms.
Ex 4 Study the example and link the pair
of sentences below using the relative
pronoun which.
1 Coal, crude oil and natural gas, which are
mainly composed of hydrogen and carbon,
are known as hydrocarbons.
2 Natural gas, which has only one carbon
atom in its molecule, is the lightest
hydrocarbon.
3 Heavy oil and lubricating oil, which have
up to 25 carbon atoms in their molecules,
are the heaviest hydrocarbons.
4 A great number of products are obtained
from petroleum distillation, which is
carried out in oil refineries.
5 Petroleum is a mixture of different
hydrocarbons, which have different boiling
temperatures.
6 The first distillation process is fractional
distillation, which is given this name
because the various products are separated
out into fractions according to their boiling
temperatures.
Ex 5 Match the two parts of each
definition.
1e, 2f, 3g, 4c, 5b, 6d, 7a
Ex 6 Complete the text with the given
words.
First the crude oil passes 1 through the
pipe still, where it turns partially 2 into
steam. Then it enters the distillation tower.
The oil goes 3 up through the tubes and
plates. The fractions 4 of different boiling
ranges are drawn 5 off at different levels
of the tower.
The 6 heavier distillates, such as heavy oil
go 7 through other processes, the most
important of which is 8 cracking. In this
02_KeysExercises.indd 47
key to unit exercises
process, the heavy oils are heated to 9
over 450°C and their long molecular chains
are broken 10 down, so that 11 lighter
molecules are formed, 12 which are typical
of petrol.
The petrol obtained in the first refining
process 13 goes through another process
called 14 reforming.
In this process, aromatic hydrocarbons like
15 benzene are added to petrol, in order to
16 increase its octane number.
Project Work
1. Check what you know about the
refining process by matching each phrase
on the left with its second part on the
right.
1q, 2k, 3e, 4f, 5m, 6d, 7p, 8j, 9c, 10h, 11o,
12g, 13i, 14n, 15b, 16l, 17a
Unit 24
Kinds of energy & energy sources
Ex 1 Mark the following statements as
True or False and correct the false ones.
1T–2T–3F–4F–5T–6F–7T–8F–
9 T – 10 T
3 Kinetic energy is the energy of
movement.
4 Potential energy is stored energy.
6 The chemical energy of fuel is potential
energy.
8 Fuel chemical energy is converted into
thermal energy through a combustion
process.
Ex 2 Answer the questions.
1 The primary types of energy derive
directly from an energy source.
2 The secondary types of energy derive
from the transformation of a primary type
of energy.
3 Mechanical, thermal, nuclear, chemical.
4 Compressed air, pressurised water and
electrical energy.
Ex 4 Answer the questions.
1 We need energy sources to produce
power and run machinery.
2 Renewable and non-renewable energy
sources.
3 They are renewable, which means that
they are continuously renewed (made
again, anew) by Nature.
47
25-03-2013 14:49:25
 Teacher’s book

4 Fossil fuels. 3 A water wheel is turned by a flow

5 They were formed from the fossilised of water and is used to work machinery.
remains of unicellular marine plants 4 A hydro-turbine is an engine whose
and animals millions of years ago. driving wheel is turned by a current
It also took millions of years to form of water.
them.
Ex 10 Without looking at the texts, try to
6 They are not an endless resource, since
answer the following questions.
Nature cannot make oil deposits or coal
1 Energy is the source for every physical or
fields in a short time cycle.
chemical phenomenon and for every
Ex 5 Match each keyword with its transformation.
meaning. 2 Potential and kinetic energy.
1c, 2e, 3d, 4a, 5b 3 Primary energy derives from a source in
Ex 6 Complete the diagram with the nature; secondary energy is derived from
primary sources of energy given us by the conversion of some kind of primary
Nature. energy.
4 Primary: mechanical, thermal, nuclear,
PRIMARY ENERGY chemical. Secondary: electrical, pressurised
air, compressed air.
5 Renewable energy sources are
Renewable Non-renewable energy continually remade. Non-renewable
energy sources sources (fossil fuels)
energy sources were formed millions
of years ago and are not easy or quick
Solar Wind Water
Coal Oil Gas to replace.
power power power
6 Renewable: Sun, water, wind. Non-
renewable: gas, oil, coal.
Ex 7 Answer to the questions.
7 A prime mover is an energy converter,
1 Prime movers are energy converters.
it allows us to transform energy for use.
2 A heat engine is a prime mover.
8 Yes, it is because it transforms the
3 Heat engines use the chemical energy
chemical energy in fossil fuels into
stored in fossil fuels.
mechanical energy.
4 They produce mechanical energy.
9 Heat engines use fossil fuels. They
5 It is released through a combustion
produce mechanical energy.
process.
10 Solar panels, water wheels, windmills.
6 Heat engines use non-renewable energy
sources. Ex 11 What are fuels? What is the main
characteristic of fuels? Compare your
Ex 8 Complete the diagram with the
answer to the definition found in a
missing items from paragraph 4.
monolingual dictionary and copy it
PRIME MOVERS below.
Fuel: A fuel is a material for producing heat
or other forms of energy.
Natural power Heat engines Ex 12 Read the pairs of statements
carefully and choose the correct option.
Internal External 1b, 2b, 3a, 4b, 5b, 6a, 7b, 8a, 9b, 10a
Solar Wind Water Hydro-
combustion combustion
power mill wheel turbine
engines engines
Project Work
Have you ever thought how much energy
Ex 9 What kind of prime movers are these?
goes into the making of a sandwich?
Complete the sentences.
Use this link http://www.youtube.com/
1 A solar panel converts the energy of the
Sun into electrical energy. watch?v=d6UZrgGSrY4 to find out why a
2 A windmill is worked by the action of the sandwich is dripping in oil!
wind on sales which revolve. Watch and complete the table below.

48

02_KeysExercises.indd 48 25-03-2013 14:49:26

 key to unit exercises

through the engine and dispersed into

Ingredient Production Fuel
the air.
BREAD 1 The farmer ploughs and He uses a
4 Less than 40% of the heat energy
(Cereal) harrows the field and drills diesel-run produced by petrol is converted into
the seeds into the ground. tractor.
mechanical work.
2 For seeds to grow, he uses Made from
fungicides, pesticides, oil. 5 Most of the heat energy produced in a
insecticides. car engine is dispersed into the
3 As nutrients he adds Derived from
chemical fertilisers. natural gas. surrounding air.
4 When cereal ripens, it is Diesel-run 6 More than 60% of the heat energy
harvested. harvesters. produced by internal combustion engines
5 The grain is dried. He uses big
heaters. is lost because it cannot be transformed
(More fuel!) into useful work.
6 Then grain is driven to be More diesel!
processed in huge industrial Ex 3 Answer the questions.
plants.
1 They are called hydrocarbons.
HAM It comes from a pig. Pigs need
grain, 1/2
2 Wood, coal, crude oil are examples of
tonne per hydrocarbons.
pig.
(Repeat steps
3 Because they release a great amount of
1-5 for grain!) heat in a combustion process.
SALAD a Shipped; Energy 4 They are said to have a high heating
b Flown; needed!
c Grown in a heated
value.
greenhouse.
Ex 4 Answer the questions.
ALL INGREDIENTS Cooked, cooled or both. Energy
needed! 1 Combustion is a chemical reaction.
2 Antoine Lavoisier, in 1783.
Transported in a More diesel!
refrigerated lorry. 3 They combine together and form new
chemical compounds.
This is why our simple ham and salad 4 Carbon monoxide will be formed when
sandwich is dripping in oil! there is not enough oxygen to oxidise the
carbon completely.
5 When the carbon oxidation is complete,
Unit 25 carbon dioxide is formed.
Heat energy & heat engines 6 In a combustion process thermal energy
Ex 1 Answer the questions. or heat is produced.
1 The continuous motion of atoms and 7 This energy comes from the chemical
molecules produces thermal energy or energy stored in the fuel.
heat. 8 More heat energy is produced when CO2
2 Not completely. is produced in the burning process,
3 It means that not all the heat energy because this happens when the carbon in
produced in the combustion process can be the fuel oxidises (or burns) completely.
transformed into mechanical work by the Ex 5 Label the flow chart with the
engine.
following items: Engine, Fossil fuels,
4 It is lost through the engine (by friction)
Burning process.
and dispersed in the surrounding air.
5 About 40%. Fossil fuels Burning process Engine
Stored Chemical energy Heat energy
Ex 2 Complete the sentences by using the chemical transformed into transformed into
energy heat energy mechanical energy
following terms.
1 The more heat energy converted into
Ex 6 Complete the questions using these
mechanical work, the more efficient the
engine. question words. Then complete the
2 All of mechanical energy can be answers.
transformed into heat. Questions
3 Some of the thermal energy produced in 1 What kind of energy does a fuel have?
the combustion process is not transformed 2 When is a fuel’s chemical energy
into mechanical work but is wasted released?

49

02_KeysExercises.indd 49 25-03-2013 14:49:26

 Teacher’s book
3 In what form is it released?
4 What does a heat engine do?
Answers
1 It has stored chemical energy.
2 It is released through a combustion
process.
3 It is released in the form of heat and light.
4 It converts heat energy into mechanical
energy.
Ex 7 Listen and complete the text.
Electrical and Heat engines
In the previous unit we learned that the
engine is a 1 prime mover: a machine that
converts some 2 types of energy into
another. The form of energy we mostly
need to operate all different types of
machinery is 3 mechanical energy, or useful
work. We use 4 engines to provide
mechanical work from some other form of
energy. For example, a water wheel
converts the energy of a 5 flow of water
into mechanical work to operate
machinery.
Electric motors and heat engines are the
two 6 main types of engine in use today,
taking their name from the kind of energy
that they 7 absorb and convert. The
electric motor makes use of 8 electrical
energy, while the heat engine converts
9 thermal energy or heat into useful work.
This thermal energy is produced 10 through
a combustion process, which may take
place either in a combustion chamber
11 inside the engine, or 12 outside the
engine in separate machinery, usually
a boiler.
Ex 8 Answer the questions.
1 A machine that converts some types of
energy into another.
2 Mechanical energy is also called useful
work.
3 We need it to operate all different types
of machinery.
4 Engines are used to provide useful work.
5/6 Electric motors and heat engines take
their name from the type of energy they
absorb and convert into mechanical work.
Ex 9 Answer the questions.
1 The combustion process takes place
outside the engine in a separate boiler.
2 The working fluid in steam engines and
steam turbines is steam.
50
02_KeysExercises.indd 50
3 Steam is produced in a boiler before
entering the engine.
4 It turns the moving blades or moves the
pistons up and down.
5 The two types of internal combustion
engines are reciprocating engines and gas
turbines.
6 Combustion take place in a combustion
chamber inside the engine.
7 The working fluid in internal combustion
engines is the hot expanding gases.
8 The flow of gases moves the turbine
rotor or a piston.
Ex 10 Fill in the diagram about heat engines
and then complete the text to describe the
diagram in your exercise book.
HEAT ENGINES
Internal combustion engines External combustion engines
reciprocating
engines
gas
turbines
steam
turbines
reciprocating
steam engines
Heat engines are divided into internal and
external combustion engines. The steam
engine and the steam turbine are external
combustion engines. In external combustion
engines steam operates as the working fluid
and drives the piston or the rotor blades. Gas
turbines and piston engines are internal
combustion engines. The gas turbine rotor
and the pistons are moved by exhaust gases.
Project Work
The picture shows an electric car charging
from an on-street station in London. Today
we are going to learn about the current
market of electric cars; see what potential
benefits they could bring and what
reasons limit their widespread adoption.
Use the following link and fill in the table.
http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Electric_car
Definition of an electric car
An electric car is an automobile which is
propelled by electric motor(s), using electrical
energy stored in batteries or another energy
storage device.
Top selling models of electric cars by
October 2011:
Mitsubishi i-MiEV;
25-03-2013 14:49:27

Nissan Leaf.
Number of worldwide sales of each model:
More than 16,000 units each.
Benefits of electric cars as compared to
internal combustion cars
A significant reduction of urban air
pollution as they do not emit harmful tailpipe
pollutants, such as carbon dioxide, and
other greenhouse gases.
Consequently they help to reduce
greenhouse gas emissions.
Less dependence on foreign oil.
Limitations to the widespread adoption of
electric cars
They are more expensive than conventional
internal combustion engine vehicles due to
the additional cost of their lithium-ion
battery pack.
Lack of public and private recharging
infrastructure.
Unit 26
Radio communication on board
Ex 1 Answer the questions.
1 By the internal telephone system or by
radio telephony.
2 Yes, to raise an alarm, for example in
case of a fire or a man overboard.
3 Posted next to the telephone.
4 Channels for on board communications.
Ex 2 Listen and complete the sentences.
1 The IMO and the ITU regulate the
international telecommunication system.
2 VHF stands for Very High Frequency.
3 The frequency band for marine VHF
radio communications is between 156 and
174 MHz.
4 The marine band contains 56 channels.
5 Channel 16 is used for distress, safety and
calling.
6 Channel 13 is for intership or bridge-to-
bridge communication.
7 Channel 70 is used to send an alert by
Digital Selective Calling.
8 Channels 15 or 17 are usually selected for
on board communications.
9 The maximum power allowed for a
marine VHF radio is 25 watts.
10 The power allowed for on board
communications is 1 watt.
02_KeysExercises.indd 51
key to unit exercises
Ex 3 Fill in the gaps with the missing
acronyms.
Full name Acronym
Very High Frequency VHF
Radio Telephony RT
Digital Selective Calling DSC
Search and Rescue SAR
Vessel Traffic Management Services VTMS
International Telecommunications Union ITU
Maritime Safety Information MSI
Coast Radio Stations CRS
Estimated Time of Arrival ETA
Estimated Time of Departure ETD
Navigational Telex receiver
Mega Hertz
NAVTEX
MHz
Ex 4 Study the table legend on page 230
and fill in the gaps.
1 They transmit navigational and
meteorological warnings, weather
forecasts, urgent distress messages.
Coast Radio Stations
2 These are Search and Rescue operations
which use aircraft.
Aero SAR
3 Radio communications between ships are
given this name.
Inter-Ship
4 These alerts are exclusively transmitted
on VHF Channel 70.
DSC alerts
5 Coast Radio Stations transmit on
channels indicated by this function.
Public Correspondence
6 This is what CRS messages are called.
MSI (Maritime Safety Information)
7 Radio communications from the bridge
to the Engine Room are indicated by this
name.
On Board Communications
8 This channel is exclusively available for
Radio Telephony Distress, Urgency or
Safety calls.
VHF CH 16
Ex 5 Which radio channel(s) would you
switch on to...?
1 order the ship’s engine room to reduce
speed. (VHF CH 15 or 17)
2 listen to the weather forecast.
(Any channel dedicated to “public
correspondence”, for example: Channels
01-05, 18, 60-65)
51
25-03-2013 14:49:27
 Teacher’s book
3 call another ship when you realize your
ships are in danger of colliding.
(VHF CH 13)
4 send an automatic distress alert.
(VHF CH 70)
5 communicate with the VTMS and ask if
you can enter the harbour. (Any channel
dedicated to “port operations”, for example:
Channels 11, 12, 74, 87-88)
6 communicate by radio telephony that
you have an injured person on board and
need medical assistance. (VHF CH 16)
Ex 6 Answer the questions.
1 A code of letters and numbers.
2 No, because we need to distinguish ships
with the same name.
3 A country’s registration authority.
4 To identify the ship when communicating
by radio.
5 Maritime Mobile Service Identification.
6 A unique nine digit number.
7 Into the ship’s DCS unit.
8 When the operator makes a VHF DSC
call.
Ex 7 Mark the following statements as
True or False and correct the false ones.
1F–2T–3F–4T–5T–6F–7T–8F
1 Sailors need to communicate with ships
from anywhere in the world.
3 SMCP is IMO’s standardized safety
language.
6 The SMCP makes use of a simplified
version of maritime English.
8 Any external communication must follow
the procedures indicated in the ITU
regulations.
Ex 8 Listen and complete the information
about the ship.
1 This is XIA Men.
2 I spell: X-ray – India – Alfa – Mike – Echo
– November.
3 My MMSI is 413065000.
4 My present position is 44°23’N, 8°48’E.
5 My bearing is 115 degrees from Lanterna
Lighthouse.
6 My distance is 13.6 nautical miles from
Lanterna Lighthouse.
7 My present course is 045° to Genova
Harbour.
8 My speed is 16.5 knots.
9 My ETA is 0700 hours local time.
10 My ETD is 1700 hours local time.
52
02_KeysExercises.indd 52
Ex 9 Complete the sentences with the
correct procedure words. Then listen to the
recording and check.
1 “My draft is one-two decimal 6 metres –
repeat one – two decimal 6 metres”.
2 “My present speed is one-four knots –
mistake. Correction, my present speed is
one-two knots”.
3 “What is your position? Say again”.
4 “Vessel in distress in position 160° six
miles from Barry Pier. Correction: 160° four
miles from Barry Pier”.
5 “Fairway speed is eight knots. Do not
overtake – repeat – do not overtake”.
6 “The course to reach me is 135°ʺ –
“Message not understood. Say again”.
7 “I cannot understand you. Please use
Standard Marine Communication Phrases”.
8 “What is bearing and distance of MV
Utopia from fairway buoy?” – “No
information – repeat – No information”.
Ex 10 These messages are transmitted to
your ship by a VTS Station: match each of
them with the appropriate response. Then
listen to the recording and check.
1f, 2d, 3a, 4g, 5c, 6b, 7e
Messages
1 ADVICE. Do not overtake the vessel north
of you.
2 Advice (you) change to VHF Channel 18.
3 Stand by on VHF Channel 6.
4 INSTRUCTION. Do not cross the fairway.
5 Be ready to get underway.
6 Repeat your position for identification.
7 What is your ETA at High Cross Pilot
Station in local time?
Responses
f I will not overtake the vessel north of me.
d Changing to VHF Channel 18.
a Standing by on VHF Channel 6.
g I will not cross the fairway.
c I am ready to get underway.
b My position is bearing 040° from Lizard
Point, distance 3.4 nautical miles.
e My ETA at High Cross Pilot Station is 0830
hours in local time.
Ex 11 Indicate the correct marker for each
message. Two markers are repeated.
Message
1 I am approaching from south.
2 I will anchor at Haven buoy and wait for
instructions.
25-03-2013 14:49:27

3 Charted depth has increased by two
metres due to winds.
4 You must keep to the north of the
fairway line.
5 From what direction are you
approaching?
6 Yes, I have altered course. My new course
is 025 degrees.
7 Dangerous wreck obstruction located in
position 49°43.ʹ4ʺN 2°22.ʹ7ʺW / 49.71778°N
2.36861°W.
8 I require a pilot at Small Cross Pilot
Station.
9 Have you altered course?
10 You are proceeding at a dangerous
speed. Advise you reduce speed to 4 knots.
Message Marker
1 ANSWER
2 INTENTION
3 INFORMATION
4 INSTRUCTION
5 QUESTION
6 ANSWER
7 WARNING
8 REQUEST
9 QUESTION
10 ADVICE
Ex 12 Use the suggestions and write the
message you would say or hear in each
situation. Then listen to the recording and
check if your message was correct.
1 QUESTION. Do I have permission to enter
the fairway?
2 ANSWER. Stand by until the pilot arrives.
3 QUESTION. Do you require a tug for
berthing manoeuvres?
4 ANSWER. I will need two tugs and a
pilot.
5 What is the name of your vessel and call
sign?
6 The name of my vessel is “Queen Mary”.
7 Please spell your call sign.
8 I spell BPBB.
9 What is your course and speed?
10 My present course is 087°.
11 My present speed is 18 knots.
12 From what direction are you
approaching?
Project Work
Now use the link to read about some people
who trained and worked as Radio Officers.
Complete the information in the table below
02_KeysExercises.indd 53
key to unit exercises
about: Geoff from England, Dirk J. from the
Netherlands and Riccardo from Italy.
http://digilander.libero.it/radiofficer/qna.html
Name Geoff
Date of birth 25.08.1952
(year)
Education He attended the College of International
Marine Radio Telecommunications in
Manchester. Then he completed the Radar
Maintenance certificate, and later took the
Radio Electronics Diploma in Liverpool.
Certificates MRGC certificate, Radar Maintenance
certificate, Radio Electronics Diploma
First ship Ocean Bridge / GYKA
(name/type)
Present job Presently employed as electronics systems
engineer.
Name
Date of birth –
(year)
Education He completed his studies at the nautical
college in Vlissingen and obtained the general
certificate for the maritime mobile service.
Certificates Ham-radio license obtained during his studies.
First ship Coral Rubrum / PJUT
(name/type)
Employed at Philips Electronics in Brazil.
Present job
Name Geoff
Date of birth 1945
(year)
Education Radio Officers school
Certificates International Certificate of First Class,
GMDSS GOC
First ship Calypso / 5MIK
(name/type)
Present job Retired
Unit 27
Radio messages
Ex 1 Answer the questions.
1 Channel 16.
2 A suggested channel such as Channel 13,
73.
3 Because Channel 16 must be left free for
Distress, Urgency or Safety calls.
4 THIS IS.
5 By Name, Call Sign or MMSI number.
6 No, they are not.
7 Three times.
8 Because of language pronunciation
problems.
9 OVER.
10 OUT.
53
25-03-2013 14:49:27
 Teacher’s book
Ex 2 Reorder the steps in the correct
sequence.
1d, 2c, 3f, 4b, 5a, 6e
Ex 3 Now listen to the complete
conversation between Ulysses 503000100
and Falmouth Coast Guard.
Falmouth Coast Guard, Falmouth Coast
Guard, THIS IS Ulysses, Ulysses 503000100
on Channel 16, Position report, Suggest
Channel 73. Over.
Ulysses 503000100 THIS IS Falmouth
Coast Guard, Falmouth Coast Guard.
Changing to Channel 73. Over.
Falmouth Coast Guard THIS IS Ulysses,
Ulysses 503000100 on Channel 73. How do
you read me? Over.
THIS IS Falmouth Coast Guard.
Readability loud and clear (five by five) go
ahead with your position report. Over.
THIS IS Ulysses. Position report: Ulysses
503000100 anchored in position 137
degrees from Lizard Point, distance 2.4
nautical miles. Over.
THIS IS Falmouth Coast Guard. Your
position report received, returning to
Channel 16 and standing by, Falmouth
Coast Guard. Out.
Ex 4 Imagine you are the radio operator
on board the OBO ship Lucky Star
03480000100. What would you say to…?
1 Homer Bay Coast Guard, Homer Bay
Coast Guard.
2 This is Lucky Star, Lucky Star 03480000100
on Channel 16.
3 Change to Channel 73.
4 Changing to Channel 73.
5 How do you read me?
6 Position report, Lucky Star 03480000100.
7 OVER.
8 OUT.
Ex 5 Try to put the radio conversation
between Rotterdam Coast Guard and
the Oil Tanker Lucky First in the correct
order. Then listen to the recording and
check.
1b, 2e, 3a, 4g, 5c, 6f, 7d
Rotterdam Coast Guard, Rotterdam Coast
Guard. This is Lucky First 5783, Lucky First
5783. Over.
Lucky First 5783, Lucky First 5783. This is
Rotterdam Coast Guard, Rotterdam Coast
Guard. Change to VHF Channel 11.
Over
54
02_KeysExercises.indd 54
 his is Lucky First 5783. Changing to VHF
T
Channel 11. Over
Rotterdam Coast Guard, this is Lucky First
5783. Calling on VHF Channel 11. How
do you read me? Over
Lucky First 5783, this is Rotterdam Coast
Guard. I read you strength 4. Go ahead
with your message. Over
This is Lucky First 5783. My ETA at Hook
Buoy will be 0900 UTC. Over
This is Rotterdam Coast Guard. Received
message. Your ETA at Hook Buoy will be
0900 UTC. Advise you change to channel
16 and stand by. Out
Ex 6 Imagine that you are sailing on your
ten-metre long sailing boat, called Magic
Lady. Your call sign is I45M – I is the call
sign prefix for Italian ships. Your MMSI is
247653290 – the first three digits, 247, of
your MMSI indicate Italian nationality. You
want to spend a few days at Sailfish
Marina on the Croatian coast, so you call
the Marina to know if they have a berth
for your boat. Fill in the gaps in the
conversation, then listen to the recording
and check.
Sailfish Marina, Sailfish Marina. This is
1 Magic Lady, 2 Magic Lady, I458M
(or 3 247653290). Over.
Magic Lady, Magic Lady. This is 4 Sailfish
Marina, 5 change to Channel 08. Over.
Sailfish Marina, This is Magic Lady,
Romeo. I’m changing 6 to Channel 08.
Over.
Sailfish Marina. This is Magic Lady, Magic
Lady. On Channel 08. Do you have a
berth for a 7 ten-metre long sailing boat?
Over.
Magic Lady, This is 8 Sailfish Marina,
9 yes we have. Sail into the marina and
go to left pier number three. Over.
Sailfish Marina, 10 This is Magic Lady.
We are under way. Out.
Ex 7 Answer the questions.
1 VHF Channel 16.
2 VHF Channel 70 is dedicated to VHF
DSC.
3 Vessels are required to maintain a
continuous listening watch on Channel 16
and also on Channel 70, if they are fitted
with VHF DSC equipment.
4 Distress, Urgency, Safety and routine
messages.
25-03-2013 14:49:27
 key to unit exercises

5 Distress communications are Distress call

maintained on VHF Channel 16 until it MAYDAY, MAYDAY, MAYDAY.
is certain that the ship in distress has THIS IS
received assistance. ISABEL, ISABEL, ISABEL J8B4332.
6 After an initial call on Channel 16, Distress message
Urgency, Safety and routine Distress signal MAYDAY
communications are transmitted on a Name and MMSI/call sign ISABEL
working channel. J8B4332
An example of a complete distress call Position TEN NAUTICAL MILES SOUTH
and message OF DRAGONISI
The VHF DSC Distress Alert followed by: 37°23’N, 25° 24 E
Nature of distress
MAYDAY MAYDAY MAYDAY
HOLED AND LISTING HEAVILY,
THIS IS
ENGINE ROOM FLOODED
LUBECK LUBECK LUBECK 211207270
REQUIRE IMMEDIATE ASSISTANCE
MAYDAY Other information
LUBECK 211207270 SIX PEOPLE ON BOARD
045 DEGREES TRUE FROM RERIK, DISTANCE SEAS ROUGH
24 NAUTICAL MILES The word OVER OVER
SINKING AFTER STRIKING SUBMERGED
Ex 10 Answer the questions.
OBJECT
1 They acknowledge receipt.
ESTIMATE FURTHER 15 MINUTES AFLOAT
2 The coast station.
30 METRE FISHING VESSEL
3 All stations must maintain radio
BLUE HULL WHITE SUPERSTRUCTURE
silence.
5 PERSONS ONBOARD 4 Until all transmissions have finished and
EPIRB ACTIVATED the emergency is over.
OVER 5 It indicates that normal transmissions can
Ex 8 Put the distress message in order. begin again.
Then listen to the recording and check. An example of acknowledgment or receipt
1b, 2d, 3a, 4e, 5c, 6g, 7f, 8h of a distress message by a ship
MAYDAY-MAYDAY-MAYDAY. station:
This is Blue Duck-Blue Duck-Blue Duck MAYDAY
WA1234. Lubeck Lubeck Lubeck 211207270
Cape Henry Lighthouse bearing 185 THIS IS
degrees – distance 2 miles. Sealandia Sealandia Sealandia OZGQ2
Struck submerged object. RECEIVED MAYDAY
Need pumps – medical assistance and tow. OVER
Three adults, two children on board. Example of a message by the distress
One person compound fracture of arm. vessel or the control station imposing
Estimate can remain afloat two hours. silence:
Blue Duck is twenty-two metre cabin cruiser MAYDAY
– white hull – blue deck house. OVER. All stations, all stations, all stations
Ex 9 The dry cargo vessel Isabel J8B4332 is THIS IS
travelling in the Cyclades, in the Aegean Rerik Coast Station Rerik Coast Station
Sea. The ship has struck a submerged rock, Rerik Coast Station
the hull is holed and the Engine Room is SEELONCE MAYDAY
flooded. The ship is fully loaded and now Example of the distress vessel or the
she is heavily leaning to one side. The control station advising resumption of
captain sends a Mayday. Try to make the “normal working transmission” on the
ship’s distress call and message, distress channel:
completing the table with the following MAYDAY
information. All stations, all stations, all stations

55

02_KeysExercises.indd 55 25-03-2013 14:49:28

 Teacher’s book
THIS IS
Rerik Coast Station Rerik Coast Station
Rerik Coast Station
1500 Local Time
LUBECK 211207270
SEELONCE FEENEE
Example of the broadcast of an urgency
call:
PAN PAN, PAN PAN, PAN PAN
Newharbour Coast Guard
THIS IS
Gironde Gironde Gironde 219217000
Request urgent medical assistance –
crew member sustained a broken leg –
suggest change to Channel 67
OVER
Ex 11 Complete the table for the urgency
message using the following information.
Then listen to the recording and check.
URGENCY SIGNAL
PAN PAN, PAN PAN, PAN PAN
Addressed to
All stations, all stations, all stations
The words “THIS IS” THIS IS
Station calling (x3)
MAERSK MAERSK MAERSK FWYH
In position 33°85ʹ South, 18°39ʹ East
Urgency message broken rudder, no steerage
request tow to shore
The word OVER OVER
Ex 12 The sailing boat ALBATROSS ZM1726
with three people on board was travelling
west of Kapiti Island in New Zealand. An
accident occurred and the skipper sent an
urgency message. Reorder the sentences.
Then listen to the recording and check.
1e, 2i, 3h, 4g, 5j, 6b, 7d, 8a, 9f, 10c
PAN PAN, PAN PAN, PAN PAN.
ALL STATIONS, ALL STATIONS, ALL
STATIONS.
THIS IS Albatross, Albatross, Albatross
ZM1726.
Five nautical miles west of Kapiti Island.
Dismasted and drifting.
Require tow.
Sea smooth.
No immediate danger.
There are three people on board.
OVER.
Example of the broadcast of safety call
from a coast station:
SECURITÉ, SECURITÉ, SECURITÉ
56
02_KeysExercises.indd 56
All stations All stations All stations
THIS IS
Hastings Maritime Radio Hastings Maritime
Radio
Hastings Maritime Radio
Navigation warning listen on Channel 67
Ex 13 Classify the following radio messages
as Distress, Urgency or Safety calls.
1 Distress.
2 Urgency.
3 Safety.
4 Safety.
5 Urgency.
6 Distress.
7 Distress.
8 Safety.
9 Safety.
10 Urgency.
Ex 14 Match the two parts of each
definition.
1c, 2g, 3a, 4f, 5b, 6d, 7e
Project Work
Write the following Italian definitions in
the table.
gale burrasca
forecast/outlook previsione
tidal surge mareggiata
inshore costiero
strong wind forte vento
rig piattaforma petrolifera
pipelaying posa di condotte
Now use the information from the site to
complete the following table:
1 How many gale warnings are 6
regularly broadcast every day?
2 What time is the first 24 hour 0620
forecast at Portpatrick?
3 How many WZ warnings are 6
regularly broadcast every day?
4 SWW stands for STRONG WARNING
WIND ………...........……
5 IWF stands for ………...........…… INSHORE
WATERS FORECAST
6 What time is the second inshore 1720
forecast at Niton?
7 What three channels are usually 23, 84, 86
used to broadcast MSI?
8 Navigational warnings (WZ) are HYDROGRAPHIC
provided by the UK ……….......... Office
9 Navigational warnings are NAVTEX
normally broadcast on………...........……
25-03-2013 14:49:28

10 What is the name given to the RIGMOVES
movement of rigs? process in a petrol engine. Study them and
11 Are RIGMOVES and pipelaying No
operations included in WZ?
12 How often are meteorological Every 3 hours
warnings given?
13 How often are shipping forecasts Twice daily
given?
14 When is a gale warning given? As soon as possible
15 A SWW is given when wind speed 6 or more
is predicted at FORCE Compression stroke
Unit 28
Reciprocating engines
Ex 1 Answer the questions.
1 Petrol engines and diesel engines.
2 As regards fuel ignition, they are
classified as spark-ignition and
compression-ignition engines.
3 In diesel engines, there is no need for
sparking plugs, since the fuel catches fire
as soon as it is exposed to the very hot air
which is compressed in the cylinder.
4 Diesel oil is a heavier distillate than
petrol, because it has more carbon atoms
in its molecules.
5 Fuel injectors.
6 Because the direct injection system has
proved to be more efficient, since it can
reduce fuel consumption.
Ex 2 Work with your partner and match
the words and verbs on the left with their
correct definition on the right. Then write
down some of the definitions in your
exercise book so that you can remember
them and use some of them as synonyms
for the verbs on the left.
1l, 2f, 3g, 4h, 5k, 6b, 7i, 8d, 9c, 10j, 11e,
12a, 13r, 14p, 15q, 16m, 17o, 18s, 19n
Ex 5 Mark the following statements as
True or False and correct the false ones.
1F–2T–3T–4F–5T–6F–7F–8T–
9 T – 10 F
1 The cylinders are cut in the cylinder block.
4 A stroke is one up or down movement
of the piston.
6 Each time the piston reciprocates, the
crankshaft turns through 360°.
7 In a four-stroke engine, the piston
reciprocates twice to complete a cycle.
10 Only one of the four stages of the cycle
provides useful work.
02_KeysExercises.indd 57
key to unit exercises
Ex 6 The pictures show the four-stroke
complete the descriptions of what
happens with each piston stroke.
Intake stroke
The piston moves down.
The intake valve opens:
– fuel and air enter the combustion
chamber.
The piston goes up and fuel and air are
compressed in the c.c.:
– the volume of the fuel mixture is
reduced;
– the pressure inside the chamber is
increased;
– the temperature of the mixture rises to
about 300°C. As a result, the mixture
becomes explosive.
Combustion stroke
The fuel mixture is set on fire by a
sparking plug:
– the mixture explodes;
– hot expanding gases are produced;
– the hot gases push the piston down.
Exhaust stroke
The exhaust valve opens.
The piston moves up and pushes exhaust
gases out of the cylinder.
Ex 7 Work with your partner and complete
the text with the missing words.
Four-stroke engines are the most popular
type of petrol engine. In this type of
engine the piston must 1 reciprocate twice
to produce 2 mechanical energy. That is,
the engine needs four piston strokes to
3 convert fuel into motion. This process is
4 called the four-stroke process and
5 consists of four stages: intake,
compression, combustion and exhaust.
During the intake stroke the piston 6 goes
down, the intake valve 7 opens and the
fuel-and-air 8 mixture enters the
combustion chamber. During the next
stroke, the piston returns to the top of the
9 cylinder. As the piston goes up, it
10 compresses the fuel mixture into a small
space, so that the volume of the mixture is
11 reduced.
As the volume is reduced, the 12 pressure is
increased and the temperature of the
mixture 13 rises to about 300°C. Now the
mixture is ready for combustion.
57
25-03-2013 14:49:28
 Teacher’s book
During the combustion stroke the fuel-air
mixture is 14 ignited/set on fire by a spark.
The mixture immediately explodes and the
hot 15 expanding gases which are produced
in the combustion process push the piston
16 down. Then the exhaust valve opens in
the combustion chamber and, as the piston
moves up again, it pushes the 17 exhaust/
waste gases out of the cylinder. This is the
exhaust stroke. Then the piston goes down
and the process starts again with the
18 intake stroke.
Ex 8 Fill in the missing words to complete
the text about the four-stroke diesel
engine.
The four-stroke diesel engine has exhaust
and air-intake 1 valves. It needs 2 two
revolutions of the crankshaft to carry out a
3 power stroke in all the cylinders. A cycle
begins with the intake stroke, when the
piston moves down and 4 intakes air into
the cylinder. Then the piston 5 goes up and
compresses the air. During the compression
stroke, the 6 temperature of the air rises to
about 900°F (480°C). When the fuel oil is
7 injected into the cylinder by the fuel-
injector, it mixes with the hot air and
8 burns explosively. The gases produced by
the combustion of the fuel 9 push the
piston down for the power 10 stroke. In
the exhaust stroke, the piston moves
11 up again, and forces the burned gases
12 out of the cylinder.
Ex 10 Answer the questions.
1 A two-stroke engine executes two piston
strokes to complete a thermal cycle.
2 There are no valves in a two-stroke
engine, they only have ports.
3 The main disadvantage of two-stroke
petrol engines is that during scavenging
some unburned/unused fuel mixture is lost
because it is discharged with the exhaust
gases.
4 Two-stroke petrol engines are only
applied to small motorcycles.
5 Two-stroke diesel engines are used for
driving industrial machinery and for ship
propulsion.
6 No fuel is lost during scavenging because
diesel engines only compress air, not a fuel-
air mixture like petrol engines.
Ex 11 Check how much you have learned
about the two types of piston engines,
58
02_KeysExercises.indd 58
and decide which of the following
sentences refer to the petrol engine and
which refer to the diesel engine.
1 P.E.
2 D.E.
3 P.E.
4 P.E.
5 D.E.
6 P.E.
7 D.E.
8 D.E.
9 P.E.
10 D.E.
Ex 12 Choose the correct statements
among the ones below.
1a, 2b, 3a, 4b, 5a, 6a
Ex 13 Listen and complete the text.
The marine diesel engine
There are two 1 types of marine diesel
engine: the slow speed diesel engine, and
the medium speed diesel engine. 2 Large
diesel engines, which have cylinders nearly
3 feet in diameter, turn at the relatively
3 slow speed of about 200 rpm. They are
known as slow speed diesel engines and
can be connected to the 4 propeller
without reduction gears. Although
5 higher power could be produced by
higher revolutions, this would reduce the
6 efficiency of the propeller, because a
propeller is more efficient the larger it is
and the 7 slower it runs. In fact, a
propeller is not effective 8 above 200 rpm.
These large slow running diesel engines
are traditionally used in 9 larger merchant
ships, particularly bulk-carriers and tankers,
because of their low fuel consumption.
Medium speed diesel engines operate
between 10 400 and 600 rpm; therefore,
they are connected to the propeller by
reduction gears. Once the use of this type
of engine was restricted to the 11 smaller
cargo ships, but nowadays it is also used in
large ships such as 12 tankers and 13 bulk
carriers. This is thanks to its small size,
which reduces the space and weight of the
engine. The power output of the engine is
expressed as brake horsepower (BHP),
which may also be expressed in
14 kilowatts. In the case of diesel
engines, effective horsepower is the
power developed by the piston in the
cylinder.
25-03-2013 14:49:28

Project Work
1. Use this link http://www.brighthub.com/
engineering/marine/articles/66033.aspx
to find out the answers to the questions.
a For the generation of electricity on
board.
b All the watch keeping engineers in their
duty hours.
c After 250 running hours.
d Every 1,000 hours routine/running.
2. Now complete the table showing the
daily checks made on the engine.
DAILY CHECKS ON THE ENGINE
Check levels of:
1 fuel in the service tank
2 lube oil in the engine sump
3 lube oil in the governor
Check pressure of:
1 lube oil
2 water
Check temperature of:
1 exhaust gases
2 cooling water
3 lube oil inlet
Drain:
1 the service and settling tank of any water
2 the condensate from the scavenge manifold
and the air coolers
Lubricate:
1 the fuel racks
2 linkages
3 fuel pump rack operating gear
Unit 29
Turbine engines
Ex 1 Rewrite the following statements,
using either because or since. Follow the
examples.
Ex: a Since they can ensure high which is 2 compressed so that its volume is
manoeuvrability and speed, gas reduced while its pressure is increased. In
turbines maintain a prime position for this way, the air 3 temperature rises greatly.
the propulsion of naval vessels.
b Gas turbines have a prime position in
the propulsion of naval vessels because
they can ensure high manoeuvrability
and speed.
1 a Since turbine engines consume more chamber, the fuel 6 burns. The expanding
fuel than diesel engines, they are more gases produced in combustion then enter
expensive to run.
02_KeysExercises.indd 59
key to unit exercises
b Turbine engines are more expensive to
run because they consume more fuel.
2 a Since they are subjected to very high
pressures and speeds, turbine rotors
and blades are made of special alloys.
b Turbine rotors and blades are made of
special alloys because they are subjected
to very high pressures and speeds.
3 a Since they run at very high speeds,
turbine rotors are connected to propeller
shafts by double reduction gears.
b Turbine rotors are connected to
propeller shafts by double reduction gears
because they run at very high speeds.
4 a Since turbines are one-way engines, a
separate turbine is required to go
astern.
b A separate turbine is required to go
astern because turbines are one-way
engines.
5 a Since their application to ship
propulsion generates technical and
economical problems, turbine engines
have disappeared as propelling engines
on board commercial ships.
b Turbine engines have disappeared as
propelling engines on board commercial
ships because their application to ship
propulsion generates technical and
economical problems.
6 a Since turbines are able to produce
great power, they are used in many
industrial plants, such as electric power
stations.
b Turbines are used in many industrial
plants, such as electric power stations
because they are able to produce great
power.
Ex 2 Listen and complete the text.
The compressor 1 intakes atmospheric air,
Then, the hot compressed air 4 flows into
the combustion chamber, where the fuel is
injected in the form of very minute
droplets by a 5 fuel injector. As the stream
of compressed air enters the combustion
the turbine. Here the 7 hot gases expand
59
25-03-2013 14:49:28
 Teacher’s book
as they set the rotor blades in motion, and
their 8 heat energy is converted into
mechanical power by the 9 moving blades.
The rotating blades drive the rotor
10 shaft. A part of the mechanical 11 power
developed in the turbine is used to run the
12 compressor, which is mounted on the
same axis; the remaining power is
transmitted to the propeller shaft through
double 13 reduction gears.
The working cycle of the gas turbine
engine is similar to that of the 14 four-
stroke diesel engine. In both engine cycles
there is induction, compression,
combustion and 15 exhaust as long as the
engine is running. The main difference is
that these steps follow one another at
given intervals of time in each 16 cylinder
of a diesel engine, while they occur
continuously in the different 17 parts of a
gas turbine. In fact, the turbine engine
eliminates the three 18 idle strokes and
enables more fuel to be burnt in a shorter
time; for this reason it produces a greater
power 19 output for a given size of engine.
Ex 3 Now cover the text and answer the
questions below; you can use the drawing
to help you.
1 Turbines are used in many industrial
plants, such as electric power stations, and
only a few are found on board ship. Gas
turbines are used in many naval vessels, in
some container ships and fast ferries.
2 As they are very expensive to run, in the
last decades most turbine engines have
been replaced by diesel engines. In fact,
diesel engines have been improved and
they can provide greater power nowadays
than they did in the seventies, consuming
less fuel than turbines.
3 The compressor, the combustion chamber
and the turbine.
4 A compressor draws and compresses
atmospheric air.
5 Because the air pressure is increased.
6 From the compressor, the compressed air
goes into the combustion chamber.
7 In a gas turbine, combustion occurs as
soon as the injected fuel comes into
contact with the hot compressed air.
8 Useful power is produced in the rotor
blades, where the heat energy of the hot
gases is converted into mechanical power
by the moving blades.
60
02_KeysExercises.indd 60
9 In both engines there is a four-step
working cycle, but the steps occur at the
same time in the different parts of a gas
turbine, while they occur one after the
other in the cylinders of a diesel engine.
10 The gas turbine engine eliminates three
idle strokes, because combustion occurs
continuously.
Ex 4 Complete the summary with the
missing words.
Air is 1 drawn from the atmosphere and
2 compressed in the compressor. Then the
compressed air 3 enters the combustion
chamber, where a jet of fuel is
continuously injected, therefore 4
combustion takes place continuously. The
5 expanding gases produced in combustion
are 6 directed against the turbine blades.
The blades start rotating and turn a shaft
which operates the 7 compressor. Some of
the mechanical power produced by the
8 turbine is used to drive the compressor.
The remaining mechanical energy can be
used for useful work.
Ex 5 Study the flow chart and use some of
the words to complete the text.
A gas turbine engine provides thrust by
increasing the air kinetic energy, or air
velocity. The air velocity is increased as the
airflow passes through the engine and
receives different kinds of energy. First of
all, the air 1 kinetic energy is increased in
the compressor, by means of increased
2 pressure energy. Then 3 heat energy is
added, generated through the combustion
of air and an atomised fuel. The heat
energy of the hot gases is converted back
to 4 kinetic energy by the blades in the
turbine rotor. Forward thrust results from
the rearward ejection of a high velocity
efflux of gases from the output shaft.
Ex 6 Answer the questions.
1 Hydraulic impulse turbines are based on
the same principle as the water wheel:
they rotate in the same direction as the
water current.
2 Reaction turbines are based on the
working principle of the windmill.
3 They rotate in the direction opposite to
the water flow, just as the sails of a windmill
rotate in the direction opposite to the wind.
4 Lester Allen Pelton, an American
engineer, in the middle of the 19th century.
5 James Francis, a British engineer.
25-03-2013 14:49:28

Ex 7 Answer the questions.
1 The first steam turbine engines were
built by Charles Parson and Gustave De
Laval.
2 A steam turbine essentially consists of a
stationary element called a steam
distributor, and of a rotary element called
a rotor.
3 Steam enters the turbine through the
steam distributor or through the stationary
blades.
4 The steam distributor transforms the
steam heat energy into kinetic energy,
because steam expands (totally or partially)
in this part of the turbine.
5 In the distributor.
6 In the moving or “rotor” blades.
7 The steam distributor of impulse turbines
is called a “nozzle”.
8 In reaction turbines there are no nozzles,
because steam enters the engine and
expands through the stationary blades.
They operate/act as a steam distributor.
Ex 8 Mark the following statements as
True or False and correct the false ones.
1F–2F–3F–4T–5F–6T–7F–8T–
9 T – 10 F – 11 F – 12 T
1 A steam turbine is an external
combustion engine.
2 Charles Parson built the first reaction
turbine.
3 Impulse turbines have alternate rows of
nozzles and moving blades.
5 The steam flow enters the turbine
through the stationary parts of the
engine.
7 As steam expands, its velocity is
increased.
10 In reaction turbines, steam expands
partially in the moving blades.
11 In impulse turbines, steam pressure is
reduced in the nozzles.
Ex 9 Explain the differences in their
construction by looking at the diagrams
and filling in the gaps in the following
passage.
The impulse turbine has a steam distributor
called a 1 nozzle, which deflects the steam
flow onto a row of 2 moving/rotor blades.
In the impulse turbine, steam expands in
the nozzle, where steam 3 pressure is
reduced but its 4 velocity is increased.
The reaction turbine has both 5 fixed
02_KeysExercises.indd 61
key to unit exercises
(stationary) and moving blades. The fixed
blades deflect the steam 6 flow onto the
moving blades. In this kind of turbine
steam expands in both sets of 7 blades.
Ex 10 After reading the next passage,
study the picture showing a steam
propulsion unit, and identify the parts of
the engine listed below. Then compare the
picture to the photograph that shows a
similar power unit.
1 steam inlet to HP turbine
2 HP turbine
3 pipeline between HP and LP turbine
4 LP turbine
5 reduction gearing
6 condenser
Ex 11 Fill in the gaps in the following table
referring to the Tosi propulsion unit.
A B
Construction period 1970s
Number of container ships using the Tosi unit 8
Total power output of HP and LP turbines 28,500 W
Ship’s maximum velocity 26 knots
Propeller rotation with a Tosi unit 120 rpm
Boilers produce 62 t/h
Boiler pressure 61.4 bar
Boiler temperature 513°
Ex 12 Before you take a look at the world’s
only turbine-driven car (Batman’s car!),
revise what you remember about the
advantages of a turbine engine by
choosing the correct alternative.
Advantages of a turbine engine:
1 They have a greater power output.
2 They need very little maintenance.
3 They use less lubricating oil than diesel
engines.
Project Work
Have you heard of the Batmobile? Bruce
Wayne (Batman) used to drive a turbine-
powered Batmobile! Use this link to see an
actual working version of the Batmobile
and then see if the inventor states the
same advantages for his Batmobile,
completing the missing information in the
table.
http://www.toddcooperider.com/the-
worlds-only-turbine-powered-batmobile-
by-putsch-racing/
61
25-03-2013 14:49:29
 Teacher’s book
Batmobile
Power output 365hp (compared to a Dodge Viper sportscar)*
Maintenance Less than a normal car.
Lubricating oil Oil lasts longer than in a normal piston engine.
*If you are interested use this link to find out the top speed of a
Dodge Viper: http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Dodge_Viper
Top speed: 296km/h
The Batmobile uses a Drone Attack
helicopter engine.
Who pilots the Drone Attack helicopter?
Nobody, it is unmanned.
Unit 30
The inert gas system
Ex 1 Answer the questions.
1 An “inert gas” is a gas which does not
allow a chemical reaction to take place.
2 Carbon dioxide, nitrogen and other
combustion gases containing less than 8%
of oxygen are inert gases.
3 Above 8%. A percentage of oxygen
below 8% is unable to feed the
combustion process.
Ex 2 Answer the questions.
1 The main danger on board crude oil
tankers is the danger of accidental fires
and explosions.
2 Crude oil and petroleum products release
hydrocarbon vapours.
3 When these hydrocarbon vapours are
mixed with air, they form an explosive
mixture.
4 If a static discharge is accidentally released,
the air and vapour mixture can catch fire.
5 The SOLAS convention, in Chapter II.
6 The safest method for avoiding
accidental fires and explosions in crude oil
cargo tanks consists in replacing the
atmospheric air in these tanks with inert
gas. This contains such a low percentage of
oxygen that combustion is impossible.
7 Because an oxygen percentage below 8%
does not allow a combustion process to
take place.
8 Inert gas is produced in special plants on
board ship.
9 It is obtained from the treatment of
exhaust gases from a complete combustion
of hydrocarbons.
10 The gas produced in these generating
62
02_KeysExercises.indd 62
plants must be the purest possible
compound of nitrogen and carbon
dioxide.
Ex 3 Try to put these scrambled sentences
in the correct order to make up a
paragraph about inert gases.
1c, 2g, 3a, 4e, 5f, 6b, 7d
The main danger on board oil tankers and
chemical carriers is the eventuality of
accidental fires and explosions in the cargo
tanks.
Crude oil and petroleum by-products
release hydrocarbon vapours which can
easily catch fire when they are mixed with
air.
For example, they can be set on fire by an
accidental static discharge.
The safest method for avoiding accidental
fires and explosions in crude oil cargo
tanks is to replace the atmospheric air in
these tanks with inert gas.
While atmospheric air contains a
percentage of oxygen around 20%, the
inert gas used to fill the cargo tanks
contains an oxygen percentage around
5%.
This is too little oxygen to feed a
combustion process.
This inert gas, produced in special
generating plants on board ship, is
obtained from the treatment of exhaust
gases and must contain mainly nitrogen
and carbon dioxide.
Ex 4 Answer the questions.
1 The main uses of inert gas are to prevent
explosions and fires and also to fight
corrosion and oxidation of certain goods.
2 Inert gas is used in the pharmaceutical
and food industries, it can be also found in
the steel and aluminium furnaces of the
engineering industries, and it is used in the
refineries and chemical/petrochemical
factories.
3 Bulk carriers and chemical carriers.
4 Ships which carry flammable cargoes: oil
tankers, OBO ships, gas and chemical
carriers.
5 The oxygen percentage of the inert gas
on board chemical and gas carriers is 0.5%.
This oxygen percentage is lower than that
required for oil tankers because they carry
a lighter and more volatile type of
hydrocarbon.
25-03-2013 14:49:29

6 Because they need to use an inert gas
saturated with water vapour.
Ex 5 Complete the following sentences
after reading paragraph 3.
1 Inert gas is also used against corrosion
and cargo oxidation.
2 It is used in different types of industrial
plants which produce flammable products,
for example, in oil refineries and in the
chemical industry.
3 It can be found on board ships which
carry goods that can be oxidised on contact
with the air.
4 It is obligatory for ships which carry
inflammable cargoes, like crude oil tankers
and chemical carriers.
5 The oxygen percentage can range
between 0.5% (chemical and gas carriers) to
5% (oil tankers).
6 The humidity value can vary:
dehumidified gas for chemical and gas
carries, saturated with water vapour for oil
tankers and OBO carriers.
Ex 6 Complete the following notes about
the main purposes of inert gas.
1 Replace the air in cargo tanks to make
the atmosphere inert.
2 Keep the cargo space under pressure, so
that oxygen cannot enter the tanks during
the unloading operations.
3 Clean and keep out inflammable gases
from pipelines and tanks.
4 Cleaning the cargo tanks atmosphere
before ventilation with fresh air, to allow
inspection and maintenance work to be
carried out.
Ex 7 Answer the questions.
1 In the scrubbing tower the exhaust gases
pass under jets of seawater, which cool
them down and remove the nitrous and
sulphur oxides.
2 Since the gases are saturated with water
vapour when they leave the tower, they
pass through special demister filters, which
absorb the water moisture.
3 The compressor compresses the gases to
the desired pressure.
4 The oxygen analyser continuously
controls the oxygen content of the gas. It
is often connected to audible and visual
alarms, which are activated when the
oxygen level rises above the desired
value.
02_KeysExercises.indd 63
key to unit exercises
5 The deck water seal prevents any back
flow of hydrocarbon gases into the system
when this is not in operation.
6 When the system is not in operation,
seawater rises through the gas inlet,
preventing any back-flow of cargo gases
into the system.
7 The pressure-vacuum breaker regulates
the inert gas pressure in the system so that
it is maintained constant.
8 When the gas pressure is too high, the
water mixture in the cylinder rises up and
forces the excess gas out into the
atmosphere.
Project Work
1. Use this link http://www.aalborg-
industries.com/business_areas/inert.php
to find the answers to the following
questions.
1 An inert gas is defined as an inactive gas.
2 A gas or a mixture of gases, such as flue
gas, which contain insufficient oxygen to
support the combustion of hydrocarbons.
3 Flue gas is another definition for exhaust
gases.
4 Heat, fuel and oxygen.
5 Take away one of the elements in the
fire triangle.
6 Reducing the oxygen content in a tank to
below 8% by addition of inert gas.
2. Now watch the Inert Gas System
animation movie:
http://www.aalborg-industries.com/press_
room/showroom.php?path=film_IGS
and try to recognise the main parts of the
system that you have studied in this unit.
1 Five.
2 Scrubber unit, inert gas fans, deck water
seal unit, cargo tank, P/V breaker.
3 It is cylindrical.
4 From bottom left.
5 From top right.
6 Next it goes to the fans.
7 They give pressure to the gas.
8 To prevent back flow from the cargo
tanks side.
9 At the top, above the cargo level, to fill
in any empty space between the cargo and
the top of the tank, so that no
hydrocarbon vapours can go up.
10 It prevents over pressure and over
vacuum in cargo tanks.
63
25-03-2013 14:49:29
 Teacher’s book
Unit 31
The GMDSS
Ex 1 Answer the questions.
1 It was introduced in 1988.
2 It became fully operational in 1999.
3 The GMDSS makes use of satellite
communication systems and terrestrial
radio systems.
4 It is called a global system because it
operates everywhere in the world.
5 Ships nearby and land-based
communication and rescue stations.
6 MRCC are Maritime Rescue and
Coordination Centres.
Ex 2 Reorder the sentences given in
scrambled order describing what happens
when a distress call is sent.
1d, 2a, 3c, 4e, 5b
Ex 3 Match each acronym with its
meaning.
1e, 2d, 3f, 4g, 5h, 6c, 7b, 8a
Ex 4 Mark the following statements as
True or False and correct the false ones.
1F–2T–3F–4F–5F–6T–7T–8F
1 GMDSS is obligatory for vessels over 300
Gross Tonnes.
3 Vessels over 500 GT must carry 2 SARTs.
4 Two sets of portable VHF transceivers
must be carried on survival craft under
500GT.
5 Radio installations need to transmit on
different frequencies.
8 An EPIRB is an Emergency Position
Indicating Radio Beacon.
Ex 5 Listen to complete the information.
In the GMDSS, Digital 1 Selective Calling
(DSC) is used to automate the transmission
and 2 reception of distress alerts sent via
terrestrial Medium, 3 High and Very High
Frequency (MF, HF and 4 VHF) radio. A
DSC alert is normally followed by
radiotelephone 5 communications between
the vessel in distress and coast stations or
other 6 ships which have received the call.
The DSC transmitter-receiver automatically
includes in every message the identity with
the 7 MMSI number of the calling ship.
The DSC unit stores 8 four different types
of message according to their level of
priority. These may be distress, 9 urgency,
safety or routine calls. At the coast station,
ship-to-shore distress calls receive priority
64
02_KeysExercises.indd 64
handling and are routed to the nearest
Rescue Coordination Centre (RCC). On
board ship, DSC receivers sound an
10 alarm when a distress call is received.
Ex 6 Match each phrase on the left with a
phrase on the right to make complete
sentences.
1h, 2e, 3j, 4i, 5c, 6l, 7a, 8f, 9d, 10b, 11k,12g
Ex 7 Choose the correct option.
1a, 2c, 3a, 4c, 5b
Ex 8 Complete the table about ships’ radio
equipment with the information taken
from the following paragraph 6.
Sea areas Distance from the coast
Sea Area A1 20-30 nautical miles
Sea Area A2 100-150 nautical miles
Sea area A3 over 150 miles
Sea Area A4 outside areas A1, A2, A3 (polar regions)
Within range of radio Radio equipment required
station coverage on board
VHF coast station VHF radio installation
MF coast station VHF and MF radio installation
MF/HF coast station, VHF and MF/HF radio installation,
Inmarsat land station Inmarsat Earth station and NBDP
HF coast station VHF, MF, HF radio installation,
and NBDP
Project Work
1. See what the NAVTEX receiver looks
like. Read the information regarding the
Real Features and answer the following
questions:
a An international service of telegraphy.
b Warnings, weather reports and MSI.
c 518KHz.
2. See what the Inmarsat C system looks
like. Read the information regarding the
“Features of the real system” and answer
the following questions:
a Two-way data communications anywhere
in the world.
b It is designed to be simple, small and
low-cost.
c About 40.
3. See what the EPIRB looks like. Read the
information regarding how it works and
complete the sentences with the missing
words.
a In an emergency, the radio beacon EPIRB
is activated 1 manually or 2 automatically.
25-03-2013 14:49:29

b The EPIRB transmits an 3 “emergency
code” and activates the strobe (flash)
indicating that it is operating.
c The signal is received by a COPAS-SARSAT
4 satellite and sent to the nearest
5 station.
d The station computes the 6 location of
the EPIRB and decodes the 7 identification
code.
e The rescue station uses the identification
code to determine the 8 type of vessel, its
owner, 9 size, and emergency contacts.
10 Rescue Centers are contacted and
alerted to start the rescue operation.
f 11 SAR agencies locate the EPIRB using
the accurate 12 position information, the
13 121.5 MHz signal and the 14 strobe light
emitted from the beacon EPIRB.
Unit 32
Integrated navigation
Ex 1 Answer the questions.
1 The IBS is the Integrated Bridge
System.
2 The various electronic instruments on
board ship are connected in a computer
network.
3 It collects, processes, integrates incoming
information and distributes it back to all
components of the system.
4 On the display at the primary navigation
workstation.
5 So that in the case of failure, instruments
may still be operated separately.
Ex 2 Match each term with its definition.
1g, 2f, 3a, 4b, 5e, 6c, 7d
Ex 3 Reorder the following sentences.
1c, 2e, 3a, 4d, 5b
Ex 4 Mark the following statements as
True or False, underline and correct the
mistakes in the false ones.
1T–2F–3F–4T–5F–6F
2 The automatic pilot receives the ship’s
position from the gyrocompass.
3 An alarm is activated when the ship
deviates from the planned track.
5 Wind and sea currents set the ship off
track very often.
6 A hydraulic mechanism connects the ATP
to the ship’s rudder.
02_KeysExercises.indd 65
key to unit exercises
Ex 5 Match each phrase on the left with a
phrase on the right to make complete
sentences.
1d, 2c, 3e, 4a, 5b
Ex 6 See what the following equipment is
used for and note down its function.
NAVTEX – Automatic receiver and recorder
for navigational and meteorological warning
purpose
Speed log – Speed and distance indicator
Automatic pilot – Automatic track-keeping
system
Echo sounding equipment – Depth water
indicators with adjustment controls
Anemometer – Wind direction and velocity
indicator
GPS – Position fixing electronic systems
Gyro and magnetic compass – Heading
indicators
Ex 7 Match each kind of equipment with
its function.
1b, 2c, 3a
Ex 8 There are several mistakes in the
following description of the BNWAS.
Underline the mistakes, then listen and
correct them.
A Bridge Navigational Watch Alarm System
(BNWAS) is a series of audible and visual
alarms. The ship’s main navigational
sensors are connected to the alarm system.
In the case of danger to navigation the
alarm system alerts the OOW. The OOW
must always acknowledge the alarm by
silencing sound alarms, setting visual alarms
to steady and obviously doing something to
put the problem right.
If the OOW does not reply to the alarm,
then the Captain or another OOW is
alerted. The BNWAS also allows the OOW
to call for immediate help.
Ex 9 Answer the questions.
1 Close to the forward centre window of
the bridge.
2 So that they can perform their main tasks
and avoid any collisions.
3 Its manoeuvring state.
4 Rudder angle, propeller revolutions,
engine revolutions and bow-thruster
blades direction and pitch.
5 To steer the ship according to the
direction and speed required.
Ex 10 Fill in the gaps.
1 ECDIS stands for Electronic Chart Display
and Information System.
2 ENCs are Electronic Navigational Charts.
65
25-03-2013 14:49:29
 Teacher’s book
3 The ECDIS will become mandatory on
international voyages between 2012 and
2018.
4 Official ENCs are produced by
Hydrographic Offices.
5 S-57/3 is the Standard regulating content,
structure and format of ENCs.
6 Scanned versions of paper charts are
called “Raster Charts”.
7 The official ENC format is a vector
format.
8 Vector charts are formed of many
different “layers”.
9 Vector charts provide many additional
details like depth and navigational details.
10 Using ECDIS is completely different from
using paper charts.
Ex 11 Listen and fill in the gaps to learn
how the navigator should proceed.
How to plan a route on an ECDIS
1 Before commencing a passage 1 plan the
navigator must firstly ensure that the
vessel has all the ENC charts (called cells)
needed for the 2 voyage, and secondly
that these are up to date with the 3 latest
corrections that are supplied, either by CD
ROM or via an 4 Internet connection.
2 The next thing that the navigator needs
to do is to enter his ship’s 5 draft into the
ECDIS and establish the safety contour
based on draft and the required Under
6 Keel Clearance (UKC).
Since most ENC have pre-set contour data,
typically at 5 m intervals, if your vessel has
a draft of 7 6 m the display will default to
the next 8 deepest contour of 10 m. All
areas of less than 10 m will be shown as
9 blue and areas deeper than 10 m will be
displayed as 10 white. As long as the ship
remains in the white area, she is safe.
3 In addition to the safety contour, for
your ship’s draft of 6 m you can set a
safety 11 depth of 8 m.
In this case, if the navigator sets the ECDIS
to display depths, then all depths of 12 less
than 8 m will show in bold type and those
deeper than 8 m will be a pale 13 grey.
This means that a depth of 9 m – although
within the 10 m blue safety contour – will be
14 displayed in pale grey text, while a depth
of 7 m will be displayed in bold black.
4 After that, the navigator has to 15 input
the parameters for beam clearance and set
up a safety domain. The ECDIS allows users
to specify a safety domain for the vessel,
66
02_KeysExercises.indd 66
contained by the following parameters:
in 16 depth, by the safety contour and
safety depth;
in forward extent, by the look-ahead
time or look-ahead range;
in lateral closeness by a specified 17
distance.
Once the safety parameters are set, the
ECDIS will trigger 18 alarms any time the
ship crosses the safety domain.
Ex 12 Before we go on listening, check
your answers and put the first five steps
in planning a route in the correct order.
1d, 2e, 3b, 4c, 5a
Now go on listening.
5 After the vessel’s dynamic parameters have
been set, the passage plan can be created.
By putting in the departure and arrival
points, the ECDIS can instantaneously offer
a Great Circle or Rhumb line route or a
combination of both. The ECDIS will
identify any obstructions along the route
and alert the navigator to charted features
such as traffic separation zones, restricted
areas, anchorages, etc. It will also alert the
navigator to any parts of the plan that are
outside the safety domain parameters. The
navigator can then move the waypoints
(points where the ship changes direction
along the track), and re-check the outline
route.
6 Once the outline passage has been
established, it is then essential to check the
whole route in detail using the zooming
and scrolling facilities. This process must be
done with extreme care, because many
chart features such as submarine cables are
hidden on the different layers of the ENC.
Also, essential detailed information, such
as notes referring to precautionary areas,
needs to be accessed and analysed for
relevance, by means of clicking on the !
symbol to obtain the “pick report” relating
to the feature. This pick report is one of
the most essential tasks during planning
because there are some confusing new
symbols when compared to the paper
chart. Traditional symbols have been
replaced by a new symbology by default,
but the familiar object display can be set
through the menu.
7 The ECDIS calculates the course and the
distance between the WPs and plots the
course. The ship’s heading is represented
by a vector line with an arrowhead (the
25-03-2013 14:49:29

red line in the picture). The route is usually
displayed as an orange line.
8 Once the plan has been completed and
fully verified, save it on the ECDIS unit.
You can finally export the passage plan to
the primary navigation workstation. The
ECDIS alarms sound any time a waypoint
approaches, if the vessel wanders off track
the predetermined route, if it crosses the
pre-set safety domain or if it approaches a
shoal or other charted hazards.
Ex 13 Answer the following questions.
1 Your departure and arrival points.
2 Points where the ship changes direction.
3 Zooming and scrolling facilities.
4 You get a “pick report” of a feature.
5 Symbology.
6 By a vector line with an arrowhead.
7 By an orange line.
8 You save it.
Ex 14 Now put all the steps in planning a
route in the correct order. Don’t forget to
use the 5 steps from Ex 12.
1 Check that you have the necessary up-to-
date ENC charts.
2 Enter your own ship’s draft and establish
a safety contour based on your draft.
02_KeysExercises.indd 67
keys to unit exercises
3 Enter a safety depth.
4 Enter beam clearance.
5 Establish a safety domain.
6 Create your passage plan.
7 Check your whole route in detail.
8 Visualise your route.
9 Save your route and export it to the
workstation.
Project Work
Use this link to see what an AIS display
looks like and fill in the AIS data from the
tug Texan. http://www.navcen.uscg.gov/
images/WhatYouSeeWithAIS.jpg
Ship’s Name Texan
Call sign WDB4969
MMSI number 366904340
Latitude 29°20’33.95”N
Longitude 094° 49’ 36.58”W
Range 2.542 Nm
Bearing 264.8°
Nav status Under Way Engine
Length 16.0 m
Beam 8.0 m
Type of ship TUG
Hazardous cargo N/A
Time since last update 00h 01m 15s
Draft 0.0
ETA to destination N/A
67
25-03-2013 14:49:30
 Teacher’s book
Grammar – Key to exercises
1 VERBI ORDINARI
E AUSILIARI
1.1 Studia la tabella e rispondi alle domande.
• Simple present - Si aggiunge il suffisso -s
• Simple past/Past participle - Si aggiunge
il suffisso -ed
1.3 Ex 1 Coniuga i verbi tra parentesi nella
forma corretta.
1 Diesel engines do not use spark plugs
but fuel injectors.
2 Are rotary pumps faster than
centrifugal pumps?
3 Have tankers got an inert gas system on
board?
4 Cast iron is not as strong as iron.
5 Does a strain filter drain the lubricating
oil?
6 Petrol engines haven’t got fuel
injectors.
7 Does the connecting rod connect the
piston and the crankshaft?
8 The Titanic did not have a GMSS system.
9 The reciprocating steam engine is not
an internal combustion engine.
10 Has your car got a catalytic exhaust
system?
1.4 L’ordine degli elementi della frase.
Frase affermativa: soggetto – verbo –
oggetto – altri complementi
Frase negativa: soggetto – ausiliare –
NOT – verbo – oggetto – altri complementi
Frase interrogativa: ausiliare – soggetto –
verbo – oggetto
1.5 Ex 2 Correggi l’errore in ciascuna frase.
1 Pumps are divided into three types.
2 A water tube boiler has a number of
water drums.
3 Titanic was a cruise liner.
4 A centrifugal pump consists of an
impeller which rotates in a casing.
5 What does a filter do?
6 The diagrams show a lubricating oil
pump.
7 Bulk carriers carry loose cargo.
8 Oil passes through a centrifuge for
purification.
9 There are two main types of piston
engine.
10 There is a steam drum at the top of
the boiler.
68
02_KeysExercises.indd 68
1.6 Ex 3 Trova il pronome soggetto mancante
e inseriscilo nelle frasi.
1 John and Jenny are teachers, they live next
door.
2 I’m studying history. It is a boring subject!
3 My father works at the hospital. He is a
doctor.
4 Our teachers are good, but they give us a
lot of homework.
5 When Sally was at school, she played in a
football team.
6 Fossil fuels are the most common fuels,
but they are running out.
7 Steam is produced in a boiler, then it is
sent into the turbine.
8 The heat engine is a prime mover, because
it transforms heat into mechanical work.
1.7 Ex 4 Collega ciascuna question word
con la sua risposta.
A2 – B8 – C7 – D1 – E3 – F6 – G4 – H5
1.8 Adesso completa la regola.
• Quando who, what, which, how much,
how many sono i soggetti della frase
interrogativa, non richiedono l’ausiliare
do (does/did).
• Quando who, what, which, how much,
how many sono il complemento oggetto in
una domanda con un verbo ordinario,
richiedono l’ausiliare do/does/did.
Ex 5 Ricostruisci le domande nello schema
e ricordati di coniugare i verbi
accordandoli con i soggetti.
1 How many people work in the Engine
Room?
2 Which refining process separates the
hydrocarbons in petrol?
3 Who commands the ship?
4 How much steam expands in the moving
blades of a reaction turbine?
5 What causes the greenhouse effect?
Ex 6 Formula le domande per le risposte
date.
1 What do boilers produce?
2 What did Lavoisier discover?
3 Who plots the chart?
4 Who does the ship’s Captain represent?
5 Which engine uses electricity?
6 How much petrol does your car’s engine
consume?
7 How much water flows in a condenser’s
tubes?
25-03-2013 14:49:30

8 How many documents does a ship
carry?
9 How many winds blow in Europe?
10 Which car goes faster?
1.9 Ex 7 Riscrivi le frasi usando l’infinito di
scopo.
1 Henry went to Canterbury to visit the
Cathedral.
2 Jack phoned the hotel to book a room.
3 Pat is going to Italy next month to learn
Italian.
4 I stayed at home yesterday to clean my
flat.
5 Safety valves are fitted in a boiler to
allow excess steam to escape outside the
boiler.
6 Stop valves are fitted on the pipe-line
to control the passage of steam to the
engine.
7 The ship’s Captain increased speed to
arrive on time.
8 A high rate of evaporation in the boiler
is essential to generate large quantities of
steam.
2 La forma passiva
2.5 Ex 1 Completa la forma passiva delle frasi
inserendo il participio passato dei verbi
irregolari riportati nella tabella.
1 St Paul’s Cathedral was built in London
in the 17th century.
2 My computer is made in Japan.
3 Ivanhoe was written by Walter Scott.
4 Paella is made of fish, vegetables and
rice.
5 These ferries are built in Naples.
6 The two cars over there are made in
Germany.
7 Hamlet was written by William
Shakespeare.
8 This tanker was built in six months.
Ex 2 Riscrivi le frasi nella forma passiva,
eliminando i soggetti they, we che non
sono rilevanti.
1 Every engine car is checked thoroughly.
2 The bread is wrapped automatically.
3 This computer is exported to seven
different countries.
4 The thieves were arrested last night.
5 Yesterday’s meeting was cancelled.
6 The water was pumped out of the
bilge.
Ex 3 Riscrivi il paragrafo trasformando i
verbi in forma passiva.
The ship’s course must be planned before
02_KeysExercises.indd 69
grammar - key to exercises
starting the journey. All kinds of nautical
charts are studied in advance, this means
that any marked dangers are avoided.
Weather reports are also received. All this
information is collected and analysed and
the best course is chosen.
The starting and arrival points are marked
on the chart and the course is plotted.
The junction points are also planned in
advance and indicated on the chart. The
planned course is shown as a broken line.
Ex 4 Rispondi alle domande del quiz
usando la forma passiva e scegliendo la
risposta giusta tra quelle elencate.
1 It was built by Etienne Lenoir.
2 It was discovered by Alexander Fleming.
3 It is called the English Channel.
4 It was invented by the Sumerians.
5 It was built by George Stephenson.
6 It was discovered by Antoine Lavoisier.
7 It was opened in 1994.
8 It was launched in 1912.
Ex 5 Formula le domande del quiz usando
la forma passiva in base alle risposte.
Ricorda però che le risposte non sono
nella sequenza giusta.
1E – 2G – 3F – 4D – 5A – 6C – 7B
3 I verbi modali
3.4 Ex 1 Completa le frasi con can/can’t, must/
mustn’t, could/couldn’t.
1 You mustn’t cross the street when the
light is red.
2 I can’t come right now, I must do the
washing up.
3 In Italy you can get a divorce now, you
couldn’t till 1970.
4 You can go out with your friends but
you must be back at 10.30.
5 Yesterday it was a bright day and you
could see as far as the coast from here.
6 You can visit the museum free on
Sundays.
7 The address you wrote must be wrong:
this can’t be Lucy’s house!
8 There is a new tax: you must pay to get
into Venice!
Ex 2 Completa le frasi con may, might,
should/shouldn’t.
1 If the train is late, George might not
arrive in time.
2 What should I do to lose weight? You
shouldn’t eat so much spaghetti!
3 The weather forecast says that it may/
might snow in the night.
69
25-03-2013 14:49:30
 Teacher’s book
4 Don’t skate on that lake. The ice might/
may break.
5 You shouldn’t go out in this weather.
6 Do you think Liza will pass her driving
test? She might/may pass, but she still
can’t drive very well.
7 You should visit the British Museum
when you go to London.
8 My nephew enjoys maths. He may study
engineering at university.
Ex 3 Ciascuna delle frasi contiene un
errore. Trovalo e correggilo.
1 The new cruise ship should be ready by
next June.
2 Excuse me, may I close the window?
3 They should work harder.
4 You must not forget to learn new
vocabulary.
5 Concorde can fly at the speed of
sound.
6 I might go to France on holiday next
year (Togliere “definitely” che esprime
una certezza)
7 Would you like a cup of coffee?
8 Work on the new model will begin next
week.
9 You mustn’t walk on that bridge. It’s not
safe.
10 Before operating the machinery, you
should/must check the pressure level.
4 SOSTANTIVI NUMERABILI
E NON NUMERABILI
4.4 Ex.1 Classifica i sostantivi in countables o
in uncountables.
Countable nouns Uncountable nouns
car steel
mobile phone oil
computer petroleum
ship equipment
plane oxygen
condenser information
pipeline gas
tanker coffee
5 USO DEGLI ARTICOLI
5.3 Ex 1 Completa le frasi inserendo gli
articoli mancanti a, an, the. Ricorda però
che in alcuni casi in inglese non si usa
nessun articolo.
1 The new student’s name is Carlo.
2 Is there a language laboratory in your
school?
3 I like rock music but I hate disco
music.
70
02_KeysExercises.indd 70
4 I haven’t got a pen. Can I use a pencil?
5 Have you got a piano? No, I can’t play
the piano.
6 The sun comes up in the east and goes
down in the west.
7 I have lessons in the morning and in the
afternoon.
8 Sarah’s dog is horrible.
9 Can’t you see Doctor Brown? He’s next
to Mrs Robinson.
10 Are you interested in football?
Ex 2 Inserisci gli articoli mancanti a, an,
the nelle frasi. Ricorda che in alcuni casi
in inglese non si usa nessun articolo.
1 Colliers are designed to carry coal. The
coal is carried in bulk.
2 There was oil floating on the water.
3 There is a container ship in the port.
4 Cagliari is the most important port in
Sardinia.
5 An electric motor operates the bilge
pump.
6 There were cadets on board.
7 An oil tanker is a ship which carries
crude oil.
8 The Titanic was the largest cruise ship of
her time.
Ex 3 Ricorda l’uso dell’articolo
determinativo the con i nomi geografici
e collega i nomi della colonna di destra
con quelli di sinistra, come nell’esempio.
1 The Isle of Wight is in the English
Channel.
2 The Shetland Isles are in the North Sea.
3 The Rocky Mountains are in the USA.
4 Ben Nevis is in Scotland.
5 The Falkland Isles are in the Atlantic
Ocean.
6 Samoa is in the Pacific Ocean.
7 Sardinia is in the Tirrenian Sea.
8 Lake Victoria is in Africa.
9 The Thames is in England.
10 Wales is in Great Britain.
11 Mount Everest is in Nepal.
6 Avverbi derivati dagli
aggettivi
Ex 1 Completa lo schema scrivendo
accanto agli aggettivi la forma corretta
degli avverbi.
slow slowly fair fairly
beautiful beautifully easy easily
angry angrily quick quickly
immediate immediately cheap cheaply
sad sadly
25-03-2013 14:49:30

Ex 2 Aggettivo o avverbio? Inserisci gli
aggettivi o gli avverbi.
1 The journey was very slow.
2 We travelled slowly in the fog.
3 Harris is a careful driver.
4 He drives his car very carefully.
5 The test was easy.
6 Jane passed the exam easily.
7 Grrr! I’m angry!
8 Jane spoke angrily to her sister this
morning.
9 Be quiet!
10 Jane went quietly upstairs when she
heard a strange noise.
7 I PRONOMI RELATIVI
7.3 Ex 1 Sostituisci nelle frasi that con i
pronomi who o which.
1 What’s the name of the village which is
over there?
2 My family prefer to have friends who
come from our hometown.
3 The colibri is a small bird which weighs
two grams.
4 The girl who opened the shop is Joan.
5 Who’s got an umbrella which opens
automatically?
6 I know a man who can’t drink beer.
Ex 2 Completa le frasi con il pronome
relativo soltanto quando è obbligatorio.
1 The book I bought for you is in this
parcel.
2 Here are the pens you lost this
morning.
3 We have a compass that alway points
south.
4 These are the teachers we saw at
school.
5 They like clothes which/that are very big
for them.
6 He met the people who stayed at this
hotel.
7 The film we saw last night was very
funny.
8 The photos your sister took are very
good.
8 Gli aggettivi
qualificativi e i gradi
dell’aggettivo e
dell’avverbio
8.2 In cosa differiscono gli aggettivi e gli
avverbi presenti nelle colonne A e B?
• Prendono il suffisso in -er gli aggettivi e
avverbi monosillabici.
02_KeysExercises.indd 71
grammar - key to exercises
 li aggettivi e avverbi che sono
•G
polisillabici si fanno precedere
da more.
8.7 Ex 1 Alcuni tra gli aggettivi inglesi più
comuni prendono i suffissi per formare
il comparativo e il superlativo di
maggioranza. Completa la tabella.
Comparative Superlative
fat fatter than the fattest of all
nice nicer than the nicest of all
small smaller the smallest
large larger the largest
light lighter the lightest
heavy heavier the heaviest
thin thinner the thinnest
quick quicker the quickest
slow slower the slowest
big bigger the biggest
good better the best
bad worse the worst
high higher the highest
low lower the lowest
Ex 2 Forma il comparativo e il superlativo
di maggioranza di questi aggettivi.
Comparative Superlative
difficult more difficult the most
difficult
expensive more the most
expensive expensive
careful more careful the most
careful
clever more clever the most
clever
intelligent more the most
intelligent intelligent
fashionable more the most
fashionable fashionable
modern more modern the most
modern
Ex 3 Riscrivi le frasi in modo tale che il
secondo termine di paragone introdotto
da than risulti a inizio frase, senza però
cambiare il senso della frase; devi perciò
sostituire gli aggettivi presenti con
aggettivi di opposto significato.
1 A statute mile is shorter than a nautical
mile.
2 England is cooler than Sardinia.
3 Petrol engines are more expensive to run
than diesel engines.
4 A jumbo jet is slower than Concorde.
5 Petrol is lighter than diesel fuel.
6 Ferries are usually smaller than
tankers.
71
25-03-2013 14:49:30
 Teacher’s book
Ex 4 Riscrivi le frasi usando not so/as ...
as, senza però cambiare il senso della
frase.
1 England is not as warm as Sardinia.
2 The White Star was not as fast as the
Titanic.
3 100 °F is not as hot as 100 °C.
4 Petrol engines are not so cheap to run as
diesel engines.
5 Ben Nevis is not as high as Snowdon.
Ex 5 Scegli l’alternativa corretta.
1A ­– 2A – 3B – 4C – 5B – 6A
9 CONGIUNZIONI
9.1 Ex 1 Abbina l’inizio di ogni frase con la
conclusione corretta.
BECAUSE 1C – 2A – 3D – 4B
SO 1C – 2D – 3A – 4B
9.2 Ex 2 Riscrivi le frasi usando le
congiunzioni: both... and e either... or in
modo appropriato.
1 OBO ships carry both liquid and dry
cargo.
2 Piston pumps pump either water or low-
viscosity liquids.
3 Gear-wheel pumps are used to pump
either lubricating or fuel oils.
4 A cadet can train as either a Deck
Officer or an Engineer Officer.
5 Both piston engines and gas turbines
are internal combustion engines.
6 GMDSS uses both satellite and
conventional radio communication
systems.
7 Sailors can use either a compass or a
sextant to calculate their position.
8 IMO deals with both safety’ conventions
and Officers’ training.
9 Ship piston engines can either be
operated with diesel or heavy oil.
10 Centrifugal pumps pump either water
or liquids with solid particles in
suspension.
72
02_KeysExercises.indd 72
9.3 Ex 3 Riscrivi le coppie di frasi unendole
con le congiunzioni suggerite.
1 Since/as diesel engines have to contain
higher pressures than petrol engines, they
are stronger than petrol engines.
2 Combustion engines make use of
thermal energy, therefore they are known
as heat engines.
3 Oil companies drill many exploration
wells, however not many of these wells
are worth developing.
4 Watt invented the first steam engine in
1765, although the first attempts at
developing the heat engine took place
around the end of the 17th century.
5 Engine types and sizes vary considerably
since/as they are designed for many
purposes.
6 Combustion occurs continuously in a
gas turbine, therefore they eliminate the
three idle strokes of the piston engine.
10 PREPOSIZIONI E AVVERBI
DI LUOGO
10.2 Ex 1 Osserva il disegno, poi completa le
istruzioni con le preposizioni mancanti.
1 You are 1 in the hold of the ship,
2 between the boxes and the rope.
2 Go 3 up the ladder on the 4 left.
You are now 5 in the cabin.
3 6 In front of you there is a sea-chest.
Open it and take 7 out the key.
4 Turn 8 right and pass 9 through the
saloon, walk 10 across the corridor and go
11 into the galley.
5 12 On the shelf there is a box. Open it
with your key and take the flag 13 out of
the box.
6 Now turn 14 left and climb 15 up the
ladder. You are now 16 on the main deck.
7 Turn left and walk 17 under the
superstructure, go and stand 18 next to
the flag-post.
25-03-2013 14:49:30
 UNIT testS

Unit tests

Class ...................... Date ................................. Student ..............................................................................................................

Unit 1 Test – The main parts of a ship

Ex 1 Complete the crossword. One definition has been inserted to help you.
1
ACROSS
2 3
2. The fore end of the ship.
5. The after end of the ship.
4 5
6. Left side of the ship.
6 7. The main body (or shell) of the ship.
8. It completely covers the hull.
7
9. The middle part of the ship.
H U L L
DOWN
1. The immersed part of the hull.
8 3. Line on the side of the ship, parallel
to the water.
9
4. The right side of the ship.

Ex 2 Write the names of the parts of a ship to label the diagram.

Item 5 has been inserted as an example.
1. ...............................................................................................
1
2. ...............................................................................................
3. ...............................................................................................
2 3
4. ...............................................................................................
4 4 4 4
5
5. Engine Room
8 6 6 E.R. 6 6 7
6. ...............................................................................................
9 9 9 9 7. ...............................................................................................
8. ...............................................................................................
9. ...............................................................................................

Ex 3 Refer to the ship diagram in Ex 2 and complete the sentences using once each
of the following words.
forward – aft – above – below – abeam – amidships
1 The bridge superstructure is ................................................................ of the forecastle.
2 Towards the bow is ................................................................. .
3 The bridge superstructure is ................................................................ the main deck.

73

03_Tests Unit.indd 73 21-03-2013 10:54:44

 teacher’s book

4 The engine room is located ................................................................ .

5 The holds are situated ................................................................ the ’tween decks.
6 When you go across the ship from side to side you go ................................................................ .

Ex 4 Underline the mistakes in the following sentences and write the corrections
on the dotted lines.
1 The hull is divided horizontally by bulkheads. ...................................................

2 In a liquid cargo ship, the hull is divided into holds. ...................................................

3 The double bottom tanks are used to contain fresh water

and ballast. ..................................................

4 The superstructure is the permanent housing below deck. ..................................................

5 The hull is divided vertically by decks. ..................................................

6 The part below the surface of the water under the waterline
is known as the upper works. ..................................................

Ex 5 Answer the questions by writing complete sentences.

1 What are the central, fore and aft parts of the hull called?
2 What is the central line?
3 What are the two sides of the ship called?
4 What is the waterline?
5 What are the names of the two parts of the hull separated by the waterline?
6 What is the cargo space divided into on dry cargo ships?

74

03_Tests Unit.indd 74 21-03-2013 10:54:44

 UNIT testS

Class ...................... Date ................................. Student ..............................................................................................................

Unit 2 Test – Ships’ measurements and specifications

Ex 1 Label the diagrams about the ship’s dimensions.

Aft perpendicular Fwd perpendicular

Midships
5

Loaded waterline 4
8
7
1 138 m
2 142 m
6
3 146 m

1 …………………………………………………….......... 5 …………………………………………………….........
2 …………………………………………………….......... 6 ……………………………………………………..........
3 ……………………………………………………......... 7 ……………………………………………………..........
4 ……………………………………………………......... 8 ……………………………………………………..........

Ex 2 Write the definitions.

1 Displacement ……………………………………………………………………………….................................................................

2 Deadweight ……………………………………………………………………………….................................................................

3 Light displacement ……………………………………………………………………………….................................................................

4 Tonnage ……………………………………………………………………………….................................................................

5 Gross tonnage ……………………………………………………………………………….................................................................

6 Net tonnage ……………………………………………………………………………….................................................................

Ex 3 Choose the correct option.

1 a. The load line indicates the legal limit to which the ship can be unloaded.
b. The plump line indicates the legal limit to which the ship can be loaded.
c. The load line indicates the legal limit to which the ship can be loaded.
2 a. A classification society issues the Load Line Certificate.
b. The ship’s master issues the Load Line Certificate.
c. The port authority issues the Load Line Certificate.
3 a. Port dues are paid on the basis of the ship’s air draught.
b. Port dues are paid on the basis of the ship’s country of registry.
c. Port dues are paid on the basis of the ship’s deadweight.
4 a. Deadweight does not refer to any unit of physical measurement.
b. Tonnage does not refer to any unit of physical measurement.
c. Displacement does not refer to any unit of physical measurement.

75

03_Tests Unit.indd 75 21-03-2013 10:54:45

 teacher’s book

5 Indicate which of the following certificates does not exist:

a. the Waterline Certificate.
b. the Tonnage Certificate.
c. the Load Line Certificate.

Ex 4 Underline the mistakes in the following sentences and write the corrections
on the dotted lines.
1 The longest dimension for measuring a ship is the length
between perpendiculars. ………………………

2 The extreme breadth is sometimes indicated as the draft. ………………………

3 The depth is the horizontal distance between keel and the main deck. ………………………

4 The freeboard is the vertical distance between

the load line and the main deck. ………………………

5 Deadline is the ship’s maximum carrying capacity. ………………………

6 Gross tonnage refers to the ship’s earning capacity. ………………………

7 If the ship needs the assistance of a pilot, she has to pay towage fees. ………………………

8 The International Tonnage Certificate is determined by an IALA formula. ………………………

Ex 5 Complete the specifications chart with the following items.

11,000 kW – 79.40 m – 1,600 t – 1,250 – 12.5 Knots – 4.00 m
Ocean Princess 3
Builder Cuthbert & Sons
Length oa …………………………………………

Breadth 13.65 m
Draft …………………………………………

DWT (Deadweight) …………………………………………

GT (Gross tonnage) …………………………………………

Main engines output …………………………………………

Service speed …………………………………………

76

03_Tests Unit.indd 76 21-03-2013 10:54:45

 UNIT testS

Class ...................... Date ................................. Student ..............................................................................................................

Unit 3 Test – Ship classification

Ex 1 Answer the questions by writing complete sentences.

1 What are merchant ships used for?
2 What are the two main categories of merchant ships?
3 What type of passenger ship is in use today?
4 What are the two main categories of cargo ships?
5 What do refrigerated ships carry?
6 On what kind of ships are grain, sugar and similar products carried?
7 What are dredgers used for?
8 What does the notation “unrestricted navigation” mean?
9 What does an OBO ship carry?
10 On what kind of ship is crude oil carried?

Ex 2 Complete the following definitions using the words given in scrambled order.
passengers – inland – small – open – variable – less than 6
– lifeboats – considerable – engine – fishing
1 Boats are ……………….................. open vessels.
2 Boats are suitable for ……………….................. navigation.
3 Boats are suitable for sailing distances ……………….................. nautical miles.
4 Boats are used for ……………….................., coastal ……………….................., water sports.
5 Ships are of a ……………….................. size.
6 Ships are propelled by an ………………....................

7 Ships are equipped to carry goods, ……………….................., vehicles on the ……………….................. sea.
8 Ships can sail ……………….................. distances from the coast.

Ex 3 Underline the mistakes in the following sentences and write

the corrections on the dotted lines.
1 Buoyancy is the ship’s capability to sink. ………………..................

2 Stability is the ship’s capability to lose her balance after being inclined. ………………..................

3 Impermeability is the ship’s capability to change her course. ………………..................

4 Sea-kindliness means that the rolling movements of the ship are fast. ………………..................

5 Variability is the ship’s ability to sail at a given speed. ………………..................

6 Seaworthy means that the ship is unsuitable for navigation. ………………..................

77

03_Tests Unit.indd 77 21-03-2013 10:54:45

 teacher’s book

Ex 4 Fill in the table.

1 The Italian classification authority ……………………………………………………………

2 The …………………………………………………………………………………… Lloyd’s Register of Shipping

3 International Convention for Safety of Life at Sea ……………………………………………………………

4 …………………………………………………………… indicates the distance ships can sail from

the coast
5 The ship’s identity card ……………………………………………………………

6 Distinctive number or letters is also known as ……………………………………………………………

7 ………………………………………………… the ship’s gross and net tonnage

8 The …………………………………………………………… indicates the minimum freeboard after loading

78

03_Tests Unit.indd 78 21-03-2013 10:54:45

 UNIT testS

Class ...................... Date ................................. Student ..............................................................................................................

Unit 4 Test – Shipbuilding

Ex 1 Rewrite the following sentences in the passive form.

a. First they build the keel.
b. Finally, they install the superstructure.
c. After this, they begin work on building the ship.
d. First of all, the classification society approves the working plans.
e. Then they erect the side framing and bulkheads.
f. Next, they lay out the bottom with its plating.

a. ……………………………………………………..........……………………………………………………..........………………………………………….........

b. ……………………………………………………..........……………………………………………………..........………………………………………….........

c. After this, work ……………………………………………………..........……………………………………………………..........………..............

d. ……………………………………………………..........……………………………………………………..........………………………………………….........

e. ……………………………………………………..........……………………………………………………..........………………………………………….........

f. ……………………………………………………..........……………………………………………………..........………………………………………….........

Ex 2 Now put the sentences above in the correct order to indicate the basic building steps.
1..... 2..... 3..... 4..... 5..... 6.....

Ex 3 Complete the text with the missing verbs given in scrambled order.
breaking – outfitting – installed – carried – located – delivered – built
– building – launching – towed – launched (2)

Ships are ……………….................. in shipyards. Shipyards are ……………….................. near the sea to allow ves-
sels to be ……………….................. from the ……………….................. ways. Usually, ships are launched when
about two-thirds are completed.
Shortly before ……………….................. , the propeller and the engines are ………………................... . As the
ship is ……………….................. , she is christened by ……………….................. a bottle of champagne on her
hull. Then the ship is ……………….................. to the outfitting pier, where the ……………….................. work is
……………….................. out. Next the ship is taken for a trial trip, then she is finally ……………….................. to
the owner.

Ex 4 Match each term with its definition.

1 combination framing
a. This protects the ship’s rudder
and propeller.
2 longitudinal framing b. It forms the bow.

79

03_Tests Unit.indd 79 21-03-2013 10:54:45

 teacher’s book

3 the keel c. They support the deck plating.

4 the frames d. This is a longitudinal structural section
at the bottom of the ship.
5 the beams and bulkheads e. With this building system, the hull structure
has longitudinal frames.
6 the stem f. These are a series of ribs making up
the ship’s sides.
7 the stern post g. The bottom and decks are longitudinally
framed, the sides, the bow and the stern
are transversely framed.
1..... 2..... 3..... 4..... 5..... 6..... 7.....

Ex 5 Answer the questions by writing complete sentences.

1 What does a naval architect do?
2 What does a classification society do?
3 What does outfitting include?
4 What does the owner decide on?
5 What do the qualified surveyors do?
6 Where are ships built?
7 What are double bottoms tested for before the ship is launched?
8 What happens during the trial trip?

80

03_Tests Unit.indd 80 21-03-2013 10:54:45

 UNIT testS

Class ...................... Date ................................. Student ..............................................................................................................

Unit 5 Test – Visual & sound signals

and communication codes

Ex 1 Complete the following definitions.

1 IMO stands for ……………………………………………….............................

2 An Aldis lamp is used to send ……………………………………………….............................

3 To make a sound signal we use ……………………………………………….............................

4 Each letter or number is made up of a series

of dots and dashes in the ……………………………………………….............................

5 Pennant-shaped flags are used to signal ……………………………………………….............................

6 The meaning of each flag is indicated in the ……………………………………………….............................

Ex 2 Mark the following sentences as True or False,

then underline the mistakes in the false sentences
and write the corrections on the dotted lines.
1 T F The most common method of radio communication
today is by VHF. ……………………………………
2 T F Nowadays the Engine Officer is usually responsible
for the radio department on board ship. ……………………………………
3 T F In the past, messages were transmitted by radio
telegraphy using the flag code. ……………………………………
4 T F In case of language difficulties, radio operators can make
use of phonetic tables to transmit letters and numbers. ……………………………………
5 T F The phonetic code for R is ROGER. ……………………………………

6 T F The main language used for radio communications

is Italian. ……………………………………

Ex 3 Answer the questions.

1 Why is it important to have an International Code at sea?
2 Which organization regulates the use of this code between sailors?
3 What does the International Code contain?
4 What are phonetic tables used for?
5 What does the “O flag” represent?
6 Which language is used for communications between ships of different
nationalities today?

81

03_Tests Unit.indd 81 21-03-2013 10:54:45

 teacher’s book

Ex 4 Write the full form of these numbers.

a. 3,422 ........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

b. 1.45 ...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................

c. 226 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................................

d. 0.37 ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................
e. 22,402 ......................................................................................................................................................................................................................
f. 1,436,000 ..............................................................................................................................................................................................................

Ex 5 Listen to your teacher and complete the following document.

Name of ship Call sign

………………………………………… …………………………………………

………………………………………… …………………………………………

…………………………… …………………………… …………………………………………

82

03_Tests Unit.indd 82 21-03-2013 10:54:45

 UNIT testS

Class ...................... Date ................................. Student ..............................................................................................................

Unit 6 Test – The IALA Buoyage System & ship navigation lights

Ex 1 Answer the questions by writing complete sentences.

1 What does the acronym IALA stand for?
2 What did the IALA do in 1976?
3 How many types of buoys are included in the present system? List the various types.
4 What characteristics distinguish the different types of buoys?
5 Where do you find buoys and what is their main and general purpose?
6 Is there any type of buoy with vertical stripes?
7 What do special marks indicate?
8 What do lateral marks indicate?

Ex 2 Which is Which? Indicate the correct type of buoy for each purpose.
1 They indicate the position of a hazard to shipping. ..............................................................................

2 They indicate the edges of a channel. ..............................................................................

3 They indicate that there is deep water around them. ..............................................................................

4 They indicate the safe side on which to pass a danger. ..............................................................................

Ex 3 Which is Which? Indicate the correct type of buoy for each type of topmark.
1 They can have a red sphere as a topmark. .............................................................................

2 They have a red can as a topmark. ..............................................................................

3 Their topmark is two black cones with their bases together. ..............................................................................
4 They have two black spheres as a topmark. ..............................................................................

5 They have a green cone as a topmark. ..............................................................................

6 Their topmark is two black cones pointing downwards. ..............................................................................

Ex 4 Choose the correct option.

1 They have two yellow bands with a black band in the middle.
a. North cardinal Buoys
b. East cardinal buoys
c. West cardinal buoys
2 They are black over yellow.
a. North cardinal buoys
b. East cardinal buoys
c. West cardinal buoys

83

03_Tests Unit.indd 83 21-03-2013 10:54:45

 teacher’s book

3 They can be shaped like a cone.

a. Cardinal marks
b. Port-hand buoys
c. Starboard-hand buoys
4 They can be spherical.
a. Cardinal marks
b. Safe water marks
c. Port-hand buoys
5 They are black with one or more red stripes.
a. Port-hand buoys
b. Safe water marks
c. Isolated danger marks
6 They have red and white stripes.
a. Port-hand buoys
b. Safe water marks
c. Isolated danger marks

Ex 5 Complete the paragraph about ships at night.

Vessels which navigate at night must have .............................................. lights, so that other vessels can
see if there is a danger of collision and take action to avoid it. All vessels show a ....................................
light on the right side of the ship (starboard) and a .............................................. light on the left (port)
side. They must show a .............................................. stern light (behind or astern). The red and green
lights mentioned are called ............................................... . Ships must also show at least one masthead
light on the high mast. Ships which are more than 50 m long must have two
.............................................. lights.

84

03_Tests Unit.indd 84 21-03-2013 10:54:45

 UNIT testS

Class ...................... Date ................................. Student ..............................................................................................................

Unit 7 Test – Geographical coordinates

Ex 1 Answer the questions by writing complete sentences.

1 What do we use geographical coordinates for?
2 What divides the Earth into two hemispheres?
3 In which hemisphere is Europe located?
4 What is the Prime Parallel?
5 What is the Prime Meridian?
6 What is the latitude of a place?
7 What is the longitude of a place?
8 What is the latitude of the North Pole?
9 What is the longitude of Greenwich?
10 What is the 180° meridian called and where is it located?

Ex 2 Mark the following sentences as True or False, then underline

the mistakes in the false sentences and write the corrections on the dotted lines.
1 T F All meridians have the same length. …………………..........

2 T F Meridians are like the number of degrees in a circumference. …………………..........

3 T F There are 180 meridians. …………………..........

4 T F There are 180 parallels. …………………..........

5 T F Longitude is indicated as North or South of Greenwich. …………………..........

6 T F Parallels are larger as they get nearer to the poles. …………………..........

Ex 3 Choose the correct option.

1 When we find the geographical coordinates of a place on the Earth’s surface,
we consider the Earth as:
a. a sphere.
b. a circumference.
c. an oval.
2 What does the following definition refer to: “It is an imaginary vertical
line passing through the Earth’s centre”?
a. Greenwich meridian.
b. the Equator.
c. the Earth’s axis.
3 We calculate latitude and longitude in degrees because they are:
a. angular distances.

85

03_Tests Unit.indd 85 21-03-2013 10:54:46

 teacher’s book

b. linear distances.
c. distances in space.
4 In the Southern Hemisphere latitudes can vary from:
a. 0° to 180°S.
b. 0° to 90°S.
c. 0° to 360°S.
5 Each parallel and meridian is separated from the following parallel or meridian by:
a. 1 degree.
b. 10 degrees.
c. 15 degrees.
6 Which of the following sentences about the Equator is true?
a. The Equator is the Earth’s axis.
b. The Equator is the largest parallel.
c. The Equator passes through Greenwich.

Ex 4 Fill in the table.

…………………..........………………….......... Unit of measurement for distances at sea
…………………..........………………….......... Length of a nautical table
Number of time zones …………………..........…………………..........

Degrees of longitude of each time zone …………………..........…………………..........

Time zone 0 is …………………..........…………………..........

The speed of a ship is measured in …………………..........…………………..........

1 nm/h …………………..........…………………..........

It measures the ship’s speed …………………..........…………………..........

86

03_Tests Unit.indd 86 21-03-2013 10:54:46

 UNIT testS

Class ...................... Date ................................. Student ..............................................................................................................

Unit 8 Test – Navigational aids and instruments

Ex 1 Mark the following sentences as True or False, then underline

the mistakes in the false sentences and write the corrections on the dotted lines.
1 T F The Earth generates a magnetic field which has north
and south magnetic poles. …………………......

2 T F Magnetic or true north is the point of the Earth’s axis

where all meridians converge. …………………......

3 T F Geographic and magnetic poles do not exactly coincide. …………………......

4 T F The continuous fluctuations in the Earth’s magnetic field

cause the geographic poles to shift their position. …………………......

5 T F The gyrocompass always indicates the magnetic north. …………………......

6 T F A magnetic compass always indicates the geographic north. …………………......

7 T F The angle formed between geographic and magnetic north

is called magnetic variation. …………………......

8 T F The magnetic variation is different from place to place

and changes slowly with time. …………………......

9 T F Magnetic variations can be either east or west of true north. …………………......

10 T F When in a given area the magnetic north is east

of true north, the variation is negative. …………………......

Ex 2 Fill in the table.

1 RADAR stands for... ……………………………………………………..........

2 Type of radio frequencies used by Radar systems. ……………………………………………………..........

3 Ships use the time elapsed between emission and return

of the pulse signal to calculate... ……………………………………………………..........

4 The angle formed by the distance of a star or planet

above the horizon. ……………………………………………………..........

5 Sonar stands for... ……………………………………………………..........

6 Speed of sound in water is around... ……………………………………………………..........

7 Bathymetric curves indicate... ……………………………………………………..........

8 Echo sounders are often used to locate shoals

of fish on board... ……………………………………………………..........

Ex 3 Fill in the name of each instrument.

1 Instrument used for determining direction which always
points to geographic north. ………………………………………

87

03_Tests Unit.indd 87 21-03-2013 10:54:46

 teacher’s book

2 Instrument used for measuring the distance and position

of target objects. ………………………………………

3 Instrument used for scanning the various levels

of the seabed and producing maps of the underwater relief. ………………………………………

4 Instrument used for determining direction by means

of a magnetic needle that points to magnetic north. ………………………………………

5 Instrument used for measuring the sea depth and also

locating the presence of shoals of fish. ………………………………………

6 Instrument used for finding a ship’s speed through the water

and the distance covered. ………………………………………

7 Instrument used for measuring altitudes and other angles. ………………………………………

Ex 4 Try to fill in the 5 gaps in the text.

Nowadays ……………………………………… are gradually replacing transmitting stations on the Earth.
Each satellite emits microwave radio signals indicating its position which are picked up by a
……………………………………… receiver.
GPS stands for ……………………………………………………………………………… and it currently has 31 satellites
orbiting around the Earth. This system allows us to calculate our position extremely accurately
anywhere on the Earth’s surface. The receiver works out the time delay for the signal to arrive
and uses data from 3 satellites to indicate our position as a geographical point in
……………………………………… and ………………………………………. .

88

03_Tests Unit.indd 88 21-03-2013 10:54:46

 UNIT testS

Class ...................... Date ................................. Student ..............................................................................................................

Unit 9 Test – The Deck Department

Ex 1 Complete the table showing how a ship’s crew is organized.

1. …………………………………………………….............. Highest authority on ship
2. …………………………………………………….............. Head of a department
3. …………………………………………………….............. Assists the department head
4. …………………………………………………….............. Next in ranking
5. …………………………………………………….............. Supervises ratings
6. …………………………………………………….............. Ratings (full name for AS)
7. …………………………………………………….............. Ratings (full name for OS)
8. ……………………………………………………............... Officers in training

Ex 2 Match the documents on the left with their description on the right.
1 Certificate of Registry a. Provides details about the crew
2 Bill of Entry b. Provides guidance in maintaining the ship’s
stability under various loading conditions
3 Bill of Export c. Indicates maximum draft to which
a ship can be loaded
4 International Tonnage Certificate d. Ship’s identity document
5 International Load Line Certificate e. Indicates ship’s cargo carrying capacity
6 Intact Stability Booklet f. List of goods to be loaded on board
7 Crew list g. List of carried goods
1….. 2….. 3….. 4….. 5….. 6….. 7…..

Ex 3 Choose the correct option.

1 The Deck Department is responsible for:
a. ensuring the safe running of the ship’s machinery.
b. unloading and loading cargo.
c. maintaining and repairing the port cargo gear.
2 Which sentence is NOT true?
The Captain:
a. stands watch.
b. is an experienced navigator.
c. represents the shipowner in all circumstances.

89

03_Tests Unit.indd 89 21-03-2013 10:54:46

 teacher’s book

3 The Chief Officer is responsible:

a. for navigation.
b. for all life-saving equipment.
c. for ensuring the maintenance of the ship’s hold.
4 Cadets:
a. never stand watch.
b. have no official responsibility on board.
c. are supervised directly by the Captain.

Ex 4 Underline the mistakes in the following sentences

and write the corrections on the dotted lines.
1 The Second Mate plans the daily maintenance programme. ……………................................

2 The Bosun checks that the First Officer carries out these orders. ……………................................

3 ABs carry out painting duties such as maintaining the ship’s course. …………….................................

4 OS is the highest rank in the Deck Department. ……………................................

5 ABs often have to wash and sweep the deck. ……………................................

Ex 5 Answer the questions by writing complete sentences.

1 What is a winch used for?
2 Why are synthetic ropes used on board ship?
3 What is the capstan used for?
4 What replaces a capstan on board large ships?
5 When do we say that a cargo ship is gearless?
6 What are bollards?
7 What 3 pieces of equipment are used to transfer dry goods?
8 How do RO/RO ships load cargo?

Ex 6 Put the mooring instructions in the correct order.

1….. 2….. 3….. 4…..
a. Finished with manoeuvring stations.
b. All gone and clear.
c. Let go forward! Let go aft!
d. Single up forward, single up aft.

90

03_Tests Unit.indd 90 21-03-2013 10:54:46

 UNIT testS

Class ...................... Date ................................. Student ..............................................................................................................

Unit 10 Test – The Engine Department

Ex 1 Complete the table showing how the Engine Department is organized.

Head of the Engine Department …………………………………………………….....................

The person the head of the Engine Department

is responsible to ……………………………………………………....................

The two Officers below the head in ranking …………………………………………………….....................

…………………………………………………….....................

Two Engine Department ratings …………………………………………………….....................

…………………………………………………….....................

Ex 2 Answer the questions by writing complete sentences.

1 What is the general responsibility of the head of the Engine Department?
2 What is his responsibility concerning pollution and safety?
3 Who is usually responsible for repair and maintenance
of electrical equipment on board?
4 What do Engineer Cadets do?
5 What is auxiliary machinery?

Ex 3 Write the function of each piece of machinery.

1 Oil or water coolers …………………………………………………….....................…………………………………

2 Feed-water heaters (economisers) …………………………………………………….....................…………………………………

3 The ballast pumping system …………………………………………………….....................…………………………………

4 Evaporators …………………………………………………….....................…………………………………

5 Engine shafts …………………………………………………….....................…………………………………

6 Lifeboats …………………………………………………….....................…………………………………

7 Automatic pilot …………………………………………………….....................…………………………………

8 Electricity generators …………………………………………………….....................…………………………………

Ex 4 Underline the mistakes in the following sentences and write

the corrections on the dotted lines.
1 The Master is the head of the Engine Department. ……………………………………

2 Engineer Officers regularly update the Navigation Logbook. ……………………………………

3 The Engine Logbook contains information on the operation

of engines, boilers and secondary machinery. ……………………………………

91

03_Tests Unit.indd 91 21-03-2013 10:54:46

 teacher’s book

4 Firemen are responsible for general oiling duties. ……………………………………

5 In the Logbook we find machinery parameters such as frying oil

and lubricating oil consumption. ……………………………………

6 The auxiliary engines provide the ship’s propulsion. ……………………………………

Ex 5 Complete the table about the Engine Control Room (ECR) equipment.

Electrical Voltmeter Main engine

Generator panel Alarm panel
switchboard and ammeter controls
Shows electrical Controls the Show voltage Monitors tank Indicate fuel oil
……………………………… power and levels, and
such as voltage ……………………………… ……………………………… temperature and ………………………………

and load. to the various flow for all …………………………… . oil consumption,
machinery. major of machinery. speed, direction.
Engineers can
decide on how equipment. Allows engineers These data are
many electricity to take action recorded in the
……………………………… when an alarm Engine Room
to keep in …………………………… . ………………………… .

operation.

92

03_Tests Unit.indd 92 21-03-2013 10:54:46

 UNIT testS

Class ...................... Date ................................. Student ..............................................................................................................

Unit 11 Test – Describing technical diagrams

Ex 1 Look at the pictures and complete the sentences with

the following verbs in the correct form. Use each verb once.
contain – represent – connect – consist – fit – show – divide

Picture 1 Picture 2 Picture 3

Output
Switch device
(lamp)

+ Impeller
Power source
Ram (battery) Casing
moving down

Discharge
valve
(open) Picture 4

Suction valve 4 4
(closed) 4 3 3 3 4

Picture 1 a. The diagram ………………………………………… a piston pump.

b. The pump chamber is ………………………………………… with discharge and suction
valves at the top and bottom.
Picture 2 The battery and the lamp are ………………………………………… by two lengths
of copper wire.
Picture 3 A centrifugal pump ………………………………………… of an impeller which rotates
inside a casing.
Picture 4 a. The diagram ………………………………………… the double-bottom of ship.
b. It ………………………………………… a number of tanks.
c. The double bottom ………………………………………… into a number of tanks.

93

03_Tests Unit.indd 93 21-03-2013 10:54:48

 teacher’s book

Ex 2 Fill in the gaps.

The lubricating oil system
The used lubricating oil drains to the crankcase and ………………………… passes into the drain tank
through filters.
The drain ……………………………………… is fitted with a purifier system which consists of a
……………………………………… and a centrifuge. First the oil is ……………………………………… in the heater, then
it passes through the centrifuge to ……………………… purified. After purification, the oil is returned
to the ……………………………………… tank at a point next to the suction strainer.
Pressure ……………………………………… draw the oil through the suction strainer and discharge
………………… into the cooler. From the cooler the oil ……………………………………… through the
distribution branches to various parts of the ………………………………………. .

Ex 3 What happens to the lubricating oil when it passes through the different
parts of the system? Complete the sentences.
1 When it passes through filters and strainers, the oil is ………………………………………. .
2 When it passes through a heater, the oil is ………………………………………. .
3 When it passes through a cooler, the oil is ………………………………………. .
4 When it passes through a cooler, the oil is ………………………………………. .

Ex 4 Use the given words to fill in the text about the fuel oil system
of a marine engine.
through – from – in – of – into – before – at

Pumps draw the oil at low pressure ………………………………… the service tanks and discharge it
………………………………… the heater. A viscosity regulator is fitted ………………………………… the heater
discharge.
Then the oil passes ………………………………… a fine strainer ………………………………… going to the main fuel
pump suctions ………………………………… the engine. A pressure control valve is fitted
………………………………… the system and any excess oil is returned to the service oil tanks.

Ex 5 Answer the questions by writing complete sentences.

1 Before going to the fuel pump suctions of the engine, the fuel oil passes through
a viscosity regulator. What is its function?
2 A diesel fuel tank is included in the fuel oil system through a change-over valve.
What is its function? What does it allow?

94

03_Tests Unit.indd 94 21-03-2013 10:54:48

 UNIT testS

Class ...................... Date ................................. Student ..............................................................................................................

Unit 12 Test – Pumps

Ex 1 Answer the questions by writing complete sentences.

1 What is a pump?
2 What is the pressure head?
3 What other hydraulic measure is used in pump operation?
4 What can provide the power for the pump?

Ex 2 Fill in the gaps using the following words.

head – factors – reciprocating – quantity – liquids – viscosity – centrifugal – kinetic

Pumps are used on board ship to move …………………………………………… or to give them pressure or
…………………………………………… energy.
There are three common types of pumps: …………………………………………… pumps, gear-wheel pumps
and …………………………………………… pumps; each of these is used for a different purpose.
Before choosing which pump to use we have to consider a number of ………………………………………… .
Firstly, the …………………………………………… of liquid to be moved and the pressure
…………………………………………… ; next, the …………………………………………… of the liquid and finally whether
or not the liquid is corrosive or contains solid particles in suspension.

Ex 3 Fill in the gaps with the correct prepositions.

1 The interlocking gear-wheels rotate ………………………… a casing.
2 Liquid is discharged ………………………… the delivery outlet.
3 Liquid is forced to circulate ………………………… the vanes of the impeller.
4 The piston moves ………………………… and ………………………… within the chamber.
5 Liquid is drawn ………………………… the vacuum ………………………… the suction tube.
6 Pressure is created on the liquid which is forced ………………………… of the delivery tube.

Ex 4 Choose the correct option.

1 Centrifugal pumps are:
a. noisy and large.
b. noisy and small.
c. quiet and small.
2 Since gear-wheel pumps are often used to pump oil, we:
a. do not need to lubricate their moving parts.
b. always need to lubricate their moving parts.
c. cannot pump lubricating oils.

95

03_Tests Unit.indd 95 21-03-2013 10:54:48

 teacher’s book

3 Gear-wheel pumps and screw pumps are types of:

a. rotary pumps.
b. piston pumps.
c. centrifugal pumps.
4 In a single-acting reciprocating pump liquid is drawn and discharged:
a. by a single piston stroke.
b. when the piston is up.
c. by a double piston stroke.

Ex 5 Fill in the missing words to complete the descriptions of the three main kinds
of pumps. Note that the same number indicates the same word which is repeated.
Look at the example with 0 prime:

The engine is a 0 prime A 0 prime mover is an energy The Equator is the 0 Prime
mover. converter. Parallel.
CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS RECIPROCATING PUMPS GEAR-WHEEL PUMPS
They are used for: They are used for: They are used for:
high 1 ………………………… rates. low 1 ………………………… rates. low 1 ………………………… rates.
They give the liquid a: They give the liquid a: They give the liquid a:
low 2 ………………………… high 2 ………………………… low 2 …………………………
pressure. pressure. pressure.
They are suitable for: They are suitable for: They are suitable for:
low 3 ………………………… liquids. medium 3 ………………………… high 3 ………………………… liquids
liquids. like 4 ………………………… and fuel
oils.
They provide an: They provide an: They provide an:
even and 5 ………………………… 6 ………………………… delivery even and 5 …………………………

delivery. especially for the single- delivery.

acting kind.
They 7 ………………………… be They 8 ………………………… not be
used for liquids containing used for liquids containing
solid particles in suspension. solid particles in suspension.

96

03_Tests Unit.indd 96 21-03-2013 10:54:48

 UNIT testS

Class ...................... Date ................................. Student ..............................................................................................................

Unit 13 Test – Boilers

Ex 1 Fill in the gaps by using the given words.

between – top – of – outside – from – to – bottom – by – around – in

Water-tube boilers consist ………………………… a fire-proof casing with a furnace at the

………………………… , a steam drum at the ………………………… and water-drums at a lower level. The
drums are connected ………………………… banks of tubes.
Other large tubes, called the downcomer tubes, are located ………………………… the furnace. They
feed the water drums with cool water, so that convection currents make the water move
………………………… the system.
The water drums and banks of tubes are placed in the main flow of hot gases rising
………………………… the furnace: so the heat of the hot gases is transferred ………………………… the water
in the tubes, generating steam. The difference in density allows the dry steam to collect
………………………… the steam-drum.
Superheaters, located ………………………… the steam-drum and the water-drums, make the steam
drier and more efficient.

Ex 2 Underline the mistakes in the following sentences and write

the corrections on the dotted lines.
1 In a boiler, the furnace is located at the bottom because
hot gases descend. ………………………........................

2 Water is cooled down when it comes into contact with

the hot gases. ………………………........................

3 Downcomer tubes provide a reservoir of relatively hot water. ………………………........................

4 Economisers heat the feed-water after it enters the boiler. ………………………........................

Ex 3 Choose the correct option.

1 The roof, side wall and floor tubes are known as:
a. waterwalls.
b. downcomer tubes.
c. generating tubes.
2 Water is separated from the steam in the:
a. water drum.
b. the furnace.
c. the steam drum.
3 Steam rises to the top of the drum because:
a. it is heavier than the water.
b. it is lighter than the water.
c. it is higher than the water.

97

03_Tests Unit.indd 97 21-03-2013 10:54:48

 teacher’s book

4 Boiler mountings or fittings are:

a. banks of tubes.
b. the various valves and gauges.
c. the water and steam drums.

Ex 4 Answer the questions by writing complete sentences.

1 What are boilers used for on board ship?
2 How is steam generated?
3 How is water made to move around the system?

Ex 5 Match each name with its definition.

1 They release any excess steam from the boiler. a. Blow-off valves
2 It allows samples of water to be taken for testing. b. Pressure gauge
3 They control the entry of feed-water into the boiler. c. Safety valves
4 It shows the water level in the boiler. d. Stop valves
5 It is used to indicate the pressure in the boiler. e. Water level indicator
6 They drain off any grease or mud from the boiler. f. Thermometer
7 They control the passage of steam to the engine. g. Salinometer valves
8 It indicates the temperature inside the boiler. h. Feed-check valves

1..... 2..... 3..... 4..... 5..... 6..... 7..... 8.....

98

03_Tests Unit.indd 98 21-03-2013 10:54:48

 UNIT testS

Class ...................... Date ................................. Student ..............................................................................................................

Unit 14 Test – Condensers & evaporators

Ex 1 Fill in the gaps by using the given words.

condensate – distilled water – cooling – condenses – condensing – heat –
feed-water – pump – circulating – condensation – condenser – cooling water

Most of the heat energy in exhaust steam can be saved by ………………………………… it and sending it
back to the boiler as hot …………………………………. . Rapid condensation is provided by a
…………………………………. . The main component of a condenser is a ………………………………… surface, made
up of thin copper-nickel alloy tubes.
Two separate circuits are involved in steam …………………………………. . The first is the
…………………………………………… circuit, the second is the condensate circuit.
In the first circuit, a ………………………………… pump provides a fast flow of seawater through the
bank of tubes. In the second circuit, steam enters through a steam inlet and, by flowing over
the tubes, transmits some of its ………………………………… to the liquid in the tubes. A rapid drop in
steam temperature occurs, so that steam ………………………………… and is collected in the hot well as
the …………………………………. .
A condensate ………………………………… removes the condensate from the hot well and sends it into
the boiler. Since there is no contact between the condensate and the coolant, pure
……………………………………… is produced, which is ideal for feeding the boilers.

Ex 2 Answer the questions by writing complete sentences.

1 What is produced by a condenser in a steam plant?
2 What is used as the cooling liquid (or coolant) in a marine condenser?
3 What sends the cooling liquid into the condenser?
4 What removes the condensate from the hot well?
5 Where is the condensate finally sent to?
6 What are condensers used for on board ship today? Indicate at least one
of their main uses on board.

Ex 3 Mark the following sentences as True or False, then underline the mistakes
in the false sentences and write the corrections on the dotted lines.
1 T F Condensers and evaporators are heat exchangers. ………………….........

2 T F Heat exchangers perform an exchange of heat between

solids at different temperatures. ………………….........

3 T F Condensers and evaporators operate the same heat

transfer operation. ………………….........

4 T F In the evaporator the liquid condenses by extracting heat

from an external fluid. ………………….........

99

03_Tests Unit.indd 99 21-03-2013 10:54:48

 teacher’s book

5 T F In condensers vapour condenses by giving heat to

an external fluid. ………………….........

6 T F In a fresh water generating system there are both

a condenser and an evaporator. ………………….........

7 T F These systems are used on board to generate fresh

water from seawater. ………………….........

8 T F First the seawater is heated to boiling point and turned

into steam in the condenser. ………………….........

9 T F Then the steam rises into the evaporator where

it is condensed producing the distillate. ………………….........

10 T F The engine jacket water provides the heat source

for the evaporation of seawater. ………………….........

11 T F Air ejectors (or vacuum pumps) are used to increase

the pressure in the evaporation chamber. ………………….........

12 T F Before drinking distilled water, it needs to be mineralised. ………………….........

100

03_Tests Unit.indd 100 21-03-2013 10:54:48

 UNIT testS

Class ...................... Date ................................. Student ..............................................................................................................

Unit 15 Test – The steam engine plant

Ex 1 Underline the five wrong words in the text and write

the correct ones on the dotted lines.
There are two types of engines commonly used nowadays: electric motors
and heat engines. The former produce mechanical energy from light, ………………...............

the latter convert heat into mechanical energy. Heat engines need a source ………………...............

of mechanical energy. They need a working liquid, whose heat they absorb ………………...............

and convert into useful job. In a steam engine plant the heat engine ………………...............

is a turbine and the working fluid is water. ………………...............

Ex 2 Complete the sentences.

1 The engine is an energy ………………................ .
2 Water ………………............... into steam when it reaches boiling point.
3 At an oil refinery, crude oil is converted ………………............... many different oil products.
4 Steam ………………............... into water in the condenser.
5 Thermal energy ………………............... into mechanical work by heat engines.

Ex 3 Study the diagram representing a steam engine plant

and identify the following components.
Condensate pump ..... Main feed pump ..... Main circulating pump .....

Economiser ..... Superheater ..... Hot well B

Condenser ..... Turbine ..... Boiler furnace .....

V4
To auxiliary services
E Steam V1 V2
G
Uptake Hot water Pipe line to turbine

C
A

D
P3
F Burner P2 V3

P1

Water
Steam B Seawater

101

03_Tests Unit.indd 101 21-03-2013 10:54:49

 teacher’s book

Ex 4 Fill in the gaps.

The main parts of a steam engine plant are the ………………............... , the engine and the
………………............... . Mechanical work is produced by using the ………………............... energy of steam as
the ………………............... fluid.
First, water is heated and transformed into ………………................ . Then some of the heat energy of
steam is used to operate the ………………............... . Next the remaining heat is cooled down and the
steam is turned back into ………………............... again.

Ex 5 Choose the correct option.

1 In a closed steam cycle:
a. only the quantity of the working fluid change.
b. only the chemical characteristics of the working fluid change.
c. only the physical state of the working fluid changes.
2 The steam cycle begins:
a. in the turbine.
b. in the condenser.
c. in the boiler.
3 In the turbine, the steam:
a. makes the propeller rotate producing mechanical energy.
b. makes the steam pipe rotate producing mechanical energy.
c. makes the rotor blades rotate producing mechanical energy.
4 A condenser is where:
a. exhaust steam is cooled and converted.
b. exhaust steam is produced.
c. exhaust steam is heated and converted.

Ex 6 Answer the questions by writing complete sentences.

1 What is the main function of a marine steam engine plant?
2 What does steam do in a steam engine plant?
3 Why is it defined as the “working fluid”?
4 What are the basic areas of steam operation in this plant?
5 Where does steam receive its heat energy?

102

03_Tests Unit.indd 102 21-03-2013 10:54:49

 UNIT testS

Class ...................... Date ................................. Student ..............................................................................................................

Unit 16 Test – Nautical charts

Ex 1 Answer the questions by writing complete sentences.

1 What did Ptolemy’s world maps already show?
2 Why did Columbus believe he had reached the East Indies?
3 What is Gerhardus Mercator considered to be?
4 What did he produce in 1556?
5 What does a navigator plot on a working chart?
6 Give two examples of great circles.

Ex 2 Fill in the table with the items given below in scrambled order.
shortest (2) – two (2) – great circle track – largest – centre – meridians
– rhumb line – constant – arc – sphere

Rhumb line A line joining ……………………………… points on the Earth’s surface which
intersects the ……………………………………… at a ……………………………………… angle.
Great circle track A line following the ……………………………………… route between 2 points on
the surface of a ………………………………………. .
Great circle The ……………………………………… circle on the Earth’s surface which passes
through its ………………………………………. .
Small circle The ……………………………………… of a small circle which is NOT the
……………………………………………………… route between ……………………………………… points.
……………………………………… Not used for ocean crossings.
……………………………………… Used for ocean crossings.

Ex 3 Underline the mistakes in the following sentences and write

the corrections on the dotted lines.
1 As the Earth is spherical, it cannot be represented on
a spherical surface without some distortion. ………………………........................

2 The line of a chart refers to the ratio between real dimensions

and the size of the arc of the chart. ………………………........................

3 Nautical charts use Mercator and astronomic projections. ………………………........................

4 The Mercator is a hexagonal projection. ………………………........................

5 The physical constant used with Mercator charts is called j c. ………………………........................

6 Gnomonic charts cannot include more than one ocean because

of distortion. ………………………........................

103

03_Tests Unit.indd 103 21-03-2013 10:54:49

 teacher’s book

Ex 4 Complete the table by placing the expressions in the correct place

to identify the characteristics of each type of chart.
rhumb lines are plotted as straight lines – distance and direction cannot
be measured directly – great circle routes are plotted as straight lines – conformal
– position, distance and direction are easily determined – the most widely used
in navigation – not useful as a working chart – true shape of features is maintained

MERCATOR CHARTS GNOMONIC PROJECTIONS

1. 1.

2. 2.

3. 3.

4.

5.

Ex 5 Fill in the gaps.

Hydrographic surveyors compile nautical charts by using ………………………........................ technology and
considering both the ………………………........................ area and the shoreline. To show all this
information, nautical charts make use of conventional ………………………......................... .
The IHO ensures that ………………………........................ charts are standardized in various parts of the
world.
Any ………………………........................ or updates to the chart are reported in bulletins called
………………………............... to Mariners. Many charts today are produced as ENCs to be used in
………………………........................ Chart Display and Information Systems, which are an essential part of
………………………........................ navigation and bridge systems.

104

03_Tests Unit.indd 104 21-03-2013 10:54:49

 UNIT testS

Class ...................... Date ................................. Student ..............................................................................................................

Unit 17 Test – Piloting & plotting

Ex 1 Underline the mistakes in the following sentences and write

the corrections on the dotted lines.
1 When we take a bearing, we are actually measuring
the time between north and our landmark. ………………………......................

2 We use a magnetic sounder to read the values of the angle

and take a bearing. ………………………......................

3 The compass sounding is what the ship’s compass reads at any time. ………………………......................

4 Before plotting compass bearings on a nautical chart with a LOP,

we need to apply corrections for variation and differentiation. ………………………......................

5 If magnetic variation is to the west, it is indicated with the (+) sign. ………………………......................

6 To calculate magnetic deviation, we need to use the ship’s own

landmark deviation tables. ………………………......................

Ex 2 Reorder the steps in taking a sextant bearing.

1….. 2….. 3….. 4….. 5….. 6….
This method is called by bearing and distance.
a. Apply the formula to get the distance from the object.
b. Where this second LOP crosses the circular LOP, it is our exact position or fix.
c. Find out the height of the landmark on the nautical chart.
d. Use this distance to draw a circular LOP on the nautical chart. 
e. Use the sextant to measure the angle a between the top
and the bottom of the landmark.
f. Now take a compass bearing to get a second line of position.

Ex 3 Choose the correct option.

1 Two landmarks are said to be “in range” when they are:
a. very close to each other.
b. a long distance from each other.
c. in line with each other.
2 The accuracy of our bearing is increased when:
a. our ship is close to the chosen landmark.
b. our ship is a great distance from the landmark.
c. the landmarks are very close together.

105

03_Tests Unit.indd 105 21-03-2013 10:54:49

 teacher’s book

3 To obtain an accurate fix, we normally draw:

a. a single LOP.
b. a circular LOP.
c. three LOPs to form a triangle.
4 On nautical charts, the horizontal edge of the chart indicates:
a. the latitude scale.
b. the longitude scale.
c. true direction.

Ex 4 Fill in the gaps by using the given words.

compass – read – reading – arm – destination – another – parallel – above – circle
– heading – course – is – degrees – time – landmark – line – fix – LOP – rose – north

First we locate our ………............................. on the chart, then we take a ………............................. bearing of it.
This compass reading will show the ………............................. and minutes of the angle formed by our
landmark and the compass ……….............................. .
Then we transfer this compass ………............................. to the chart. This is how we do. We place one
arm of our ………............................. ruler on the chart compass ………............................. , on the line indicating
the degrees and minutes shown by our compass reading. Then we place the other ……….....................

of the parallel ruler on our landmark and draw a line. This line is our first ………............................. .
Next we draw a second LOP by choosing ………............................. landmark and following the same
procedure. The point of intersection of the two LOPS is the ……….............................. . This is the point
on the chart where our ship ……….............................. . We indicate the fix by drawing a ……….............................
around it and writing the ………............................. alongside.
After that, we plot our ………............................ , drawing a straight line from our fix to our chosen
………............................. . We place an edge of the parallel ruler on the course ………............................. and the
other edge over the centre of the compass rose, where we ………............................. the magnetic
degrees of our course. These degrees represent our course magnetic ……….............................. . Finally
we write this heading ………............................. the course line.

Ex 5 Answer the questions by writing complete sentences.

1 When do we take a running fix?
2 Why is it called a “running fix”?
3 What does a navigator use a parallel ruler or nautical triangles for?
4 What is the difference between a compass course – indicated by
the letter “C” – and a true course, indicated by “T”?

106

03_Tests Unit.indd 106 21-03-2013 10:54:49

 UNIT testS

Class ...................... Date ................................. Student ..............................................................................................................

Unit 18 Test – Business logistics

Ex 1 Write the Italian words regarding logistics.

1 ……………………………………………………................. goods / commodities
2 ……………………………………………………................. to consume
3 ……………………………………………………................. storage
4 ……………………………………………………................. production efficiency
5 ……………………………………………………................. standard of living
6 ……………………………………………………................. sources of production

Ex 2 Complete the definitions by using the given words.

transportation and inventory – supply chain management/process –
limited movement storage system – coordinated management – Council of Logistics
Management – principle of comparative advantage
1 A ……………………………………………………................. means that people had to live close
to the production source and consume a narrow range of goods.
2 The …………………………………………………….................................... is the principle at the basis
of today’s international trade.
3 Historically, ……………………………………………………................. of goods were traditionally
managed separately.
4 Business logistics has introduced the new concept of ……………………………………………………................. to
the activities in question 3.
5 The professional organization of logistics managers is known
as the ……………………………………………………........……........ .
6 The ……………………………………………………................. regards the logistic interactions that take
place within a firm or between separate firms.

Ex 3 Write the names of the missing components of a typical logistics system.

1 ……………………………………………… service;
2 demand forecasting;
3 distribution ………………………………………………;
4 ……………………………………………… control;
5 material ………………………………………………;
6 ……………………………………………… processing;
7 parts and service ………………………………………………;
8 plant and ……………………………………………… site selection;
9 purchasing;
10 ………………………………………………;

107

03_Tests Unit.indd 107 21-03-2013 10:54:49

 teacher’s book

11 ……………………………………………… goods handling;

12 salvage and scrap ………………………………………………;
13 ……………………………………………… and transportation;
14 warehousing and ……………………………………………… .

Ex 4 Underline the mistakes in the following sentences and write

the corrections on the dotted lines. Note that in one sentence there are two mistakes.
1 The various functional activities such as transportation, etc.
are repeated very few times along the supply channel. ………………………......................

2 The physical supply channel is the source and space gap between
a firm’s immediate material sources and its processing points. ………………………......................

3 As well as transportation and inventory control, there are a number

of “sustainable” activities involved in the logistics mix for each firm. ………………………......................

4 Packaging must protect goods during handling and purchasing. ………………………......................

5 Commodities like coal and gravel especially need special

warehousing although inventories are never made. ………………………......................

Ex 5 Answer the questions by writing complete sentences.

1 Why is logistics so important in the modern day world?
2 When does the supply chain finish?
3 Why are inventories an essential logistic activity?
4 What does the term “materials management” refer to?
5 Why is it necessary to have a “reverse logistics channel”?
6 What does “outsourcing” mean?

108

03_Tests Unit.indd 108 21-03-2013 10:54:49

 UNIT testS

Class ...................... Date ................................. Student ..............................................................................................................

Unit 19 Test – The moving air

Ex 1 Fill in the gaps by using the given words.

convection – homogenous – warm – air masses – stable – heat
– balances – colder – humidity – dry

Meteorologists are trying to find a physical model to explain the movement of

………………………….................. around the Earth. Air masses are those parts of the atmosphere which
are ………………………….................. in temperature, ………………………….................. and pressure. They form over
large areas where environmental conditions are ………………………….................. .
Air masses can be warm or cold and ………………………….................. or humid, depending on where they
form; for example, over a tropical desert area they will be ………………………….................. and dry.
The fact that these air masses move over the surface of the Earth ………………………….................. our
climate redistributing the Sun’s ………………………….................. from warmer to …………………………..................

places.
The most accepted model today is known as ………………………….................. circulation of the air.

Ex 2 Choose the correct option.

1 Air masses move by:
a. circulation.
b. gravitation.
c. convection.
2 Warm air is:
a. lighter than cold air.
b. heavier than cold air.
c. drier than cold air.
3 Cold air is:
a. lighter than warm air.
b. drier than cold air.
c. heavier than warm air.
4 Under the force of the Earth’s gravity:
a. warm air tends to descend.
b. cold air tends to descend.
c. cold air tends to rise.
5 Convection currents happen because:
a. warm air rises while cold air descends.
b. cold air rises while warm air descends.
c. cold air rises while dry airdescends.

Ex 3 Answer the questions by writing complete sentences.

1 What are the factors which determine the movements of atmospheric air?
2 Why does air pressure vary with temperature?

109

03_Tests Unit.indd 109 21-03-2013 10:54:49

 teacher’s book

3 Why does it vary with humidity?

4 What are isobars?
5 How are they shown on weather maps?

Ex 4 Choose the correct option.

1 Cyclone areas are formed by:
a. cold high pressure air masses.
b. warm low pressure air masses.
c. hot high pressure air masses.
2 Anticyclone areas are formed by:
a. cold high pressure air masses.
b. warm low pressure air masses.
c. hot high pressure air masses.
3 Anticyclones are:
a. the low pressure areas where the cold air tends to fall.
b. the high pressure areas where the cold air tends to fall.
c. the low pressure areas where the warm air tends to fall.
4 The air flow between cyclone and anticyclone areas is:
a. the Coriolis force.
b. the wind.
c. an “empty space”.
5 Winds always move towards:
a. low pressure areas.
b. high pressure areas.
c. the left.
6 The Coriolis effect is caused by the:
a. movement of air masses.
b. wind movement.
c. rotation of the Earth.

Ex 5 Complete the definitions.

Main ………………………….................. blow all year round in the same direction.
The Polar Winds, the West Winds and the Trade Winds are the ………………………….................. winds.
Monsoons are ………………………….................. winds.
………………………….................. blow for six months from the sea and for six months from the land to
the sea.
The Bora, the Föhn, the Mistral and the Sirocco are ………………………….................. winds, since they only
blow periodically.
A ………………………….................. front is formed when cold air approaches and replaces rising warm air.
A ………………………….................. front is shown by a line with red semicircles.
A line with blue triangles shows a ………………………….................. front.

110

03_Tests Unit.indd 110 21-03-2013 10:54:49

 UNIT testS

Class ...................... Date ................................. Student ..............................................................................................................

Unit 20 Test – Logistic services

Ex 1 Fill in the missing words in Pfohl’s definition of “logistics”.

“Logistics must ensure that a ……………….……... is supplied from a ……………………………….…….. in
accordance with his ………………..…….. with the correct ………………..…….. (in quantity and variety), in
the …………………………….. , at the ………………..…….. and in the ………………..…….. at minimum ………………...…….. .”

Ex 2 Fill in the table.

…………………………………………………………….…………….……… Specialized companies for moving products

TTS …………………………………………………………….…………….………

Another name for storage points …………………………………………………………….…………….………

The ……………………………………….… transport system By air

Transhipment locations …………………………………………………………….…………….………

Suitable for intercontinental movement

of bulk cargoes …………………………………………………………….…………….………

Ex 3 Use the following adjectives to write two comparative

and two superlative true sentences about the different kinds of carriers.
Adjectives: expensive – slow – fast – cheap
Kinds of carriers: air freight – rail freight – sea freight
1 …………………………………………………………….
2 …………………………………………………………….
3 …………………………………………………………….
4 …………………………………………………………….

Ex 4 Answer the questions by writing complete sentences.

1 What is ocean shipping suitable for?
2 What products are carried on a refrigerated ship?
3 What do ferries carry?
4 What size are container units?

111

03_Tests Unit.indd 111 21-03-2013 10:54:49

 teacher’s book

5 What is the loading capacity of a container unit?

6 What are the two main advantages of using containers?
7 What are the two disadvantages of using containers?
8 What is a liner merchant ship?

Ex 5 Underline the mistakes in the following sentences and write

the corrections on the dotted lines.
1 Liners do not operate on a fixed schedule but can be hired
for transport anywhere in the world. ………………………......................

2 The Extra Cargo Shipping Instructions provide the carrier

with details of the goods and instructions on handling. ………………………......................

3 The bill of lading is issued by the sender and accompanies

the goods to the port of discharge. ………………………......................

4 The bill of lading is a record of what kind of containers

are being transported. ………………………......................

5 The owner is responsible for providing the special cranes

for unloading/loading containerized ships. ………………………......................

6 Combined transport aims to transfer shipped goods with

the greatest number of transhipment operations. ………………………......................

112

03_Tests Unit.indd 112 21-03-2013 10:54:50

 UNIT testS

Class ...................... Date ................................. Student ..............................................................................................................

Unit 21 Test – Moving waters

Ex 1 Choose the correct option for each sentence.

1 .............................................. (two quarters/three quarters) of the Earth’s surface is covered by water.
2 There is .............................................. (less/more) water in the Southern Hemisphere.
3 The .............................................. (greatest/smallest) quantity of water is in the Southern Hemisphere.
4 The large extensions of water between continents are called oceans/seas.
5 Lands enclose parts of oceans forming .............................................. (larger/smaller) basins called seas.
6 Seas .............................................. (are/are not) connected to oceans.

Ex 2 Complete the crossword.

ACROSS
  1
   
1. The temperature in the Mediterranean
  2 1
     
is relatively …
               
2. The sea is constantly in …
    2
         
3. … decreases with depth and latitude
       
from the Equator lo the Poles.
        3
          4

4. This sea has the least salt in the world.

3
                   
               
DOWN
       
1. The quantity of salt in water is known as …
   
2. This hemisphere has less water.
4
         
3. Temperature and salinity determine …
   
4. The saltiest sea in the world. (the … Sea)

Ex 3 Match the two parts of each sentence.

1 Salinity indicates a. warm seas because of constant
evaporation.
2 The sea temperature decreases with b. fresh water from rivers and rain.
3 The sea temperature increases with c. warm water, because it is denser.
4 High salinity is typical of d. the quantity of salt in the water.
5 Very salty water is heavier than e. its temperature and salinity.

113

03_Tests Unit.indd 113 21-03-2013 10:54:50

 teacher’s book

6 Low salinity is typical of seas which

receive a constant flow of f. depth.
7 Cold water is heavier than g. latitude from the poles to the Equator.
8 The density of seawater varies according to h. less salty water.

1..... 2 ..... 3..... 4..... 5..... 6..... 7..... 8.....

Ex 4 Answer the questions by writing complete sentences.

1 Which are the three characteristics of the seawater determining the formation
of water masses?
2 What do these water masses form?
3 How do they help to balance and redistribute the Sun’s heat all over the Earth?
4 What is the main difference between the waters of the Gulf Stream
and the Labrador Current?

Ex 5 Fill in the gaps.

The combined action of the Moon and the .............................................. force of the Earth cause tides to
occur. .............................................. tides usually happen when the Moon is full and the Sun and the
Moon are ............................................... .
On the contrary, when the Sun and Moon are .............................................. to each other, their forces do
not pull together and .............................................. tides occur. Every day the cycle of ..............................................

and low tides is repeated with a period of slack .............................................. occurring between tides.

114

03_Tests Unit.indd 114 21-03-2013 10:54:50

 UNIT testS

Class ...................... Date ................................. Student ..............................................................................................................

Unit 22 Test – The dead reckoning plot

Ex 1 Answer the questions.

1 What kinds of nautical information does a navigator use to plan the ship’s best course?
2 What is the track?
3 Why is a planned track line divided into segments?
4 What are these segments called?
5 What are junction points?
6 What does the track look like on the chart?

Ex 2 Complete the text with the missing words.

The term “dead reckoning” comes from …………………………………………… reckoning, which was
shortened to …………………………………… reckoning by sailors. It was a method established in the
………………………………… century (and used up to the early 20th century) to calculate the ship’s
position by making lots of trigonometric ……………………………………………. . Ded reckoning was then
modified to “dead reckoning”, which is the term still …………………………………………… today.
Nowadays it indicates a …………………………………………… to geometrically determine a ship’s
approximate position by applying a …………………………………………… representing true course and
speed to the last ……………………………………………. .

Ex 3 Fill in the table.

SOA stands for ……………………………………………………….

……………………………………………………… labels each leg of the track

……………………………………………………… speed in knots of the current
……………………………………………………… represents a fix
Leeway ……………………………………………………….

A semicircle ……………………………………………………….

Ex 4 Underline the mistakes in the following sentences and write

the corrections on the dotted lines.
1 Plot a DR position for the speed you obtain a fix. ……………………….....................

2 Plot a new wind line from each fix as soon as this is plotted
on the chart. ……………………….....................

3 Plot a new DR position at the time of every course and/or compass

change. ……………………….....................

4 Plot a corrected DR position if the predicted course line proved

wrong and continue from the first plotted fix. ……………………….....................

5 Plot a DR position every month. ……………………….....................

115

03_Tests Unit.indd 115 21-03-2013 10:54:50

 teacher’s book

Class ...................... Date ................................. Student ..............................................................................................................

Unit 23 Test – Petroleum

Ex 1 Answer the questions.

1 What are the main chemical components of petroleum?
2 What name is give to crude oil deposits?
3 What do they drill to extract petroleum?
4 Which is the lightest hydrocarbon?
5 Where is petroleum distillation carried out?
6 Which are the heaviest petroleum distillates?
7 What is the difference in the chemical composition of heavier
and lighter hydrocarbons?

Ex 2 Link and rewrite the pair of sentences using the relative pronoun which.
1 a. Fossil fuels are the main industrial fuels.
b. They are formed of hydrogen and carbon.
2 a. The combustible components of fossil fuels are hydrocarbons.
b. They are formed of hydrogen and carbon.
3 a. Petrol, diesel oil and kerosene are the main industrial fuels.
b. They are petroleum distillates.
4 a. Crude oil was formed from the chemical transformation of organic remains.
b. The organic remains deposited at the bottom of salty marshes and lagoons.

Ex 3 Fill in the gaps.

Crude oil is composed of a mixture of oils ………………………....... can be separated out into a number
of products, ………………………....... as petrol, diesel oil, kerosene and lubricants.
The main method …………………… separation is fractional distillation. Since the different oils have
………………………....... boiling temperatures, they are isolated in ………………………....... of different boiling
ranges. This separation process is carried out in a fractionating tower.

Ex 4 Underline and correct the mistakes in these sentences by changing the adjectives.
1 The temperature is lower at the bottom than at the top
of the tower. ……………………….....................

2 The hydrocarbons with the highest boiling point are condensed

at the top of the tower. ……………………….....................

3 The hydrocarbons that remain at the base of the column

are the lightest hydrocarbons. ……………………….....................

4 The heavier hydrocarbons rise to the top. ……………………….....................

5 The lighter hydrocarbons evaporate at higher temperatures. ……………………….....................

116

03_Tests Unit.indd 116 21-03-2013 10:54:50

 UNIT testS

6 The heavier hydrocarbons have fewer carbon atoms

in their molecules. ……………………….....................

Ex 5 Fill in the table.

1 In this process the heavy oils are heated to a temperature
of 450°C to break their molecules. ……………………….....................

2 It takes place when the fuel burns before the piston reaches
the cylinder bottom. ……………………….....................

3 The various kinds of petrol are distinguished by their... ……………………….....................

4 In this process the molecular chains of petrol are modified

to increase its octane value. ……………………….....................

5 It is a well-known aromatic hydrocarbon. ……………………….....................

6 They are added to petrol to increase the octane value. ……………………….....................

117

03_Tests Unit.indd 117 21-03-2013 10:54:50

 teacher’s book

Class ...................... Date ................................. Student ..............................................................................................................

Unit 24 Test – Kinds of energy & energy sources

Ex 1 Mark the following statements as True or False, then underline

the mistakes in the false sentences and write the corrections on the dotted lines.
1 T F Energy exists in two forms, as either mechanical
or kinetic energy. ........................................

2 T F Kinetic energy is the energy of position. ........................................

3 T F Kinetic energy is stored energy. ........................................

4 T F Stored energy can be liberated and transformed

into kinetic energy. ........................................

5 T F The chemical energy of the fuel is kinetic energy. ........................................

6 T F Fuel chemical energy is released

by the combustion process. ........................................

Ex 2 Fill in the gaps by using the given words.

them – the – there – fuels – can – cannot/can’t – known – were

………………............ are different types of energy and each of ………………............ can be converted into
another type: from chemical into thermal, into mechanical, etc. While energy ………………............

continuously be transformed, some of the primary energy sources ………………............ continuously

be replaced by Nature.
These are ………………............ as non-renewable energy sources and consist of fossil ………………............ :
coal, oil, natural gas. Fossil fuels are found in deposits which ………………............ created over many
thousands of years, from ………………............ chemical transformation of unicellular plants and
animals under the ground.

Ex 3 Answer the questions by writing complete sentences.

1 What is energy?
2 What form of energy is electrical energy?
3 What do we need energy sources for?
4 What is a heat engine? Give a definition.
5 Which is the best known of greenhouse gases?
6 When is it given off?

Ex 4 Choose the correct option.

1 Stored energy is:
a. kinetic energy.
b. chemical energy.
c. potential energy.

118

03_Tests Unit.indd 118 21-03-2013 10:54:50

 UNIT testS

2 Renewable energy sources are:

a. ever-diminishing.
b. continuously renewed by Nature.
c. produced by man.
3 Coal, oil and natural gas are:
a. produced by Nature in a short time cycle.
b. ever-increasing.
c. non-renewable energy sources.
4 A prime mover is:
a. a primary energy source.
b. an energy converter.
c. a renewable energy source.
5 Solar panels produce mechanical energy from:
a. natural power.
b. fossil fuels.
c. electrical energy.
6 The primary energy types derive from:
a. another type of energy.
b. kinetic energy.
c. an energy source.
7 The greenhouse effect is generated because:
a. the Sun’s heat escapes from the atmosphere.
b. the Sun’s heat is trapped in the atmosphere.
c. the Sun’s heat escapes into space.
8 The greenhouse effect
a. makes our planet colder.
b. makes our planet lighter.
c. makes our planet warmer.

Ex 5 Choose the correct words to fill in the gaps.

1 Solar panels are prime movers …………………… collect sunlight. who / what / which
2 Water wheels convert the natural power
of water …………………… mechanical energy. for / of / into
3 A hydro-turbine engine uses water …………………… drive its wheel. to / of / for
4 A fuel is a material …………………… producing heat
or other forms of energy. to / for / of
5 The various types of energy are classified …………………… primary
or secondary types. has / as / like
6 The energy stored in fuels is released …………………… a combustion
process. through / into / as

119

03_Tests Unit.indd 119 21-03-2013 10:54:50

 teacher’s book

Class ...................... Date ................................. Student ..............................................................................................................

Unit 25 Test – Heat energy & heat engines

Ex 1 Mark the following statements as True or False, then underline

the mistakes in the false sentences and write the corrections on the dotted lines.
1 T F The different types of energy can be completely converted
into heat. ........................................

2 T F Heat can be completely converted into another type of energy. ........................................

3 T F A heat engine converts more than 40% of the fuel’s energy

into mechanical work. ........................................

4 T F The heat energy which is not used to move the car

is dispersed into the surrounding air. ........................................

5 T F The less heat energy converted into mechanical work,

the less efficient the engine. ........................................

Ex 2 Choose the correct option.

1 Combustion is:
a. a physical reaction.
b. a gaseous process.
c. a chemical reaction.
2 Carbon monoxide is produced in the combustion process when:
a. there is too much oxygen in the combustion chamber.
b. there is the correct amount of oxygen in the combustion chamber.
c. there is too little oxygen in the combustion chamber.
3 Electric motors transform:
a. mechanical into electric energy.
b. electric into mechanical energy.
c. electric energy into heat.
4 The steam engine invented by James Watt was:
a. an external combustion engine.
b. an internal combustion engine.
c. an electric engine.
5 The moving parts of internal combustion engines are operated by:
a. a steam flow.
b. a flow of electricity.
c. a flow of exhaust gases.

120

03_Tests Unit.indd 120 21-03-2013 10:54:50

 UNIT testS

Ex 3 Complete the text with the words given in scrambled order.

inside – outside – working fluid – internal – external – mechanical work –
exhaust – steam turbines

Heat engines are given this name in this way because they convert thermal energy or heat into
……………………………................... . They are classified into two groups: internal and ……………………………..............

combustion engines. In external combustion engines, the combustion process takes place in a
boiler …………………………….............. the engine.
In internal combustion engines, combustion takes place in a combustion chamber
…………………………….............. the engine. The steam engine was invented by James Watt in 1765 and
today’s ……………………………........................ are external combustion engines. Reciprocating engines and
gas turbines are …………………………….............. combustion engines.
The moving parts of the engine, turbine blades and pistons, which transform thermal energy
into work, are moved by the action of a working fluid. Steam is the …………………………….............. that
moves the rotor blades in steam turbines; a flow of …………………………….............. gases from the
combustion process drives the pistons of reciprocating engines and the rotor of a gas turbine.

Ex 4 Answer the questions by writing complete sentences.

1 How is thermal energy produced on a molecular level?
2 What are hydrocarbons chemically made up of?
3 Why are hydrocarbons excellent fuels?
4 What happens between oxygen and the hydrocarbons in the fuel
in the combustion process?
5 Which gas is produced in a burning process when fuel oxidation is complete?
6 What kind of energy is produced in a combustion process?
7 Where does this energy come from?
8 What does a heat engine do with thermal energy?

Ex 5 Fill in the gaps.

During the burning process, fossil fuels release …………………………….............. into the atmosphere. This
gas contributes to the …………………………….............. effect, through which the Sun’s
…………………………….............. is trapped in the lower layers of the atmosphere, making the Earth’s
surface ever ……………………………............... .

121

03_Tests Unit.indd 121 21-03-2013 10:54:50

 teacher’s book

Class ...................... Date ................................. Student ..............................................................................................................

Unit 26 Test – Radio communication on board

Ex 1 Fill in the table.

Channel 16 is used for ………………………………………………........…………………………………..…………………………………

Channel 13 is used worldwide for ……………………………………………………..........…………………………

navigation.

Channel 70 is used for ………………………………………………........…………………………………..…………………………………

Channel 68 is used in Italy for …………………………………………………………..........……………………….......

Ex 2 Write the full name for these acronyms.

VHF ………………………………………………………………………………………..........…………………………………………………….....….......

ETA ………………………………………………………………………………………..........…………………………………………………….....….......

CRS ………………………………………………………………………………………..........…………………………………………………….....….......

ETD ………………………………………………………………………………………..........…………………………………………………….....….......

SAR ………………………………………………………………………………………..........…………………………………………………….....….......

RT ………………………………………………………………………………………..........…………………………………………………….....….......

VTMS ………………………………………………………………………………………..........…………………………………………………….....….......

MSI ………………………………………………………………………………………..........…………………………………………………….....….......

Ex 3 Answer the questions.

1 What is a ship’s call sign made up of and what is it?
2 Who assigns the call sign and when?
3 Why is the call sign recognised all over the world?
4 What is the MMSI number and when is it used?
5 What is the SMCP and why was it introduced?
6 When is the use of the SMCP particularly important and why?

122

03_Tests Unit.indd 122 21-03-2013 10:54:50

 UNIT testS

Ex 4 Fill in the gaps with the given words.

distance – hours – bow – North – miles – knots – bearing – degrees
1 Sandbank in position 20 degrees 34 minutes …………………….. , 061 degrees 24 minutes West.
2 My position is: …………………….. one-three-seven degrees true from Bushy Lighthouse;
…………………….. two four decimal three miles.
3 Buoy 060 degrees on your port …………………….. .
4 My present course is 050 …………………….. to Dover Buoy.
5 My position is 5.6 ……………………..from Sulley Point.
6 My present speed is 13 decimal 5 …………………….. .
7 My ETA is 0500 …………………….. Local Time.

Ex 5 Indicate the correct message marker for each message.

1 Do you require a tug for berthing procedures? ……………...................……….

2 Dangerous obstruction in fairway approaching Milton docks. ……………...................……….

3 You must keep south of the fairway buoy. ……………...................……….

4 I require a pilot at cross hands pilot station. ……………...................……….

123

03_Tests Unit.indd 123 21-03-2013 10:54:51

 teacher’s book

Class ...................... Date ................................. Student ..............................................................................................................

Unit 27 Test – Radio messages

Ex 1 Put the phrases in a routine ship-to-shore call in the correct order.

1..... 2..... 3..... 4..... 5..... 6....

a. OVER.
b. On Ch 16, Position report.
c. Suggest Channel 73.
d. Lucky 499912345, Lucky 499912345.
e. Swansea Coast Guard, Swansea Coast Guard,
f. THIS IS

Ex 2 Underline the mistakes in the following sentences and write

the corrections on the dotted lines.
1 We use VHF channel 73 to establish contact. ……………………….....................

2 After establishing contact we switch to a safety channel. ……………………….....................

3 Channel 13 must be left free for Distress, Urgency and Safety Calls. ……………………….....................

4 A ship is identified by her name, call sign or IMO number. ……………………….....................

5 When sailing in foreign waters we identify our ship twice. ……………………….....................

6 We use the code word OVER to signal the end of communication. ……………………….....................

Ex 3 Answer the questions.

1 What is the standard request for a readability report?
2 What kind of reception is indicated by the number five in the readability code?
3 On which two channels are ships required to maintain a listening watch?
4 What is the order of priority in the four kinds of maritime radiotelephony
communications?
5 What does the transmission of the signal MAYDAY indicate?
6 How often is this signal repeated?

Ex 4 Make up the ship’s call and message, using the following information
and repeating words where necessary.
The tanker Aegean Dolphin 299344678 is travelling through the Straits of Gibraltar. The ship has
struck a submerged rock, the hull is holed and the engine room is flooded. The ship is fully loaded
and now she is heavily leaning to one side. The captain sends a Mayday to the Coast Guard.
OVER – ten nautical miles south of the Rock of Gibraltar, position: 36°2’N, 5° 20 W – Aegean
Dolphin 299344678 – MAYDAY – holed and listing heavily, Engine Room flooded and taking
on water – thirty-six people on board, seas rough

124

03_Tests Unit.indd 124 21-03-2013 10:54:51

 UNIT testS

Distress call
……………………………………………………………………………………….....................…………………………………...................………………………

……………………………………………………………………………………….....................…………………………………...................………………………

……………………………………………………………………………………….....................…………………………………...................………………………

Distress message
Distress signal …………………………………………………….....................…………………………………...................………………

Name and MMSI/call

sign ……………………….....................…………………………………...................………………………

Position …………………………………………………….....................…………………………………...................………………

…………………………………………………….....................…………………………………...................………………

Nature of distress …………………………………………………….....................…………………………………...................………………

…………………………………………………….....................…………………………………...................………………

Other information …………………………………………………….....................…………………………………...................………………

…………………………………………………….....................…………………………………...................………………

End message …………………………………………………….....................…………………………………...................………………

Ex 5 Fill in the gaps.

An urgency message may only be sent on the authority of the ………………………............... , skipper or
other person responsible for the vessel. The Urgency signal ………………………............... is repeated
three times, indicating that the calling station needs to transmit a very urgent message about
the ………………………............... capability of the vessel or about a person’s safety. The safety signal
………………………............... is usually transmitted to ………………………............... stations and communicates
important navigational or ………………………............... warnings.

125

03_Tests Unit.indd 125 21-03-2013 10:54:51

 teacher’s book

Class ...................... Date ................................. Student ..............................................................................................................

Unit 28 Test – Reciprocating engines

Ex 1 Fill in the gaps.

The ……………………...................... or piston engine is the most common type of ……………………......................

combustion engine. In piston engines ……………………...................... energy is produced in a four-step

cycle. This consists of intake and compression, combustion and ……………………...................... of waste
gases, produced in the combustion process. This ……………………...................... can either be performed
in two or in four piston ……………………....................... .
There are two types of reciprocating engine: the petrol engine and the diesel engine. They are
also known as ……………………......................-ignition engines and ……………………......................-ignition engines.
In petrol engines the fuel-and-air ……………………...................... is set on fire by a ……………………...................... at
the end of the compression stroke. In ……………………...................... engines there is no need for spark
plugs, since the atomised fuel burns as soon as it enters the ……………………...................... and comes
into contact with the very hot compressed air.

Ex 2 Mark the following sentences as True or False, then underline

the mistakes in the false sentences and write the corrections on the dotted lines.
1 T F Piston engines burn a mixture of fuel and air
in a closed cylinder. ……………………..............

2 T F When air is compressed, the air-temperature is decreased. ……………………..............

3 T F In a petrol engine, the air-temperature is higher than

in a diesel engine. ……………………..............

4 T F Petrol engines operate in a four-stroke cycle. ……………………..............

5 T F In most petrol engines, fuel and air are mixed together

outside the combustion chamber. ……………………..............

6 T F Diesel engines intake only air. ……………………..............

Ex 3 Complete the crossword.

ACROSS
1. In a four-stroke piston engine, three piston strokes are like this.
2. Shaft that controls the opening of the valves.
3. This is the largest component of a reciprocating engine.
4. This is the most important piece of a reciprocating engine.
5. Number of the up-and-down movements of the piston in a cycle.
6. In a petrol engine, the mixture is ignited by an electric…

126

03_Tests Unit.indd 126 21-03-2013 10:54:51

 UNIT testS

DOWN
1. A tube in which the pistons move up and down.
2. Used to fill the gap between the piston and the cylinder wall.
3. It converts the pistons’ reciprocating movement into rotary motion.
4. Fuel and air were mixed here.
5. Heavy disc at one end of an engine shaft.
6. They spray diesel fuel into the combustion chamber.

2 3

1 4

5 2

R
3 6
C

E
4 5

Ex 4 Talk about the diesel engine and answer the questions

by writing complete sentences.
1 In the working cycle of a 4-stroke diesel engine, in what steps or phases
is mechanical power produced?
2 Which part of the engine transforms heat into mechanical work and when?
3 In the working cycle of a 4-stroke diesel engine, how many times does
the piston reciprocate to complete a cycle?
4 What is compressed in the combustion chamber of a diesel engine?
5 Where and when does the fuel mix with air in a diesel engine?
6 What does the “direct fuel injection system” help to reduce?

127

03_Tests Unit.indd 127 21-03-2013 10:54:51

 teacher’s book

Class ...................... Date ................................. Student ..............................................................................................................

Unit 29 Test – Turbine engines

Ex 1 Answer the questions by writing complete sentences.

1 What are the main advantages of steam turbines over diesel engines?
2 Indicate at least two disadvantages arising from the application of turbine engines
to ship propulsion.
3 What are the two essential functional parts of a steam turbine engine?
4 What is the function of a steam distributor?
5 In which part of the engine is mechanical energy produced?

Ex 2 In what parts of a gas turbine do these working steps occur? Fill in the gaps.
1 The air kinetic energy is increased in the ……………………...................... by adding pressure energy.
2 The fluid receives heat energy as it burns with the fuel in the ……………………....................... .
3 The heat energy of the hot gases is converted back into kinetic energy
by the ……………………...................... blades.
4 The efflux of high velocity gases which is generated is partly used to operate
the ……………………......................, while the remaining energy can be used for useful work
to operate machinery.

Ex 3 Complete the text with the missing words.

Nowadays, steam turbines are used in ……………………...................... plants, such as electric
……………………...................... stations, and very few are still found on board ship. Gas turbines are used
in many ……………………...................... vessels, in some container ships and fast ferries.
Both gas turbines and piston engines have a .............-step working cycle, but the steps follow one
after the ……………………...................... in the cylinders of a diesel engine, while they are performed at
the same time in the different parts of a gas turbine. In fact, the gas turbine engine eliminates
the ……………………...................... idle strokes, because combustion occurs continuously.

Ex 4 Underline the mistakes in the following sentences and write

the corrections on the dotted lines.
1 A steam turbine is an internal combustion engine. ……………………......................

2 The steam flow enters the turbine through the moving elements
of the engine. ……………………......................

3 After entering the engine, steam has a high pressure

and a low velocity. ……………………......................

4 As steam expands, its velocity is reduced. ……………………......................

5 Impulse turbines have alternate rows of stationary

and moving blades. ……………………......................

6 Steam expands in the stationary parts of the engine. ……………………......................

128

03_Tests Unit.indd 128 21-03-2013 10:54:51

 UNIT testS

Ex 5 Choose the correct option.

1 Reaction hydraulic turbines work on the same principle as:
a. the steam flow.
b. the water wheel.
c. the windmill.
2 The sails of a windmill rotate:
a. in the same direction as the wind.
b. in the opposite direction to the wind.
c. like the blades of a water wheel.
3 The blades of the impulse hydraulic turbine rotate:
a. in the same direction as the water current.
b. in the opposite direction to the water current.
c. like the sails of a windmill.
4 Impulse turbines work on the same principle as:
a. the steam flow.
b. the water wheel.
c. the windmill.
5 A gas turbine is:
a. an internal combustion engine.
b. an external combustion engine.
c. an outside combustion engine.
6 The hot gases produced in the combustion process:
a. are used to drive the turbine blades.
b. are used to drive the compressor.
c. are discharged outside the engine.
7 The working fluid of a gas turbine is:
a. methane gas.
b. air.
c. hot expanding gases.
8 The working fluid of a steam turbine is:
a. hot expanding gases.
b. steam.
c. air.

Ex 6 Complete the text about steam turbines.

In the ……………………...................... turbine, steam expands totally in the ……………………...................... , where
the steam heat energy is converted into kinetic energy. Here steam loses pressure but acquires
……………………....................... .
In the reaction turbine, steam expands both in the ……………………...................... and in the moving
blades. Therefore, steam ……………………...................... is constantly reduced as the steam flow passes
through both sets of blades. Steam velocity, instead, is increased in the ……………………......................

blades.

129

03_Tests Unit.indd 129 21-03-2013 10:54:51

 teacher’s book

Class ...................... Date ................................. Student ..............................................................................................................

Unit 30 Test – The inert gas system

Ex 1 Answer the questions by writing complete sentences.

1 What is an inert gas?
2 What type of cargoes do oil tankers and chemical carriers carry?
3 What is inert gas obtained from?
4 What happens in a scrubbing and cooling tower?
5 What is the function of a deck water seal?
6 What is the function of a pressure-vacuum breaker?

Ex 2 Fill in the gaps.

In the ……………………...................... tanks which contain crude oil or petroleum by-products, a highly
………….............................. mixture of air and hydrocarbon ……………………...................... is formed. This
flammable mixture may catch ……………………...................... for many accidental reasons, as, for
example, a sudden ……………………...................... discharge. To ……………………...................... any accidental fire
or explosion from taking place in the cargo tanks on board oil ……………………...................... and
chemical carriers, the atmospheric air in the cargo tanks ……………………........ replaced by inert gas.
This gas contains such a ……………………...................... percentage of oxygen as to be unable to feed a
……………………...................... process.

Ex 3 Complete each sentence with a suitable verb in the correct form to express purpose.
1 Inert gas is used on board oil tankers ……………………...................... atmospheric air in the cargo
tanks.
2 Compressors are used ……………………...................... the inert gas to the desired pressure.
3 Inert gas is used on board ……………………...................... the atmosphere inert in the cargo tanks.
4 Since inert gas contains too little oxygen and is not safe to breathe, it is necessary
……………………...................... inert gas by ventilation with fresh air, before technicians can
inspect them.

Ex 4 Underline the mistakes in the following sentences and write

the corrections on the dotted lines.
1 The inert gas enters the deck seal under pressure when the system
is not in operation. ……………………..............

2 When the gas pressure is too low, the oil rises up the cylinder
of the pressure vacuum breaker and pushes the gas out into
the atmosphere. ……………………..............

3 The gas is sent to the cargo tanks at a pressure lower than

atmospheric pressure. ……………………..............

130

03_Tests Unit.indd 130 21-03-2013 10:54:51

 UNIT testS

4 When the gas pressure is too high, the oil rises up the gas inlet tube
of a pressure vacuum breaker and pushes the gas up into the pipeline. ……………………..............

Ex 5 Complete the crossword.

1 2

3
N O
1
E P

43
Z

4
D T

ACROSS
1. Industrial plants where inert gas is used for tank protection and pipeline cleansing.
2. A deck-water seal is a ...
3. It constantly monitors the oxygen content in the inert gas.
4. This filter absorbs the water moisture in the gas.

DOWN
1. The gas flows to the cargo tanks through this line of tubes.
2. They bring the gas to a temperature of minus 60/70 °C.
3. One of the main components of inert gas.
4. This is what some goods become on contact with the air.

131

03_Tests Unit.indd 131 21-03-2013 10:54:51

 teacher’s book

Class ...................... Date ................................. Student ..............................................................................................................

Unit 31 Test – The GMDSS

Ex 1 Answer the questions by writing complete sentences.

1 What does the acronym GMDSS stand for?
2 Why is it called a global system?
3 What is the GMDSS designed to ensure?
4 When did the GMDSS become fully operational?
5 What kinds of technology is the GMDSS based on?
6 Who can receive a distress call in the GMDSS system?
7 What is the INMARSAT?
8 Which are the Inmarsat regions?
9 What do we find in the Land Earth Stations located all around the globe?
10 Is there any Italian LES?
11 Which cargo vessels are requested to carry the GMDSS mandatory equipment?
12 Which passenger ships are requested to carry the GMDSS mandatory equipment?

Ex 2 Fill in the gaps.

Digital Selective Calling (……………………) is used to automate the transmission and ……………………......

of distress alerts sent via VHF, MF and HF ……………………. . In every message the DSC transmitter-
receiver automatically includes the ship’s identity with the …………………… number of the calling
ship. The DSC unit stores four different types of message. These may be distress, ……………………..... ,
safety or routine calls. At the coast station, ship-to-shore distress …………………… receive priority
handling and are routed to the nearest ……………………...... Coordination Centre (RCC). On board
ship, DSC receivers sound an …………………… when a distress call is received.

Ex 3 Complete the table about the GMDSS mandatory communication equipment.

1 The special buoy which automatically transmits the ship’s identity,
position and alarm call on the satellite radio frequency. …………………………..........

2 A portable Radar Transponder (receiver and transmitter) designed

to be used in lifeboats. …………………………..........

3 The overall term for weather reports, navigational warnings

and Search and Rescue information which can be transmitted
by navigational telex (NAVTEX). …………………………..........

4 This means of communication is designed to operate in the VHF

marine band in voice mode, allowing communications between
searching vessels and survivors in lifeboats. …………………………..........

132

03_Tests Unit.indd 132 21-03-2013 10:54:51

 UNIT testS

Ex 4 Fill in the table with the GMDSS sea areas.

Sea Area
1 This is the sea area which lies within the coverage
of an Inmarsat geostationary satellite. ……………………

2 This is the sea area which lies above 70° N and below 70° S. ……………………

3 This is a sea area approximately within 100-150 nautical miles. ……………………

4 This is the sea area over 150 miles from the coast where ships must
carry an Inmarsat earth station. ……………………

5 This is the sea area which lies within the radiotelephone coverage
of at least one VHF coast station. ……………………

6 This sea area lies within the radiotelephone coverage of at least one
MF coast station. ……………………

133

03_Tests Unit.indd 133 21-03-2013 10:54:51

 teacher’s book

Class ...................... Date ................................. Student ..............................................................................................................

Unit 32 Test – Integrated navigation

Ex 1 Answer the questions.

1 What is an Integrated Bridge System?
2 What is the role of the primary computer in an Integrated Bridge System?
3 What kind of information is continuously updated? (Give at least three examples)
4 Why can the number of workstations and monitors vary?
5 What do IMO safety requirements recommend in the case of failure
of an instrument or equipment?
6 What does ABS stand for and what is it?

Ex 2 Fill in the table.

A …………………………………….. gives gyrocompass bearings.
………………………………………… measure water surface speed.
………………………………………… measure SOG.
………………………………………… measure the distance between the keel and the seabed.
………………………………………… measure wind direction and speed.
………………………………………… indicates stationary or moving objects near the ship.
………………………………………… indicates the ship’s position using information
from a satellite.
………………………………………… Navigational telex.

Ex 3 Underline the mistakes in the following sentences and write

the corrections on the dotted lines.
1 ARPA stands for Automatic Range Plotting Aids. ……………………….....................

2 An ARPA target is measured by range and speed from

one’s own ship. ……………………….....................

3 The ARPA system sounds an echo sounder when there is any

danger of collision with another ship. ……………………….....................

4 The system calculates the necessary and possible manoeuvres

needed to cause a collision. ……………………….....................

5 These manoeuvres are known as trick manoeuvres. ……………………….....................

6 The system chooses the most suitable manoeuvre

to avoid collision. ……………………….....................

134

03_Tests Unit.indd 134 21-03-2013 10:54:52

 UNIT testS

Ex 4 Fill in the gaps.

The essential task of the ………………………………………… (OOW) is to ensure the ship’s safe navigation.
This means that bridge workstations display a series of ………………………………………… and
………………………………………… alarms. The OOW should always “…………………………………………” an alarm and
take action to adjust the indicated problem. The ship’s movement is also monitored by visual
observation from the ………………………………………… station or position, which allows the OOW a
“commanding view”. Integrated Bridge Systems also have a route planning workstation which
today is usually fitted with an ECDIS, specifically designed to display …………………………………………. .

Ex 5 Reorder the steps in planning a route on an ECDIS.

(No. 6 has already been done to help you)
1..... 2..... 3..... 4..... 5..... 6e 7..... 8..... 9.....
a. Enter a safety draft.
b. Establish a safety domain.
c. Visualise your route.
d. Check your whole route in detail.
e. Create your passage plan. (No. 6)
f. Enter your own ship’s draft and establish a safety contour based on your draft.
g. Save your route and export it to the workstation.
h. Check that you have the necessary up-to-date ENC charts.
i. Enter beam clearance.

135

03_Tests Unit.indd 135 21-03-2013 10:54:52

 teacher’s book

Key to tests

Unit 1 – The main parts of a ship 6 When you go across the ship from side to
side you go abeam.
Ex 1 Complete the crossword. One definition
has been inserted to help you. (4 marks, Ex 4 Underline the mistakes in the following
0.5 for each answer) sentences and write the corrections on the
dotted lines. (6 marks)
1
B 1 The hull is divided horizontally
2 3
O B O W by bulkheads. decks
T A 2 In a liquid cargo ship, the hull
T
4
S
5
S T E R N is divided into holds. tanks
6
P O R T E 3 The double bottom tanks are
M A R
used to contain fresh water
R
7
H U L L
and ballast. fuel
4 The superstructure is the
B I
permanent housing below deck. above
O N
8 5 The hull is divided vertically
M A I N D E C K by decks. bulkheads
R 6 The part below the surface of
9
A M I D S H I P S the water under the waterline
is known as the upper works. bottom
Ex 2 Write the names of the parts of a ship to
Ex 5 Answer the questions by writing
label the diagram. Item 5 has been inserted
complete sentences. (6 marks)
as an example. (8 marks)
1 The fore part of the hull is the bow, the
central part is the amidships and the aft part
1
is the stern.
2 3 2 The central line is an imaginary vertical
4 4 4 4 plane which divides the hull into two halves/
5 sides.
8 6 6 E.R. 6 6 7
3 The right side is called the starboard, the
9 9 9 9 left side is called the port.
4 The waterline is a line on the ship’s sides
1 Bridge superstructure parallel to the surface of the water.
2 Poop 5 The part of the hull above the waterline is
3 Forecastle called the upper works, the part below the
4 ’Tween decks waterline is the bottom.
5 Engine Room 6 On dry cargo ships the cargo space is
6 Holds divided into holds.
7 Fore peak tanks
8 After peak tanks
9 Double bottom tanks Unit 2 – Ships’ measurements
Ex 3 Refer to the ship diagram in Ex 2 and
and specifications
complete the sentences using once each of Ex 1 Label the diagrams about the ship’s
the following words. (6 marks) dimensions. (8 marks)
1 The bridge superstructure is aft of the 1 Length between perpendiculars
forecastle. 2 Length at the waterline
2 Towards the bow is forward. 3 Length overall/overall length
3 The bridge superstructure is above the main 4 Freeboard
deck. 5 Air draft
4 The engine room is located amidships. 6 Beam/extreme breadth
5 The holds are situated below the ’tween 7 Draft
decks. 8 Depth

136

04_KeyTest.indd 136 21-03-2013 11:12:50


Ex 2 Write the definitions. (6 marks)
1 Displacement
It refers to the weight of the ship.
2 Deadweight
Weight of the cargo that a ship can carry/The
ship’s maximum carrying capacity.
3 Light displacement
Weight of the unloaded ship.
4 Tonnage
Measure of the internal volume of the ship.
5 Gross tonnage
Volume of all closed spaces on board ship.
6 Net tonnage
Volume of the earning spaces on board ship
(holds and passengers’ cabins).
Ex 3 Choose the correct option. (5 marks)
1c, 2a, 3c, 4b, 5a
Ex 4 Underline the mistakes in the following
sentences and write the corrections on the
dotted lines. (8 marks)
1 The longest dimension for
measuring a ship is the length
between perpendiculars. shortest
2 The extreme breadth is
sometimes indicated as the draft. beam
3 The depth is the horizontal
distance between keel and the
main deck. vertical
4 The freeboard is the vertical
distance between the load line
and the main deck. waterline
5 Deadline is the ship’s maximum
carrying capacity. Deadweight
6 Gross tonnage refers to the
ship’s earning capacity. Net
7 If the ship needs the assistance of
a pilot, she has to pay towage fees. tug
8 The International Tonnage
Certificate is determined by an
IALA formula. IMO
Ex 5 Complete the specifications chart with
the following items. (3 marks, 0.5 for each
answer)
Ocean Princess 3
Builder Cuthbert & Sons
Length oa 79.40 m
Breadth 13.65 m
Draft 4.00 m
DWT (Deadweight) 1,600 t
GT (Gross tonnage) 1,250
Main engines output 11,000 kW
Service speed 12.5 knots
04_KeyTest.indd 137
key to tests
Unit 3 – Ship classification
Ex 1 Answer the questions by writing
complete sentences. (10 marks)
1 They are used for commercial
transportation providing a profit for the
shipping companies.
2 The two main categories of merchant ships
are passenger ships and cargo ships.
3 There are two kinds of passenger ships
in use today: the cruise ship and the
ferry.
4 They can be divided into two basic types:
liquid or dry cargo ships, depending on the
type of cargo they carry.
5 Refrigerated ships carry perishable goods
like meat, fruit or dairy produce, because
they have refrigerated holds.
6 They are often carried in bulk on dry bulk
carriers.
7 Dredgers are used to drag the sea bottom.
8 “Unrestricted navigation” means that a ship
can sail on the high seas and at any period of
the year.
9 An OBO ship can carry both dry bulk cargo,
such as grain or ore, and crude oil.
10 Crude oil is carried on crude oil
tankers.
Ex 2 Complete the following definitions using
the words given in scrambled order.
(10 marks)
1 Boats are small open vessels.
2 Boats are suitable for inland navigation.
3 Boats are suitable for sailing distances less
than 6 nautical miles.
4 Boats are used for lifeboats, coastal fishing,
water sports.
5 Ships are of a considerable size.
6 Ships are propelled by an engine.
7 Ships are equipped to carry goods,
passengers, vehicles on the open sea.
8 Ships can sail variable distances from the
coast.
Ex 3 Underline the mistakes in the following
sentences and write the corrections on the
dotted lines. (6 marks)
1 Buoyancy is the ship’s
capability to sink. float
2 Stability is the ship’s
capability to lose her balance
after being inclined. regain
3 Impermeability is the ship’s
capability to change her
course. Manoeuvrability
137
21-03-2013 11:12:50
 teacher’s book
4 Sea-kindliness means that
the rolling movements of
the ship are fast. slow
5 Variability is the ship’s ability
to sail at a given speed. Movability
6 Seaworthy means that the ship
is unsuitable for navigation. suitable
Ex 4 Fill in the table. (4 marks)
1 The Italian classification authority
Registro Italiano Navale
2 The British classification authority
Lloyd’s Register of Shipping
3 International Convention for Safety
of Life at Sea
SOLAS
4 Navigation notation indicates
the distance ships can sail from the coast
5 The ship’s identity card
Certificate of Registry
6 Distinctive number or letters is also
known as
call sign
7 International Tonnage Certificate
the ship’s gross and net tonnage
8 The Load Line Certificate indicates
the minimum freeboard after loading
UNIT 4 – Shipbuilding
Ex 1 Rewrite the following sentences in the
passive form. (6 marks)
a First the keel is built.
b Finally, the superstructure is installed.
c After this, work is begun on building the ship.
d First of all, the working plans are approved by
the classification society.
e Then the side framing and bulkheads are
erected.
f Next, the bottom with its plating is
laid out.
Ex 2 Now put the sentences in the correct
order to indicate the basic building steps.
(3 marks)
1d, 2c, 3a, 4f, 5e, 6b
Ex 3 Complete the text with the missing verbs
given in scrambled order. (6 marks)
Ships are built in shipyards. Shipyards are
located near the sea to allow vessels to be
launched from the building ways. Usually,
ships are launched when about two-thirds are
completed.
138
04_KeyTest.indd 138
Shortly before launching, the propeller and
the engines are installed. As the ship is
launched, she is christened by breaking a
bottle of champagne on her hull. Then the
ship is towed to the outfitting pier, where the
outfitting work is carried out.
Next the ship is taken for a trial trip, then she
is finally delivered to the owner.
Ex 4 Match each term with its definition.
(7 marks)
1g, 2e, 3d, 4f, 5c, 6b, 7a
Ex 5 Answer the questions by writing
complete sentences. (8 marks)
1 A naval architect draws the ship’s design
according to the owner’s requirements.
2 The classification society registers and
classifies the ship after ascertaining that she is
seaworthy and suitable to carry the number
of passengers or the cargo she has been
designed to carry.
3 Outfitting work includes completing the
installation of the propulsion and auxiliary
machinery, with the electric system and the
installation of navigating and radio
equipment.
4 The owner decides upon the vessel type, its
cargo and passenger capacity, its speed and
maximum draft.
5 The qualified surveyors make constant
controls during the building process to make
sure that the ship is being built to the
standards of the classification society.
6 Ships are built and repaired in shipyards.
7 Double bottoms are tested for tightness
before the vessel is launched.
8 During the trial trip, the ship and her
equipment are thoroughly tested. The ship is
operated at varying speeds to check the
maximum power and measure fuel
consumption.
UNIT 5 – Visual & sound signals
and communication codes
Ex 1 Complete the following definitions.
(6 marks)
1 IMO stands for
International Maritime Organisation.
2 An Aldis lamp is used to send
visual signals.
3 To make a sound signal we use
a siren, whistle or bell.
21-03-2013 11:12:50

4 Each letter or number is made up of a series
of dots and dashes in the
Morse code.
5 Pennant-shaped flags are used to signal
numbers.
6 The meaning of each flag is indicated in the
International Code of Signals.
Ex 2 Mark the following sentences as True or
False, then underline the mistakes in the false
sentences and write the corrections on the
dotted lines. (6 marks)
1 (T)
2 (F) Nowadays the Engine Officer
is usually responsible for the radio
department on board ship. Deck Officer
3 (F) In the past, messages were
transmitted by radio telegraphy
using the flag code. Morse code
4 (T)
5 (F) The phonetic code for R
is ROGER. ROMEO
6 (F) The main language used
for radio communications is
Italian. English
Ex 3 Answer the questions. (6 marks)
1 To communicate with other ships or shore
stations where people may speak a different
language.
2 It is now regulated by the IMO, the
International Maritime Organisation.
3 The code gives information on the various
ways of signalling (instruments and methods)
and contains tables indicating, for example,
the Morse code, the different kinds of flags
and phonetic tables.
4 These can be used for transmitting letters,
numbers or even coded messages.
5 The “O” flag also stands for “Man
Overboard”.
6 Today, English is the language used for
communications between ships of different
nationalities.
Ex 4 Write the full form of these numbers.
(6 marks)
a 3,422 three thousand four hundred and
twenty-two
b 1.45 one point four five
c 226 two hundred and twenty-six
d 0.37 zero or nought point three seven
e 22,402 twenty-two thousand four hundred
and two
f 1,436,000 one million four hundred and
thirty-six thousand
04_KeyTest.indd 139
key to tests
Ex 5 Listen to your teacher and complete the
following document. (6 marks)
Name of ship Call sign
A WHALE BUAU7
A.B. DUBLIN V2BL4
AZURE RHAPSODY CQVP
UNIT 6 – The IALA Buoyage System
& ship navigation lights
Ex 1 Answer the questions by writing
complete sentences. (8 marks)
1 The acronym IALA stands for International
Association of Lighthouse Authorities.
2 In 1976 the IALA unified the world’s
buoyage system, putting an end to the 30
dissimilar systems existing at the time.
3 The present system consists of six types of
buoys or marks: lateral marks, cardinal marks,
isolated danger marks, safe water marks,
special marks and wreck marks.
4 They can have different shapes, different
colours and top marks.
5 You find buoys near the coast, on the edges
of channels and fairways at the entrance to
ports, because their general purpose is to
ensure the safety of ships navigating near the
coast.
6 Yes, safe water marks have vertical stripes.
7 Special marks indicate an area that is used
for special purposes, for example, a
waterskiing area, or the position of pipelines
and sewerage pipes.
8 Lateral marks indicate the port-hand side
and the starboard-hand side of a channel or
harbour.
Ex 2 Which is Which? Indicate the correct
type of buoy for each purpose. (4 marks)
1 They indicate the position of a hazard to
shipping. Isolated danger marks
2 They indicate the edges of a channel.
Lateral marks
3 They indicate that there is deep water
around them. Safe water marks
4 They indicate the safe side on which to pass
a danger. Cardinal marks
Ex 3 Which is Which? Indicate the correct type
of buoy for each type of topmark. (6 marks)
1 They can have a red sphere as a topmark.
Safe water marks
2 They have a red can as a topmark. Port-hand
marks
139
21-03-2013 11:12:50
 teacher’s book

3 Their topmark is two black cones with their
bases together. East cardinal mark
4 They have two black spheres as a topmark.
Isolated danger mark
5 They have a green cone as a topmark.
Starboard-hand mark
6 Their topmark is two black cones pointing
downwards. South cardinal mark
Ex 4 Choose the correct option. (6 marks)
1c, 2a, 3c, 4b, 5c, 6b
Ex 5 Complete the paragraph about ships at
night. (6 marks)
Vessels which navigate at night must have
navigation lights, so that other vessels can see if
there is a danger of collision and take action to
avoid it. All vessels show a green light on the
right side of the ship (starboard) and a red light
on the left (port) side. They must show a white
stern light (behind or astern). The red and
green lights mentioned are called sidelights.
Ships must also show at least one masthead
light on the high mast. Ships which are more
than 50 m long must have two masthead lights.
UNIT 7 – Geographical coordinates
Ex 1 Answer the questions by writing
complete sentences. (10 marks)
1 We use geographical coordinates to locate
a place on the Earth’s surface.
2 The Equator divides the Earth into two
hemispheres.
3 Europe is located in the northern hemisphere.
4 The Equator is the Prime Parallel.
5 The meridian running through Greenwich
in London is the prime meridian.
6 The latitude of a place is its distance from
the equator.
7 The longitude of a place is its distance from
Greenwich meridian.
8 The latitude of the North Pole is 90° North.
9 The longitude of Greenwich is 0°.
10 The 180° meridian is called the Anti-
meridian and it is located in the Pacific Ocean;
for example, it runs through the Fiji Islands.
Ex 2 Mark the following sentences as True or
False, then underline the mistakes in the false
sentences and write the corrections on the
dotted lines. (6 marks)
1 (T)
2 (T)
3 (F) There are 180 meridians. 360
4 (T)
5 (F) Longitude is indicated as
North or South of Greenwich. East or West
6 (F) Parallels are larger as
they get nearer to the poles. smaller. They
are larger as
they get to the
Equator
Ex 3 Choose the correct option. (6 marks)
1a, 2c, 3a, 4b, 5a, 6b
Ex 4 Fill in the table. (8 marks)
Nautical mile
Unit of measurement for distances at sea
1,853 metres
Length of a nautical table
Number of time zones
24
Degrees of longitude of each time zone
15°
Time zone 0 is
Greenwich
The speed of a ship is measured in
Knots
1 nm/h
1 knot
It measures the ship’s speed
Log/speedometer
UNIT 8 – Navigational aids
and instruments
Ex 1 Mark the following sentences as True or
False, then underline the mistakes in the false
sentences and write the corrections on the
dotted lines. (10 marks)
1 (T)
2 (F) Magnetic or true north is
the point of the Earth’s axis where
all meridians converge. Geographic
3 (T)
4 (F) The continuous fluctuations
in the Earth’s magnetic field cause
the geographic poles to shift
their position. magnetic
5 (F) The gyrocompass always
indicates the magnetic north. true/geographic
6 (F) A magnetic compass
always indicates the
geographic north. magnetic
7 (T)
8 (T)
9 (T)
10 (F) When in a given area the
magnetic north is east of true north,
the variation is negative. positive

140

04_KeyTest.indd 140 21-03-2013 11:12:51


Ex 2 Fill in the table. (8 marks)
1 RADAR stands for...
Radio Direction And Ranging.
2 Type of radio frequencies used by Radar
systems.
Microwave Radio Frequencies
3 Ships use the time elapsed between emission
and return of the pulse signal to calculate...
the target distance.
4 The angle formed by the distance of a star
or planet above the horizon.
Altitude
5 Sonar stands for...
Sound Navigation and Ranging.
6 Speed of sound in water is around...
1,500 metres per second.
7 Bathymetric curves indicate...
the shape of the seabed.
8 Echo sounders are often used to locate
shoals of fish on board...
fishing boats.
Ex 3 Fill in the name of each instrument.
(7 marks)
1 Instrument used for determining direction
which always points to geographic north.
Gyrocompass
2 Instrument used for measuring distance and
position of target objects.
RADAR
3 Instrument used for scanning the various
levels of the seabed and producing maps of
the underwater relief.
Sonar
4 Instrument used for determining direction
by means of a magnetic needle that points to
magnetic north.
Magnetic compass
5 Instrument used for measuring the sea depth
and also locating the presence of shoals of fish.
Echo sounder
6 Instrument used for finding a ship’s speed
through the water and the distance covered.
Log/solcometer
7 Instrument used for measuring altitudes
and other angles.
Gyrocompass
Ex 4 Try to fill in the 5 gaps in the text. (5 marks)
Nowadays satellites are gradually replacing
transmitting stations on the Earth. Each satellite
emits microwave radio signals indicating its
position which are picked up by a GPS receiver.
GPS stands for Global Positioning System and it
currently has 31 satellites orbiting around the
Earth. This system allows us to calculate our
04_KeyTest.indd 141
key to tests
position extremely accurately anywhere on the
Earth’s surface. The receiver works out the time
delay for the signal to arrive and uses data
from 3 satellites to indicate our position as a
geographical point in latitude and longitude.
UNIT 9 – The Deck Department
Ex 1 Complete the table showing how a ship’s
crew is organized. (4 marks, 0.5 for each
answer)
1 Captain / Master
Highest authority on ship
2 Chief / First Officer / Mate
Head of a department
3 Second Officer / Mate
Assists the department head
4 Third Officer / Mate
Next in ranking
5 Boatswain / Bosun
Supervises ratings
6 Able Seamen
Ratings (full name for AS)
7 Ordinary Seamen
Ratings (full name for OS)
8 Cadet Officers
Officers in training
Ex 2 Match the documents on the left with
their description on the right. (7 marks)
1d, 2g, 3f, 4e, 5c, 6b, 7a
Ex 3 Choose the correct option. (4 marks)
1b, 2a, 3c, 4b
Ex 4 Underline the mistakes in the following
sentences and write the corrections on the
dotted lines. (5 marks)
1 The Second Mate plans the
daily maintenance programme. Chief Officer
2 The Bosun checks that the First
Officer carries out these orders. crew
3 ABs carry out painting duties
such as maintaining the ship’s
course. navigational
4 OS is the highest rank in the
Deck Department. lowest
5 ABs often have to wash and
sweep the deck. OSs
Ex 5 Answer the questions by writing
complete sentences. (8 marks)
1 A winch is used to pull in or let out rope.
2 Because they are strong, elastic and
resistant to the action of water.
3 A capstan is used to wind the ship’s anchor
cable.
141
21-03-2013 11:12:51
 teacher’s book
4 Capstans are replaced by a hydraulically or
pneumatically operated windlass on board
large ships.
5 Bollards are short vertical posts on the quay.
6 Dry goods are transferred by derricks,
cranes and conveyor belts.
7 A cargo ship is gearless when it is not fitted
with cargo gear.
8 RO/RO ships load cargo over ramps through
stern, bow or side ports.
Ex 6 Put the mooring instructions in the
correct order. (2 marks, 0.5 for each answer)
1d, 2c, 3b, 4a
(The instructions below are in the correct order.)
1 Single up forward, single up aft.
2 Let go forward! Let go aft!
3 All gone and clear.
4 Finished with manoeuvring stations.
UNIT 10 – The Engine Department
Ex 1 Complete the table showing how the
Engine Department is organized. (3 marks,
0.5 for each answer)
Head of the Engine
Department Chief Engineer
The person the head of the
Engine Department is
responsible to The Chief
Engineer is
responsible to
the Master
The two Officers below the
head in ranking Second Engineer,
Third Engineer
Two Engine Department
ratings Firemen,
Greasers
Ex 2 Answer the questions by writing
complete sentences. (5 marks)
1 The Chief Engineer is responsible for the
safe and efficient operation of the ship’s
engines and auxiliary machinery.
2 The Chief Engineer is responsible for safety
and prevention of pollution in the engine room.
3 The Third Engineer is responsible for repair
and maintenance/looks after the repair and
maintenance of all electrical equipment.
4 Engineer Cadets are training in the Engine
Room to complete their education under the
senior ranks.
5 Auxiliary machinery refers to all machinery on
board, except for the main engines and boilers.
142
04_KeyTest.indd 142
Ex 3 Write the function of each piece of
machinery. (8 marks)
1 Oil or water coolers
They cool oil or water.
2 Feed-water heaters (economisers)
They heat the boiler feed water.
3 The ballast pumping system
It pumps water in and out of ballast tanks.
4 Evaporators
They produce fresh water.
5 Engine shafts
They transmit engine power to the propeller.
6 Lifeboats
They provide safety.
7 Automatic pilot
It provides remote control of the rudder.
8 Electricity generators
They supply the ship with electrical power (and
lighting).
Ex 4 Underline the mistakes in the following
sentences and write the corrections on the
dotted lines. (6 marks)
1 The Master is the head
of the Engine Department. Chief Engineer
2 Engineer Officers regularly
update the Navigation
Logbook. Engine Room
3 The Engine Logbook contains
information on the operation
of engines, boilers and secondary
machinery. auxiliary
4 Firemen are responsible
for general oiling duties. Greasers
5 In the Logbook we find machinery
parameters such as frying oil and
lubricating oil consumption. fuel
6 The auxiliary engines provide
the ship’s propulsion. main
Ex 5 Complete the table about the Engine
Control Room (ECR) equipment. (8 marks)
Generator panel
Shows electrical parameters such as voltage
and load. Engineers can decide on how many
electricity generators to keep in operation.
Electrical switchboard
Controls the power supply to the various
machinery.
Voltmeter and ammeter
Show voltage and current flow for all major
equipment.
Alarm panel
Monitors tank levels, temperature and
pressure of machinery.
21-03-2013 11:12:51

Allows engineers to take action when an
alarm sounds.
Main engine controls
Indicate fuel oil and lubricating oil
consumption, speed, direction.
These data are recorded in the Engine Room
Logbook.
UNIT 11 – Describing technical
diagrams
Ex 1 Look at the pictures and complete the
sentences with the following verbs in the
correct form. Use each verb once. (7 marks)
Picture 1
a The diagram represents a piston pump.
b The pump chamber is fitted with discharge
and suction valves at the top and bottom.
Picture 2
The battery and the lamp are connected by
two lengths of copper wire.
Picture 3
A centrifugal pump consists of an impeller
which rotates inside a casing.
Picture 4
a The diagram shows the double-bottom of
ship.
b It contains a number of tanks.
c The double bottom is divided into a number
of tanks.
Ex 2 Fill in the gaps. (10 marks)
The lubricating oil system
The used lubricating oil drains to the
crankcase and then passes into the drain tank
through filters.
The drain tank is fitted with a purifier system
which consists of a heater and a centrifuge.
First the oil is heated in the heater, then it
passes through the centrifuge to be purified.
After purification, the oil is returned to the
drain tank at a point next to the suction
strainer.
Pressure pumps draw the oil through the
suction strainer and discharge it into the
cooler. From the cooler the oil passes through
the distribution branches to various parts of
the engine.
Ex 3 What happens to the lubricating oil
when it passes through the different parts of
the system? Complete the sentences.
(2 marks, 0.5 for each answer)
04_KeyTest.indd 143
key to tests
1 When it passes through filters and strainers,
the oil is filtered.
2 When it passes through a heater, the oil is
heated.
3 When it passes through a cooler, the oil is
cooled.
4 When it passes through a cooler, the oil is
purified.
Ex 4 Use the given words to fill in the text
about the fuel oil system of a marine engine.
(7 marks)
Pumps draw the oil at low pressure from the
service tanks and discharge it into the heater.
A viscosity regulator is fitted at the heater
discharge.
Then the oil passes through a fine strainer
before going to the main fuel pump suctions
of the engine. A pressure control valve is
fitted in the system and any excess oil is
returned to the service oil tanks.
Ex 5 Answer the questions by writing
complete sentences. (4 marks)
1 The viscosity regulator controls the oil
temperature to maintain the oil viscosity
within close limits.
2 The change-over valve allows the operation
of the engine either on heavy-oil or on diesel
oil.
UNIT 12 – Pumps
Ex 1 Answer the questions by writing
complete sentences. (4 marks)
1 A pump is a hydraulic machine used to
move liquids or to give them pressure or
kinetic energy.
2 The pressure head is the pressure energy
that the pump adds to the liquid.
3 The other hydraulic measure used in
pump operation is the quantity of liquid
delivered.
4 Power for the pump can be provided by an
electric motor or a piston engine.
Ex 2 Fill in the gaps using the following
words. (8 marks)
Pumps are used on board ship to move liquids
or to give them pressure or kinetic energy.
There are three common types of pumps:
reciprocating pumps, gear-wheel pumps and
centrifugal pumps; each of these is used for a
different purpose.
Before choosing which pump to use we have
to consider a number of factors. Firstly, the
143
21-03-2013 11:12:51
 teacher’s book
quantity of liquid to be moved and the
pressure head; next, the viscosity of the liquid
and finally whether or not the liquid is
corrosive or contains solid particles in
suspension.
Ex 3 Fill in the gaps with the correct
prepositions. (8 marks)
1 The interlocking gear-wheels rotate inside a
casing.
2 Liquid is discharged through the delivery
outlet.
3 Liquid is forced to circulate by the vanes of
the impeller.
4 The piston moves up and down within the
chamber.
5 Liquid is drawn into the vacuum from the
suction tube.
6 Pressure is created on the liquid which is
forced out of the delivery tube.
Ex 4 Choose the correct option. (2 marks, 0.5
for each answer)
1c, 2a, 3a, 4c
Ex 5 Fill in the missing words to complete the
descriptions of the three main kinds of
pumps. Note that the same number indicates
the same word which is repeated. (8 marks)
CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS
They are used for: high 1 flow rates.
They give the liquid a: low 2 differential
pressure.
They are suitable for: low 3 viscosity liquids.
They provide an: even and 5 continuous
delivery. They 7 can be used for liquids
containing solid particles in suspension.
RECIPROCATING PUMPS
They are used for: low 1 flow rates.
They give the liquid a: high 2 differential
pressure.
They are suitable for: medium 3 viscosity
liquids.
They provide an: 6 uneven delivery especially
for the single-acting kind.
GEAR-WHEEL PUMPS
They are used for: low 1 flow rates.
They give the liquid a: low 2 differential
pressure.
They are suitable for: high 3 viscosity liquids
like 4 lubricating and fuel oils.
144
04_KeyTest.indd 144
They provide an: even and 5 continuous
delivery.
They 8 must/should not be used for liquids
containing solid particles in suspension.
UNIT 13 – Boilers
Ex 1 Fill in the gaps by using the given words.
(10 marks)
Water-tube boilers consist of a fire-proof
casing with a furnace at the bottom, a steam
drum at the top and water-drums at a lower
level. The drums are connected by banks of
tubes.
Other large tubes, called the downcomer
tubes, are located outside the furnace. They
feed the water drums with cool water, so that
convection currents make the water move
around the system.
The water drums and banks of tubes are
placed in the main flow of hot gases rising
from the furnace: so the heat of the hot gases
is transferred to the water in the tubes,
generating steam. The difference in density
allows the dry steam to collect in the steam-
drum.
Superheaters, located between the steam-
drum and the water-drums, make the steam
drier and more efficient.
Ex 2 Underline the mistakes in the following
sentences and write the corrections on the
dotted lines. (4 marks)
1 In a boiler, the furnace is located
at the bottom because hot gases
descend. rise
2 Water is cooled down when
it comes into contact with the
hot gases. heated
3 Downcomer tubes provide a
reservoir of relatively hot water. cool/cold
4 Economisers heat the feed-water
after it enters the boiler. before
Ex 3 Choose the correct option. (2 marks, 0.5
for each answer)
1a, 2c, 3b, 4b
Ex 4 Answer the questions by writing
complete sentences. (6 marks, 2 marks for
each answer: 1 mark for content, plus 1 mark
for grammar and syntax correctness)
1 Boilers are used to produce steam for
auxiliary services like distilling plants, the
galley and the laundry. Steam can also be
21-03-2013 11:12:51

used for driving items of auxiliary machinery
like the steam turbines, which operate the
cargo pumps on board crude oil tankers.
2 Steam is generated when the heat from the
hot gases produced in the furnace is
transferred to the water in the tubes.
3 Water is made to move around the system
under the effect of convection currents.
Ex 5 Match each name with its definition.
(8 marks)
1c, 2g, 3h, 4e, 5b, 6a, 7d, 8f
UNIT 14 – Condensers & evaporators
Ex 1 Fill in the gaps by using the given words.
(12 marks)
Most of the heat energy in exhaust steam can
be saved by condensing it and sending it back
to the boiler as hot feed-water. Rapid
condensation is provided by a condenser. The
main component of a condenser is a cooling
surface, made up of thin copper-nickel alloy
tubes.
Two separate circuits are involved in steam
condensation. The first is the cooling water
circuit, the second is the condensate circuit.
In the first circuit, a circulating pump provides a
fast flow of seawater through the bank of
tubes. In the second circuit, steam enters
through a steam inlet and, by flowing over the
tubes, transmits some of its heat to the liquid in
the tubes. A rapid drop in steam temperature
occurs, so that steam condenses and is collected
in the hot well as the condensate. A condensate
pump removes the condensate from the hot
well and sends it into the boiler. Since there is
no contact between the condensate and the
coolant, pure distilled water is produced, which
is ideal for feeding the boilers.
Ex 2 Answer the questions by writing
complete sentences. (6 marks)
1 A condenser produces pure distilled water.
2 A marine condenser uses seawater as the
cooling liquid.
3 Seawater is sent into the condenser by a
circulating pump.
4 The condensate is removed from the hot
well by a condensate pump.
5 The condensate is finally sent into a boiler
as boiler feed-water.
6 Today condensers are used for condensing
refrigerant gas in air conditioning systems,
and as components of refrigeration plants
04_KeyTest.indd 145
key to tests
and to maintain a low temperature in the
cargo holds where perishable goods – such as
meat, fish, fruit and vegetables – are stowed.
Ex 3 Mark the following sentences as True or
False, then underline the mistakes in the false
sentences and write the corrections on the
dotted lines. (12 marks)
1 (T)
2 (F) Heat exchangers perform an exchange
of heat between solids at different
temperatures. fluids
3 (F) Condensers and evaporators
operate the same heat transfer
operation. inverse/opposite
4 (F) In the evaporator the liquid
condenses by extracting heat
from an external fluid. evaporates
5 (T)
6 (T)
7 (T)
8 (F) First the seawater is heated
to boiling point and turned into
steam in the condenser. evaporator
9 (F) Then the steam rises into
the evaporator where it is condensed
producing the distillate. condenser
10 (T)
11 (F) Air ejectors (or vacuum
pumps) are used to increase
the pressure in the evaporation
chamber. reduce
12 (T)
UNIT 15 – The steam engine plant
Ex 1 Underline the five wrong words in the
text and write the correct ones on the dotted
lines. (5 marks)
There are two types of engines commonly
used nowadays: electric motors and heat
engines. The former produce mechanical
energy from light, the latter convert heat into
mechanical energy. Heat engines need a
source of mechanical energy.
They need a working liquid, whose heat they
absorb and convert into useful job. In a steam
engine plant the heat engine is a turbine and
the working fluid is water.
electricity – thermal – fluid – work –steam
Ex 2 Complete the sentences. (5 marks)
1 The engine is an energy converter.
2 Water converts into steam when it reaches
boiling point.
145
21-03-2013 11:12:51
 teacher’s book
3 At an oil refinery, crude oil is converted into
many different oil products.
4 Steam is converted/converts into water in
the condenser.
5 Thermal energy is converted into mechanical
work by heat engines.
Ex 3 Study the diagram representing a steam
engine plant and identify the components.
(4 marks, 0.5 for each answer)
Condensate pump P3
Economiser F
Condenser A
Main feed pump P1
Superheater C
Turbine G
Main circulating pump P2
Hot well B
Boiler furnace D
Ex 4 Fill in the gaps. (7 marks)
The main parts of a steam engine plant are
the boiler, the engine and the condenser.
Mechanical work is produced by using the
heat energy of steam as the working fluid.
First, water is heated and transformed into
steam. Then some of the heat energy of
steam is used to operate the turbine. Next the
remaining heat is cooled down and the steam
is turned back into water again.
Ex 5 Choose the correct option. (4 marks)
1c, 2b, 3c, 4a
Ex 6 Answer the questions by writing
complete sentences. (5 marks)
Suggested answers:
1 The main function of a marine steam
engine plant is to produce mechanical energy
to operate machinery.
2 In a steam engine plant, steam operates the
moving parts in the engine.
3 It is defined as the “working fluid” because
it is the source of the heat energy.
4 The basic areas of steam operation in this
plant are generation, expansion,
condensation and feed.
5 The steam receives its heat energy in the
boiler.
UNIT 16 – Nautical charts
Ex 1 Answer the questions by writing
complete sentences. (6 marks)
1 Ptolemy’s world maps (already) show the
Earth as a spherical surface. They also show
146
04_KeyTest.indd 146
the network of parallels and meridians
appearing on modern maps.
2 Because he used the Ptolemaic chart as a
basis for calculating his position.
3 Gerhardus Mercator is considered to be the
father of modern cartography.
4 In 1556 he produced a world chart by a
type of projection which goes under his
name. His projection method is still preferred
nowadays for drawing up nautical charts.
5 He plots the ship’s course and current
position on the working chart.
6 Great circles are the Equator and all meridians.
Ex 2 Fill in the table with the items given
below in scrambled order. (6 marks, 0.5 for
each answer)
Rhumb line A line joining two points
on the Earth’s surface which intersects the
meridians at a constant angle.
Great circle track A line following the
shortest route between 2 points on the
surface of a sphere.
Great circle The largest circle on the
Earth’s surface which passes through its
centre.
Small circle The arc of a small circle
which is NOT the shortest route between two
points.
Rhumb line Not used for ocean
crossings.
Great circle track Used for ocean crossings.
Ex 3 Underline the mistakes in the following
sentences and write the corrections on the
dotted lines. (6 marks)
1 As the Earth is spherical, it cannot
be represented on a spherical surface
without some distortion. flat
2 The line of a chart refers to the ratio
between real dimensions and the
size of the arc of the chart. scale
3 Nautical charts use Mercator
and astronomic projections. gnomonic
4 The Mercator is a hexagonal
projection. cylindrical
5 The physical constant used with
Mercator charts is called j c. mathematical
6 Gnomonic charts cannot include
more than one ocean because
of distortion. hemisphere
Ex 4 Complete the table by placing the
expressions in the correct place to identify the
characteristics of each type of chart. (4 marks)
21-03-2013 11:12:51

MERCATOR CHARTS
1 the most widely used in navigation
2 position, distance and direction are easily
determined
3 conformal
4 true shape of features is maintained
5 rhumb lines are plotted as straight lines
GNOMONIC PROJECTIONS
1 not useful as a working chart
2 distance and direction cannot be measured
directly
3 great circle routes are plotted as straight lines
Ex 5 Fill in the gaps. (8 marks)
Hydrographic surveyors compile nautical charts
by using sonar technology and considering
both the sea area and the shoreline. To show
all this information, nautical charts make use
of conventional symbols.
The IHO ensures that nautical charts are
standardized in various parts of the world.
Any corrections or updates to the chart are
reported in bulletins called Notice to
Mariners. Many charts today are produced as
ENCs to be used in Electronic Chart Display
and Information Systems, which are an
essential part of integrated navigation and
bridge systems.
UNIT 17 – Piloting & plotting
Ex 1 Underline the mistakes in the following
sentences and write the corrections on the
dotted lines. (6 marks)
1 When we take a bearing, we are
actually measuring the time between
north and our landmark. angle
2 We use a magnetic sounder to
read the values of the angle and
take a bearing. compass
3 The compass sounding is what the
ship’s compass reads at any time. heading
4 Before plotting compass bearings
on a nautical chart with a LOP, we
need to apply corrections for
variation and differentiation. deviation
5 If magnetic variation is to the West,
it is indicated with the (+) sign. East
6 To calculate magnetic deviation,
we need to use the ship’s own
landmark deviation tables. compass
Ex 2 Reorder the steps in taking a sextant
bearing. (6 marks)
1c, 2e, 3a, 4d, 5f, 6b
04_KeyTest.indd 147
key to tests
This method is called by bearing and distance.
1 Find out the height of the landmark on the
nautical chart.
2 Use the sextant to measure the angle a
between the top and the bottom of the
landmark.
3 Apply the formula to get the distance from
the object.
4 Use this distance to draw a circular LOP on
the nautical chart. 
5 Now take a compass bearing to get a
second line of position.
6 Where this second LOP crosses the circular
LOP, it is our exact position or fix.
Ex 3 Choose the correct option. (4 marks)
1c, 2a, 3c, 4b
Ex 4 Fill in the gaps by using the given words.
(10 marks, 0.5 for each answer)
First we locate our landmark on the chart,
then we take a compass bearing of it. This
compass reading will show the degrees and
minutes of the angle formed by our landmark
and the compass north.
Then we transfer this compass reading to the
chart. This is how we do. We place one arm
of our parallel ruler on the chart compass rose,
on the line indicating the degrees and
minutes shown by our compass reading. Then
we place the other arm of the parallel ruler
on our landmark and draw a line. This line is
our first LOP.
Next we draw a second LOP by choosing
another landmark and following the same
procedure. The point of intersection of the
two LOPS is the fix. This is the point on the
chart where our ship is. We indicate the fix by
drawing a circle around it and writing the
time alongside.
After that, we plot our course, drawing a
straight line from our fix to our chosen
destination. We place an edge of the parallel
ruler on the course line and the other edge
over the centre of the compass rose, where
we read the magnetic degrees of our course.
These degrees represent our course magnetic
heading. Finally we write this heading above
the course line.
Ex 5 Answer the questions by writing
complete sentences. (4 marks)
1 When we have nothing more than a single
landmark to fix the ship’s position, we can
take two sightings of the same landmark at
two different times.
147
21-03-2013 11:12:51
 teacher’s book
2 It is called a running fix because the ship
has “run” a certain distance during the time
interval between the two LOPs.
3 They are used to read the degrees of LOPs
and course lines on the chart compass rose
and to plot on the chart lines of position and
course lines which are parallel to the compass
readings. / They are used to plot lines of
position and course lines on nautical charts.
4 When you are plotting the course line, you
write a “C” to indicate the compass course,
referred to magnetic north, and a “T” to
indicate a true course, referred to geographic
north.
UNIT 18 – Business logistics
Ex 1 Write the Italian words regarding
logistics. (3 marks)
1 beni di consumo
goods / commodities
2 consumare
to consume
3 immagazzinamento
storage
4 efficienza di produzione
production efficiency
5 tenore di vita
standard of living
6 fonti di produzione
sources of production
Ex 2 Complete the definitions by using the
given words. (3 marks, 0.5 for each correct
gap-filling)
1 A limited movement storage system means
that people had to live close to the production
source and consume a narrow range of goods.
2 The principle of comparative advantage is the
principle at the basis of today’s international
trade.
3 Historically, transportation and inventory of
goods were traditionally managed separately.
4 Business logistics has introduced the new
concept of coordinated management to the
activities in question 3.
5 The professional organization of logistics
managers is known as the Council of Logistics
Management.
6 The supply chain management/process regards
the logistic interactions that take place within
a firm or between separate firms.
Ex 3 Write the names of the missing
components of a typical logistics system.
148
04_KeyTest.indd 148
(7 marks, 0.5 for each correct item)
1 customer service;
2 demand forecasting;
3 distribution communications;
4 inventory control;
5 material handling;
6 order processing;
7 parts and service support;
8 plant and warehouse site selection;
9 purchasing;
10 packaging;
11 return goods handling;
12 salvage and scrap disposal;
13 traffic and transportation;
14 warehousing and storage.
Ex 4 Underline the mistakes in the following
sentences and write the corrections on the
dotted lines. Note that in one sentence there
are two mistakes. (5 marks)
1 The various functional activities
such as transportation, etc. are
repeated very few times along
the supply channel. several
2 The physical supply channel
is the source and space gap
between a firm’s immediate
material sources and its
processing points. time
3 As well as transportation
and inventory control, there
are a number of “sustainable”
activities involved in the logistics
mix for each firm. “support”
4 Packaging must protect goods
during handling and purchasing. storage
5 Commodities like coal and
gravel especially need special
warehousing although do not need/
inventories are never made. always
Ex 5 Answer the questions by writing
complete sentences. (12 marks, 2 marks for
each answer: 1 mark for content, plus 1 mark
for grammar and syntax correctness)
1 Logistics is so important because it provides
the bridge between production and market
locations that are separated by time and
distance.
2 The supply chain finishes with the final
disposition of a product.
3 Inventories are an essential logistic activity
because they provide a buffer between
supply and demand maintaining product
availability for customers.
4 The term “materials management” refers to
21-03-2013 11:12:51

the physical supply channel or the time and
gap between a firm’s immediate material
sources and its processing points.
5 A “reverse logistics channel” is important
because products become obsolete, damaged
or non-functioning and are returned for
repair or disposal.
6 “Outsourcing” means sourcing from low
cost offshore locations.
UNIT 19 – The moving air
Ex 1 Fill in the gaps by using the given words.
(10 marks)
Meteorologists are trying to find a physical
model to explain the movement of air masses
around the Earth. Air masses are those parts
of the atmosphere which are homogenous in
temperature, humidity and pressure. They
form over large areas where environmental
conditions are stable. Air masses can be warm
or cold and dry or humid, depending on
where they form; for example, over a tropical
desert area they will be warm and dry.
The fact that these air masses move over the
surface of the Earth balances our climate
redistributing the Sun’s heat from warmer to
colder places. The most accepted model today
is known as convection circulation of the air.
Ex 2 Choose the correct option. (5 marks)
1c, 2a, 3c, 4b, 5a
Ex 3 Answer the questions by writing
complete sentences. (5 marks)
1 The factors determining the movements of
atmospheric air are temperature differences,
humidity and pressure and their reciprocal
effects.
2 Air pressure varies with temperature
because cold air is heavier than warm air and
has a higher pressure.
3 It varies with humidity because the more
water vapour there is in the air, the lighter it is.
4 Isobars are points/areas with the same
atmospheric pressure.
5 They are shown as rings around the high
and low-pressure centres.
Ex 4 Choose the correct option. (6 marks)
1b, 2a, 3b, 4b, 5a, 6c
Ex 5 Complete the definitions. (4 marks, 0.5
for each answer)
Main winds blow all year round in the same
direction.
04_KeyTest.indd 149
key to tests
The Polar Winds, the West Winds and the
Trade Winds are the main winds.
Monsoons are periodic winds.
Monsoons blow for six months from the sea
and for six months from the land to the sea.
The Bora, the Föhn, the Mistral and the
Sirocco are variable winds, since they only
blow periodically.
A cold front is formed when cold air
approaches and replaces rising warm air.
A warm front is shown by a line with red
semicircles.
A line with blue triangles shows a cold front.
UNIT 20 – Logistic services
Ex 1 Fill in the missing words in Pfohl’s
definition of “logistics”. (4 marks)
“Logistics must ensure that a recipient is
supplied from a point of origin in accordance
with his requirements with the correct product
(in quantity and variety), in the right
condition, at the right time and in the right
place at minimum cost.”
Ex 2 Fill in the table. (6 marks)
Logistic service providers Specialized companies for moving
products
TTS Transport, trans-shipping, storage
Another name for storage points Warehousing
The quickest transport system By air
Transhipment locations Hubs
Suitable for intercontinental Ocean shipping
movement of bulk cargoes
Ex 3 Use the following adjectives to write two
comparative and two superlative true
sentences about the different kinds of
carriers. (4 marks)
Adjectives: expensive – slow – fast – cheap
Kinds of carriers: air freight – rail freight –
sea freight
Ex 4 Answer the questions by writing
complete sentences. (10 marks)
1 Ocean shipping is suitable for the
intercontinental shipment of bulk cargo,
bulky goods and dangerous materials.
2 A refrigerated ship carries products like
meat or dairy produce. These kinds of goods
are perishable and need to be carried in
refrigerated holds.
3 Ferries carry cars and passengers.
4 Standard container units are more than 3
cubic metres with a loading capacity of 5 tons.
149
21-03-2013 11:12:51
 teacher’s book
5 A container unit has a loading capacity of 5
tons.
6 They are easily stowed and loaded and
unloaded. (2 marks)
7 The disadvantages are the cost of the
specially designed container ships and the
necessity for special port facilities. (2 marks)
8 Liner merchant ships are ships which run
regular services at stated times on a
pre-determined trade route and charge
previously advertised tariff rates.
Ex 5 Underline the mistakes in the following
sentences and write the corrections on the
dotted lines. (6 marks)
1 Liners do not operate on a fixed schedule
but can be hired for transport
anywhere in the world. Tramps
2 The Extra Cargo Shipping
Instructions provide the carrier
with details of the goods and
instructions on handling. Export
3 The bill of lading is issued by
the sender and accompanies the
goods to the port of discharge. carrier
4 The bill of lading is a record
of what kind of containers
are being transported. goods
5 The owner is responsible
for providing the special cranes
for unloading/loading
containerized ships. port authority
6 Combined transport aims to
transfer shipped goods with
the greatest number of
transhipment operations. smallest
UNIT 21 – Moving waters
Ex 1 Choose the correct option for each
sentence. (3 marks, 0.5 for each answer)
1 Three quarters of the Earth’s surface is
covered by water.
2 There is more water in the Southern
Hemisphere.
3 The greatest quantity of water is in the
Southern Hemisphere.
4 The large extensions of water between
continents are called oceans.
5 Lands enclose parts of oceans forming
smaller basins called seas.
6 Seas are connected to oceans.
150
04_KeyTest.indd 150
Ex 2 Complete the crossword. (8 marks)
  S    
1
  2
N
1
W A R M
  O       L    
  R
2
M O T I O N
  T   N
  H     D     I    
3 4
R
3
T E M P E R A T U R E
  R   N   Y   D
  N   S
  I
4
B A L T I C
  Y
Ex 3 Match the two parts of each sentence.
(8 marks)
1d, 2f, 3g, 4a, 5h, 6b, 7c, 8e
Ex 4 Answer the questions by writing
complete sentences. (4 marks)
1 The differences in temperature, salinity and
density determine the formation of water
masses which are different from each other.
2 They form the main ocean currents.
3 The main ocean currents transport
equatorial warm waters to the polar regions
and cold polar waters to the equatorial
regions, forming a system called the global
conveyor belt.
4 The Gulf Stream is a warm ocean current,
while the Labrador Current is a cold ocean
current.
Ex 5 Fill in the gaps. (7 marks)
The combined action of the Moon and the
centrifugal force of the Earth cause tides to occur.
Spring tides usually happen when the Moon is
full and the Sun and the Moon are aligned.
On the contrary, when the Sun and Moon are
perpendicular to each other, their forces do not
pull together and neap tides occur. Every day the
cycle of high and low tides is repeated with a
period of slack water occurring between tides.
UNIT 22 – The dead reckoning plot
Ex 1 Answer the questions. (11 marks, 2
marks for each answer: 1 mark for content,
plus 1 mark for grammar and syntax
correctness; 1 mark for answer 4)
25-03-2013 10:36:31

1 To plan his ship’s course, a navigator
uses nautical charts, radio bulletins
and weather maps referring to the areas
where the ship will be sailing.
2 The track is the ship’s planned course.
3 The planned track line is divided into
segments because there are points where
the ship has to change direction.
4 These segments are called the legs
of the track. (1 marks)
5 Junction points are points where the ship
changes direction.
6 The track looks like a broken line
on the chart.
Ex 2 Complete the text with the missing
words. (8 marks)
The term “dead reckoning” comes from
deduced reckoning, which was shortened
to ded reckoning by sailors. It was a method
established in the 18th century (and used
up to the early 20th century) to calculate
the ship’s position by making lots of
trigonometric calculations. Ded reckoning was
then modified to “dead reckoning”, which is
the term still used today.
Nowadays it indicates a technique/method to
geometrically determine a ship’s approximate
position by applying a vector representing
true course and speed to the last fix.
Ex 3 Fill in the table. (6 marks)
SOA stands for Speed of Advance
TR labels each leg of the track
DFT (Drift) speed in knots of the current
A circle represents a fix
Leeway movement of vessel due to winds
A semicircle represents DR position
Ex 4 Underline the mistakes in the following
sentences and write the corrections on the
dotted lines. (5 marks)
1 Plot a DR position for the speed
you obtain a fix. time
2 Plot a new wind line from each fix
as soon as this is plotted on the chart. course
3 Plot a new DR position at the time
of every course and/or compass
change. speed
4 Plot a corrected DR position if the
predicted course line proved wrong
and continue from the first plotted fix. last
5 Plot a DR position every month. hour
04_KeyTest.indd 151
key to tests
UNIT 23 – Petroleum
Ex 1 Answer the questions. (12 marks, 2 marks
for each sentence: 1 mark for content, plus 1
mark for grammar and syntax correctness; 1
mark only for very easy answer 1 and 4)
1 The main components of petroleum are
hydrogen and carbon. (1 marks)
2 Crude oil deposits are called oilfields.
3 To extract petroleum they drill an oil well.
4 The lightest hydrocarbon is natural/
methane gas, which has only one carbon
atom in its molecule. (1 marks)
5 Petroleum distillation is carried out in an oil
refinery / in a fractionating tower.
6 The heaviest petroleum distillates are heavy
oil and lubricating oils.
7 Heavier hydrocarbons have a higher
number of carbon atoms in their molecules.
Ex 2 Link and rewrite the pair of sentences
using the relative pronoun which. (4 marks)
1 Fossil fuels, which are the main industrial
fuels, are formed of hydrogen and carbon.
2 The combustible components of fossil fuels
are hydrocarbons, which are formed of
hydrogen and carbon.
3 Petrol, diesel oil and kerosene, which are the
main industrial fuels, are petroleum distillates.
4 Crude oil was formed from the chemical
transformation of organic remains which
deposited at the bottom of salty marshes and
lagoons.
Ex 3 Fill in the gaps. (5 marks)
Crude oil is composed of a mixture of oils
which can be separated out into a number of
products, such as petrol, diesel oil, kerosene
and lubricants. The main method of
separation is fractional distillation. Since the
different oils have different boiling
temperatures, they are isolated in fractions of
different boiling ranges. This separation
process is carried out in a fractionating tower.
Ex 4 Underline and correct the mistakes in
these sentences by changing the adjectives.
(3 marks, 0.5 each)
1 The temperature is lower at the
bottom than at the top of the tower. higher
2 The hydrocarbons with the highest
boiling point are condensed at the
top of the tower. lowest
3 The hydrocarbons that remain at
the base of the column are the
lightest hydrocarbons. heaviest
151
25-03-2013 10:36:43
 teacher’s book
4 The heavier hydrocarbons rise
to the top. lighter
5 The lighter hydrocarbons evaporate
at higher temperatures. lower
6 The heavier hydrocarbons have
fewer carbon atoms in their molecules. lighter
Ex 5 Fill in the table. (6 marks)
1 In this process the heavy oils are
heated to a temperature of 450°C
to break their molecules. Cracking
2 It takes place when the fuel
burns before the piston reaches
the cylinder bottom. Detonation
3 The various kinds of petrol are
distinguished by their... octane value
4 In this process the molecular
chains of petrol are modified
to increase its octane value. Reforming
5 It is a well-known aromatic
hydrocarbon. Benzene
6 They are added to petrol to Aromatic
increase the octane value. hydrocarbons
UNIT 24 – Kinds of energy
& energy sources
Ex 1 Mark the following sentences as True or
False, then underline the mistakes in the false
sentences and write the corrections on the
dotted lines. (6 marks)
1 (F) Energy exists in two forms,
as either mechanical or kinetic
energy. potential
2 (F) Kinetic energy is the energy
of position. movement
3 (F) Kinetic energy is stored
energy. Potential
4 (T)
5 (F) The chemical energy of the
fuel is kinetic energy. potential
6 (T)
Ex 2 Fill in the gaps by using the given words.
(8 marks)
There are different types of energy and each of
them can be converted into another type: from
chemical into thermal, into mechanical, etc.
While energy can continuously be transformed,
some of the primary energy sources cannot/
can’t continuously be replaced by Nature.
These are known as non-renewable energy
sources and consist of fossil fuels: coal, oil,
natural gas. Fossil fuels are found in deposits
which were created over many thousands of
152
04_KeyTest.indd 152
years, from the chemical transformation of
unicellular plants and animals under the ground.
Ex 3 Answer the questions by writing
complete sentences. (6 marks)
1 Energy is the capacity for doing work.
2 Electrical energy is a secondary form of
energy.
3 We need energy sources to produce useful
power and run machinery.
4 A heat engine is a prime mover/an energy
converter.
5 Carbon dioxide is the best known of
greenhouse gases.
6 It is given off when fossil fuels burn with
oxygen.
Ex 4 Choose the correct option. (4 marks, 0.5
for each answer)
1c, 2b, 3c, 4a, 5a, 6c, 7b, 8c
Ex 5 Choose the correct words to fill in the
gaps. (6 marks)
1 Solar panels are prime movers which collect
sunlight.
2 Water wheels convert the natural power of
water into mechanical energy.
3 A hydro-turbine engine uses water to drive
its wheel.
4 A fuel is a material for producing heat or
other forms of energy.
5 The various types of energy are classified as
primary or secondary types.
6 The energy stored in fuels is released
through a combustion process.
UNIT 25 – Heat energy & heat engines
Ex 1 Mark the following statements as True
or False, then underline the mistakes in the
false sentences and write the corrections on
the dotted lines. (5 marks)
1 (T)
2 (F) Heat can be completely converted
into another type of energy. cannot
3 (F) A heat engine converts more
than 40% of the fuel’s energy into
mechanical work. less
4 (T)
5 (T)
Ex 2 Choose the correct option. (5 marks)
1c, 2c, 3b, 4a, 5c
Ex 3 Complete the text with the words given
in scrambled order. (8 marks)
Heat engines are given this name in this way
21-03-2013 11:12:52

because they convert thermal energy or heat
into mechanical work. They are classified into
two groups: internal and external combustion
engines. In external combustion engines, the
combustion process takes place in a boiler
outside the engine. In internal combustion
engines, combustion takes place in a
combustion chamber inside the engine. The
steam engine was invented by James Watt in
1765 and today’s steam turbines are external
combustion engines. Reciprocating engines
and gas turbines are internal combustion
engines. The moving parts of the engine,
turbine blades and pistons, which transform
thermal energy into work, are moved by the
action of a working fluid. Steam is the
working fluid that moves the rotor blades in
steam turbines; a flow of exhaust gases from
the combustion process drives the pistons of
reciprocating engines and the rotor of a gas
turbine.
Ex 4 Answer the questions by writing
complete sentences. (8 marks)
1 Thermal energy is produced by the constant
motion of atoms and molecules that compose
matter.
2 They are made up of hydrogen and
carbon.
3 Their chemical composition makes
hydrocarbons particularly suitable for
releasing a great amount of thermal energy
when they burn with oxygen. This quality
gives them a high heating value. / Because
they release a great quantity of heat energy
when they burn. This is why they have a high
heating value.
4 Hydrogen and carbon combine with oxygen
and form new chemical compounds.
5 When the oxidation is complete, carbon
dioxide is formed.
6 In a combustion process thermal energy or
heat is produced.
7 This energy comes from the chemical
energy stored in the fuel.
8 A heat engine converts thermal energy into
mechanical energy.
Ex 5 Fill in the gaps. (4 marks)
During the burning process, fossil fuels
release carbon dioxide into the atmosphere.
This gas contributes to the greenhouse effect,
through which the Sun’s heat is trapped in the
lower layers of the atmosphere, making the
Earth’s surface ever warmer.
04_KeyTest.indd 153
key to tests
UNIT 26 – Radio communication
on board
Ex 1 Fill in the table. (4 marks)
Channel 16 is used for distress, safety and calling.
Channel 13 is used worldwide for bridge-to-bridge
navigation.
Channel 70 is used for Digital Selective Calling.
Channel 68 is used in Italy for Maritime Safety
Information.
Ex 2 Write the full name for these acronyms.
(8 marks)
VHF Very High Frequency
ETA Estimated Time of Arrival
CRS Coastal Radio Stations
ETD Estimated Time of Departure
SAR Safety And Rescue
RT Radio Telephony
VTMS Vessel Traffic Management Services
MSI Maritime Safety Information
Ex 3 Answer the questions. (6 marks)
1 It is made up of numbers and letters and is
the ship’s unique identification code.
2 The call sign is assigned to the ship by the
country’s registration authority when the ship
is enrolled in the national register of shipping.
3 Because the ship is also registered with the
ITU.
4 It is a nine digit number and is used as an
alternative to the call sign to identify the
ship. It is automatically transmitted during
Digital Selective Calling.
5 The SMCP is a standardised safety language
and was introduced to facilitate
communication between ships of different
nationalities.
6 It is particularly important in times of
distress and danger, to avoid
misunderstandings which could lead to
disaster.
Ex 4 Fill in the gaps with the following words.
(8 marks)
1 Sandbank in position 20 degrees 34 minutes
North, 061 degrees 24 minutes West.
2 My position is: bearing one-three-seven
degrees true from Bushy Lighthouse; distance
two four decimal three miles.
3 Buoy 060 degrees on your port bow.
4 My present course is 050 degrees to Dover
Buoy.
5 My position is 5.6 miles from Sulley Point.
6 My present speed is 13 decimal 5 knots.
7 My ETA is 0500 hours Local Time.
153
21-03-2013 11:12:52
 teacher’s book
Ex 5 Indicate the correct message marker for
each message. (4 marks)
1 Do you require a tug for
berthing procedures? QUESTION
2 Dangerous obstruction
in fairway approaching
Milton docks. WARNING
3 You must keep south of
the fairway buoy. INSTRUCTION
4 I require a pilot at cross
hands pilot station. REQUEST
UNIT 27 – Radio messages
Ex 1 Put the phrases in a routine ship-to-
shore call in the correct order. (6 marks)
1e, 2f, 3d, 4b, 5c, 6a
Swansea Coast Guard, Swansea Coast Guard,
THIS IS
Lucky 499912345, Lucky 499912345.
On Ch 16, Position report.
Suggest Channel 73.
OVER.
Ex 2 Underline the mistakes in the following
sentences and write the corrections on the
dotted lines. (6 marks)
1 We use VHF channel 73 to
establish contact. 16
2 After establishing contact we
switch to a safety channel. working
3 Channel 13 must be left free for
Distress, Urgency and Safety Calls. 16
4 A ship is identified by her name,
call sign or IMO number. MMSI
5 When sailing in foreign waters
we identify our ship twice. three times
6 We use the code word OVER to
signal the end of communication. OUT
Ex 3 Answer the questions. (6 marks)
1 The standard request for a readability
report is “How do you read me?”
2 Number five indicates excellent reception.
3 Ships are required to maintain a listening
watch on Channels 16 and DSC distress
Channel 70.
4 The order of priority of maritime
radiotelephony communications is Distress
calls, Urgency calls, Safety calls and General or
routine communications.
5 The transmission of the signal MAYDAY
indicates that the vessel or the people on
board that vessel are in grave and imminent
danger and require immediate assistance.
154
04_KeyTest.indd 154
6 The signal is repeated as often as necessary
until an answer is received.
Ex 4 Make up the ship’s call and message,
using the following information and
repeating words where necessary. (6 marks)
Distress call (3 marks)
MAYDAY, MAYDAY, MAYDAY.
THIS IS
AEGEAN DOLPHIN, AEGEAN DOLPHIN,
AEGEAN DOLPHIN 299344678.
Distress message (3 marks, 0.5 for each answer)
Distress signal
MAYDAY
Name and MMSI/call sign
AEGEAN DOLPHIN, AEGEAN DOLPHIN,
AEGEAN DOLPHIN 299344678
Position
TEN NAUTICAL MILES SOUTH OF THE
ROCK OF GIBRALTAR,
POSITION: 36°2’N, 5° 20 W
Nature of distress
HOLED AND LISTING HEAVILY,
ENGINE ROOM FLOODED AND TAKING
ON WATER
Other information
THIRTY-SIX PEOPLE ON BOARD,
SEAS ROUGH
End message
OVER
Ex 5 Fill in the gaps. (6 marks)
An urgency message may only be sent on the
authority of the Master, skipper or other person
responsible for the vessel. The Urgency signal
PAN PAN is repeated three times, indicating
that the calling station needs to transmit a very
urgent message about the operational capability
of the vessel or about a person’s safety. The
safety signal SECURITÉ is usually transmitted
to all stations and communicates important
navigational or meteorological warnings.
UNIT 28 – Reciprocating engines
Ex 1 Fill in the gaps. (12 marks)
The reciprocating or piston engine is the most
common type of internal combustion engine.
In piston engines mechanical energy is
produced in a four-step cycle. This consists of
intake and compression, combustion and
exhaust of waste gases, produced in the
combustion process. This cycle can either be
performed in two or in four piston strokes.
There are two types of reciprocating engine:
21-03-2013 11:12:52
 key to tests

the petrol engine and the diesel engine. They 3 In the working cycle of a four-stroke diesel
are also known as spark-ignition engines and engine, a piston must reciprocate twice to
compression-ignition engines. In petrol complete the thermal cycle.
engines the fuel-and-air mixture is set on fire 4 A diesel engine intakes and compresses only
by a spark plug at the end of the compression air.
stroke. In diesel engines there is no need for 5 In a diesel engine, the diesel fuel mixes with
spark plugs, since the atomised fuel burns as air directly in the combustion chamber at the
soon as it enters the chamber and comes into end of the compression phase, when the
contact with the very hot compressed air. compressed air has become very hot.
Ex 2 Mark the following sentences as True or 6 It helps to reduce fuel consumption and CO2
False, then underline the mistakes in the false emission levels.
sentences and write the corrections on the
dotted lines. (6 marks) UNIT 29 – Turbine engines
1 (T) Ex 1 Answer the questions by writing
2 (F) When air is compressed, complete sentences. (6 marks)
the air-temperature is 1 Turbines are smaller and lighter than diesel
decreased. increased engines; they can produce more power than a
3 (F) In a petrol engine, the diesel engine of the same size.
air-temperature is higher 2 Steam turbines are one-way engines, this
than in a diesel engine. lower means that when they are used for ship
4 (F) Petrol engines either in a propulsion a separate turbine is necessary to
operate in a four-stroke two- or a make the ship go astern. In addition, since
cycle. four-stroke cycle they rotate at a very high speed, very large
5 (T) reduction gears are necessary to connect the
6 (T) engine shaft to the propeller shaft. Finally,
Ex 3 Complete the crossword. (6 marks, steam turbines consume more fuel than diesel
0.5 for each word) engines. (2 marks)
3 The two essential functional parts of a steam
1
turbine are a stationary element called a steam
C distributor, and a rotary element called a rotor.
2 3
Y P C 4 The steam distributor transforms the heat
1 4
I D L E C I R energy of steam into kinetic energy, because
5 2
F I C A M S H A F T steam expands (totally or partially) in this
L N R T N part of the turbine.
3 6
C Y L I N D E R B L O C K 5 Mechanical energy is produced in the moving
W N E U N S blades of a steam turbine, which transform the
H J R R R H steam energy into rotary motion.
E E E I A Ex 2 In what parts of a gas turbine do these
4 5
E C P I S T O N F O U R working steps occur? Fill in the gaps.
L T T G T (2 marks, 0.5 for each answer)
O O S 1 The air kinetic energy is increased in the
6
S P A R K R compressor by adding pressure energy.
S 2 The fluid receives heat energy as it burns
with the fuel in the combustion chamber.
Ex 4 Talk about the diesel engine and answer 3 The heat energy of the hot gases is
the questions by writing complete sentences. converted back into kinetic energy by the
(6 marks) turbine blades.
1 In the working cycle of a four-stroke diesel 4 The efflux of high velocity gases which is
engine, mechanical power is only produced generated is partly used to operate the
during the combustion phase/stroke. compressor, while the remaining energy can be
2 Heat is transformed into mechanical work used for useful work to operate machinery.
by the piston when it is pushed down by the Ex 3 Complete the text with the missing
expanding/exhaust gases. words. (6 marks)

155

04_KeyTest.indd 155 21-03-2013 11:12:52

 teacher’s book
Nowadays, steam turbines are used in
industrial plants, such as electric power stations,
and very few are still found on board ship. Gas
turbines are used in many naval vessels, in
some container ships and fast ferries.
Both gas turbines and piston engines have a
four-step working cycle, but the steps follow
one after the other in the cylinders of a diesel
engine, while they are performed at the same
time in the different parts of a gas turbine. In
fact, the gas turbine engine eliminates the
three idle strokes, because combustion occurs
continuously.
Ex 4 Underline the mistakes in the following
sentences and write the corrections on the
dotted lines. (6 marks)
1 A steam turbine is an internal
combustion engine. external
2 The steam flow enters the
turbine through the moving
elements of the engine. stationary
3 After entering the engine,
steam has a high pressure and
a low velocity. Before
4 As steam expands, its velocity
is reduced. increased
5 Impulse turbines have alternate
rows of stationary and moving
blades. Reaction
6 Steam expands in the
stationary parts of the engine. moving
Ex 5 Choose the correct option. (4 marks,
0.5 for each answer)
1c, 2b, 3a, 4b, 5a, 6a, 7c, 8b
Ex 6 Complete the text about steam turbines.
(6 marks)
In the impulse turbine, steam expands totally
in the nozzle, where the steam heat energy is
converted into kinetic energy. Here steam
loses pressure but acquires velocity.
In the reaction turbine, steam expands both
in the stationary and in the moving blades.
Therefore, steam pressure is constantly
reduced as the steam flow passes through
both sets of blades. Steam velocity, instead, is
increased in the moving blades.
UNIT 30 – The inert gas system
Ex 1 Answer the questions by writing
complete sentences. (8 marks)
1 An inert gas is a gas that does not allow a
chemical reaction to take place.
156
04_KeyTest.indd 156
2 Oil tankers and chemical carriers carry
highly flammable cargoes.
3 Inert gas is obtained from exhaust gases,
which are cooled and purified in a special plant.
4 In the scrubbing and cooling tower the
exhaust gases are washed under jets of
seawater to cool them and remove the nitric
and sulphur oxides. (2 marks)
5 The deck water seal prevents the back-flow
of gases into the engine room when the
system is not in operation. (2 marks)
6 The pressure-vacuum breaker controls the
gas pressure in the system.
Ex 2 Fill in the gaps. (10 marks)
In the cargo tanks which contain crude oil or
petroleum by-products, a highly flammable
mixture of air and hydrocarbon vapours is
formed. This flammable mixture may catch
fire for many accidental reasons, as, for
example, a sudden static discharge. To prevent
any accidental fire or explosion from taking
place in the cargo tanks on board oil tankers
and chemical carriers, the atmospheric air in
the cargo tanks is replaced by inert gas. This
gas contains such a low percentage of oxygen
as to be unable to feed a combustion process.
Ex 3 Complete each sentence with a suitable
verb in the correct form to express purpose.
(4 marks)
1 Inert gas is used on board oil tankers to
replace atmospheric air in the cargo tanks.
2 Compressors are used to compress the inert
gas to the desired pressure.
3 Inert gas is used on board to make the
atmosphere inert in the cargo tanks.
4 Since inert gas contains too little oxygen
and is not safe to breathe, it is necessary to
remove inert gas by ventilation with fresh air,
before technicians can inspect them.
Ex 4 Underline the mistakes in the following
sentences and write the corrections on the
dotted lines. (4 marks)
1 The inert gas enters the deck seal
under pressure when the system
is not in operation. is
2 When the gas pressure is too
low, the oil rises up the cylinder
of the pressure vacuum breaker
and pushes the gas out into the
atmosphere. high
3 The gas is sent to the cargo tanks
at a pressure lower than atmospheric
pressure. higher
21-03-2013 11:12:52
 key to tests

4 When the gas pressure is too high,
the oil rises up the gas inlet tube of
a pressure vacuum breaker and
pushes the gas up into the pipeline. low
Ex 5 Complete the crossword. (4 marks,
0.5 for each word)
1 2
P C
3
N I
1
R E F I N E R I E S P
T E
2
N O N R E T U R N V A L V E
O I
G N
43
O X Y G E N A N A L Y Z E R
X N
I unit stores four different types of message.
4
D E M I S T E R F I L T E R
I routine calls. At the coast station, ship-to-shore
S distress calls/alerts receive priority handling and
E are routed to the nearest Rescue Coordination
D Centre (RCC). On board ship, DSC receivers
UNIT 31 – The GMDSS
Ex 1 Answer the questions by writing
complete sentences. (12 marks)
1 It stands for Global Maritime Distress and
Safety System.
2 It is called a global system because it
operates everywhere in the world.
3 It is designed to ensure the transmission of
distress communications from ships sailing
everywhere in the world, leaving no isolated
areas or shadow areas for reception. / It is
designed to ensure the immediate reception
of any distress signal transmitted by a ship, in
whatever area of the world the ship is
navigating.
4 It became fully operational in 1999.
5 The GMDSS is based on a combination of
both satellite communication systems and
terrestrial radio systems.
6 A distress call can be rapidly received by
ships nearby and by one of the many land-
based communication and rescue stations.
7 It is the satellite constellation which is an
integral part of the GMDSS.
8 The Inmarsat constellation divides the Earth
into four regions: the Atlantic Ocean Regions
East and West, the Indian Ocean Region and
the Pacific Ocean Region.
9 There are giant antennas which can send
and receive the signals from satellites.
10 There is an Italian LES which is located in
Abruzzo, on the Fucino plateau.
11 All cargo ships of 300 Gross Tonnes (GT)
and above are requested to carry the GMDSS
mandatory equipment.
12 All passenger ships engaged on
international voyages are requested to carry
O the GMDSS mandatory equipment.
O
L Ex 2 Fill in the gaps. (8 marks)
Digital Selective Calling (DSC) is used to
automate the transmission and reception of
R
distress alerts sent via VHF, MF and HF radio. In
S
every message the DSC transmitter-receiver
automatically includes the ship’s identity with
the MMSI number of the calling ship. The DSC
These may be distress, urgency, safety or
sound an alarm when a distress call is received.
Ex 3 Complete the table about the GMDSS
mandatory communication equipment.
(4 marks)
1 The special buoy which
automatically transmits the ship’s
identity, position and alarm call
on the satellite radio frequency. EPIRB
2 A portable Radar Transponder
(receiver and transmitter) SART or
designed to be used in lifeboats. AIS-SART
3 The overall term for weather
reports, navigational warnings
and Search and Rescue Maritime
information which can be Safety
transmitted by navigational Information
telex (NAVTEX). (MSI)
4 This means of communication Portable
is designed to operate in the VHF
VHF marine band in voice transceiver /
mode, allowing communications handheld
between searching vessels and VHF radio
survivors in lifeboats. or walkie-
talkie
Ex 4 Fill in the table with the GMDSS sea
areas. (6 marks)
Sea Area
1 This is the sea area which lies
within the coverage of an Inmarsat

157

04_KeyTest.indd 157 25-03-2013 10:36:05

 teacher’s book
geostationary satellite. A3
2 This is the sea area which lies
above 70° N and below 70° S. A4
3 This is a sea area approximately
within 100-150 nautical miles. A2
4 This is the sea area over 150 miles
from the coast where ships must carry
an Inmarsat earth station. A3
5 This is the sea area which lies within
the radiotelephone coverage of at
least one VHF coast station. A1
6 This sea area lies within the
radiotelephone coverage of at
least one MF coast station. A2
UNIT 32 – Integrated navigation
Ex 1 Answer the questions. (6 marks)
1 An Integrated Bridge System is a combination
of systems which are interconnected to allow
centralised access to information or command/
control from workstations.
2 The primary computer collects, processes
and integrates the incoming information and
then distributes it back to all the components
of the system.
3 Information about the ship’s position and
speed, water depth, presence of other ships
in the area, alarms and warnings.
4 Because there are many different models on
the market.
5 IMO safety requirements recommend that it
must be possible to operate each single
instrument separately.
6 ABS is the American Bureau of Shipping
and it is the US classification society.
Ex 2 Fill in the table (4 marks)
A gyrocompass gives gyrocompass bearings.
Logs measure water surface
speed.
Doppler logs measure SOG.
Echo sounders measure the distance
between the keel and the
seabed.
Anemometers measure wind direction and
speed.
The Radar system indicates stationary or
moving objects near the
ship.
GPS indicates the ship’s position
using information from a
satellite.
NAVTEX Navigational telex.
158
04_KeyTest.indd 158
Ex 3 Underline the mistakes in the following
sentences and write the corrections on the
dotted lines. (6 marks)
1 ARPA stands for Automatic
Range Plotting Aids. Radar
2 An ARPA target is measured
by range and speed from one’s
own ship. bearing
3 The ARPA system sounds an
echo sounder when there is any
danger of collision with another
ship. alarm
4 The system calculates the
necessary and possible manoeuvres
needed to cause a collision. avoid
5 These manoeuvres are known
as trick manoeuvres. trial
6 The system chooses the most
suitable manoeuvre to avoid Officer on
collision. Watch
Ex 4 Fill in the gaps. (6 marks)
The essential task of the Officer on Watch
(OOW) is to ensure the ship’s safe navigation.
This means that bridge workstations display a
series of audible and visual alarms. The OOW
should always “acknowledge” an alarm and
take action to adjust the indicated problem.
The ship’s movement is also monitored by
visual observation from the conning station or
position, which allows the OOW a
“commanding view”. Integrated Bridge
Systems also have a route planning
workstation which today is usually fitted with
an ECDIS, specifically designed to display ENCs.
Ex 5 Reorder the steps in planning a route on
an ECDIS. (8 marks)
1h, 2f, 3a, 4i, 5b, 6e, 7d, 8c, 9g
1 Check that you have the necessary up-to-
date ENC charts.
2 Enter your own ship’s draft and establish a
safety contour based on your draft.
3 Enter a safety draft.
4 Enter beam clearance.
5 Establish a safety domain.
6 Create your passage plan.
7 Check your whole route in detail.
8 Visualise your route.
9 Save your route and export it to the
workstation.
21-03-2013 11:12:53
 Contents

Contents

Struttura del corso 3 Unit 16 103

Key to unit exercises 5 Unit 17 105

Grammar – Key to exercises 68 Unit 18 107

Unit tests 73 Unit 19 109

Unit 1 73 Unit 20 111

Unit 2 75 Unit 21 113

Unit 3 77 Unit 22 115

Unit 4 79 Unit 23 116

Unit 5 81 Unit 24 118

Unit 6 83 Unit 25 120

Unit 7 85 Unit 26 122

Unit 8 87 Unit 27 124

Unit 9 89 Unit 28 126

Unit 10 91 Unit 29 128

Unit 11 93 Unit 30 130

Unit 12 95 Unit 31 132

Unit 13 97 Unit 32 134

Unit 14 99 Key to tests 136

Unit 15 101

159

04_KeyTest.indd 159 21-03-2013 11:12:53